Home

User Manual

Contents

1. n 000067269 ASSY Fed d er 1 1 2 mg umm E m 63 eed Teu 162 192 299 m ixi mu 92 82
2. diay av WRGOOD T R43 R44 2 R45 R46 ib 80626 R26 5 100K 0 OHM NOSSTUFF AJSK 2 25 TRIGITRACE 2218 TRIGITRACE 3 Sm AE21 5 1 5 AE25 e AF21 JTAG TDI 1 JTAG TDI 74521 TAG 6 NC JTAG TCK 4 1 7 AD26 NC RIND _AD3_PIO31 RING2 N 9 PI I 025 PIOSU RINZ
3. ute US MIC8115TU 8 5 U1B 56520 3 MR n vec 4 gt 1 GND RESET 2 20 PwRGOOD Plo14 GPiRag AEB PIOM GPIROS a 8 9 022 RESET 9 PRGRESEL D20 PRGRESET 120 475 SHT id 7 4 75K PORE 9___ DACKI N tippy PIO11 GPDACKT 9 PlozicPbRQ1 AF10 DREQI E 8 e Plote GPiRa7 AEZ PIOTS GPIRQ7 e 8 9 PIOT IGPIRQS plotwePiRas 07 PIOTB GPIROS ADS PIOTS GPIRO4 _ TV49 AE6 20 T 20 6 E PIOZO GPIRQS 5 2 2 8 g g 2 nm E ROMCS1 N GPCST N B24 TVs DSPRSTN 59 lt ROMCSZ NIGPCSZ N C23 START 58 EAC Pa PITGATE2 GPCS3 ROMCSZA GPCSZN 57 i 56 Rasa TMR
4. FRONT PANEL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM FRONT SIDE RS12 8513 RS7 RS8 RS9 pues JODI FY SYSTEM RO ETUP ESSI NG PRESET REVI OUS NEXT ESCAPE RECAL L 2 4 BOFT 3 T 6 40 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300
5. 5VA 1201 1 C201 L200 MALE FILTER 1 0uF R253 R257 b 2 CXV EN 1 0 T L208 T 0 ero C236 240 R261 5 C203 E a D ne 50V 3dB 0 10Hz 15 8 2 77 504 4 4 5 E 5 2 3 3V t 4 Pel 1C213 m EFT 1 4 4 AGND UTPUT 0287 C241 1201 9 N 77 2 Af ic211 8 45K 8 45K 82 5K 1 IC201B IN 3 PITER 9 1 1 1500 5 OPA2194UA kun K 2 at e 195 50 7 A R254 R258 l B 8 lt IC204A 6 R247 1100 must dcm ac ERE AOUT MCLK 3 9 OPA2134UA rs RSTDA N 21 lt Our 17 c217 2 i R204 R205 R210 1 00M 1 75V 1000PF SSS AOUT BCLK _ 5 lt 2 7 3 48K C234 L205 DATA 6 25 1 50 3 48K 1 8 45K 206 3 L205 SHT9 GOUT 6 SDATA PS n 196 SHTO 7 Fane ERU 45V R245 1 Long HK p 8 SMUTE E R233 91 O 47HF R237 9 22 1 11 3K 9 d 10 0K 1 ONT E202 SA NA E A 0 gt 0 DES 19 DEMO AoUTL 23 4 845 1 845 1 825K 1 _
6. RP2 1 129 1 16 FY7 176 155 SGH BEN mee muere 40 ES 40 15 i Bes 74HC14A 74HCMA 5Q 5Q 14 F6 14 6 1 2 20 13 F7 13 7 10 FYI ICD 12 F8 12 8 9 9 8 x x RES NET P2 SA 100 OHM FYo 1 2 FYI TAHCI A 6 PA 74 574 FY2 3 4 FY3 74FCT574 o 2 Eva 5 IC7E F1 4 F2 DISCOL B FY6 7 8 FY7 11 10 F3 5 6 F4 2 FY8 9 10 FY9 i F5 71218 F6 FY10 1 112 F7 9 10 F8 FYI2 13 14 Y RA 9 1 1 12 F10 47 FY14 15 16 FY15 45V FH 13 22 45V F13 15 24 8x2 FOSTS A 5 8x2 FOSTS 19 F9 19 1 16 15 10 718 10 10 18 2 15 14 gt 29 17 28 17 3 14 10 16 F12 20 16 4 13 12 15 F13 5015 5 12 14 F14 74 6 11 10 70 15 7o 7 10 FY9 12 F16 12 8 9 8 8 5 5 RES 100 1 745 574 e gt ep Oe 2 0 4 DISROW B DISCOPA 77777772 a3 5V A7PF a 47 MAIN BOARD 19 FI7 D 0 7 000 71 v Hs 18 F18 17 F19 JP203 P5 5V 16 F20 JP202 4Q 1 2 15 F21 5Q 3 4 1 1 14 F22 60 13 F23 5 6 3 2 70 5 7 8 3 49VB 806 9 10 4 4 4 N C F15 1 2 F16 11 12 __ 2 c5 C6 gt 68
7. N STUFF C MP NENT REF BESIGNATOR 6300 9300 R159 160 R161 R162 N STUFF C132 C133 C134 C135 N STUFF L204 L205 L206 L207 N STUFF L208 L209 1 219 L211 N STUFF R253 R254 R255 R256 N STUFF 257 R258 R259 R260 Ne STUFF R261 R262 R263 264 N STUFF C236 C237 C238 C239 N STUFF C248 C241 C242 C243 N STUFF J301 J302 J401 N STUFF C311 C312 C313 C314 C315 N STUFF C317 C318 C319 C401 N STUFF R305 R306 R307 R309 N STUFF R312 R313 R314 R315 R316 N STUFF R403 R404 R405 N STUFF e300 N STUFF 1 301 IC304 492 404 N STUFF 1 405 10408 IC411 N STUFF 149 N STUFF 1302 L303 L402 L403 N STUFF R106 R119 Ne STUFF N STUFF C316 N STUFF N STUFF R601 R602 R603 N STUFF N STUFF TP901 902 994 N STUFF N STUFF 1 0 DSP BOARD PARTS LOCATOR ORBAN MODEL 6300 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL
8. TP902 NO STUFF TO CONTROL COMBO PCA e 5V 5V TP DUAL c J900 1 45V 5V J901 2 EI d __ C946 1 1 7 6995 oode C947 C948 C949 C950 C951 C952 C953 C954 C955 C956 C957 C958 C959 C1003 C1004 2 5 1016 20V 20 0 1yF 0 1yF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1yF 0 1yF 0 1yF 0 1yF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1yF 0 1yF 01 6 E 4 2 2 Ld 2 Ld Ld 2 2 HDR 6 TP903 lt V TP DUAL M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 TESTING ACCESS 15V AGND 1 902 zu 1 8V 1902 TP900 m 15 T8MOSCT 1903 1 9V 0932 c936 0934 c938 C940 0942 C944 SO 1 2 2 20V 0 1yF 0 1yF 0 1uF 0 1yF 0 1uF 0 1yF 0 1yF 2 our 3 3 4 ve 1 4 T 1 i gt 3 3 7 8 HDR 4 lt T 01012 m MES 8 10 KEY 2002 C933 coa OND4 co35 gg44 GND2 C943 0945 AGNDI 01 Tur HDR 5X2 T AGND 20V 0 1yF 0 1yF 0 1uF 0 1yF 0 1yF 0 1yF 0 1yF 4 2 10 esses D TRIMMED KEY AGND 1 9 3 3V Note 3 3V come gt r1 from CONTROL oa COMBO PCA via J701 2e D lt lt gt lt gt lt gt gt p 2e gt lt gt lt gt gt gt lt gt lt gt lt g
9. TECHNICAL DATA LEFT ANALOG INPUT Hw tiov R130 FEMALE En IC100A 3 65K 1 50K 1 1 2 1 100 L101 R101 ML OPA2134PA 0 176 C108 101 et C101 gt 1000 C100 47 ATPF 596 100 5 100V 1 2 R159 R132 6 IC104B 4 CRIO 777 R102 15V 15V R137 TRANSZORB 5 36K AGND1 196 5 2490HM 0 1 OPA2134UA 9 1 777 IC101 R156 R134 ADG442ABRZ R111 S 1 62K 1 50K 196 5VA 3 3V 7680HM 196 R138 gt C109 C110 AGND1 R10 o 2 g 196 R133 1500HM gt 4700PF 4700 82 5K 22 84 3 AGND1 3 65 AGND1 1 S 5 50 5 50 1 2p NUR 0 1 _ 129 0127 C128 6130 15 Do 14 zy 15V D3 196 R106 7 11 2 1C104A _ NO STUFF f R113 8 ict05A 1 139 i i 1 g ___ L_AAA 1 5 s4 6 5 62K 113 P RES 2490HM AKS383 VS 9 1 1 lt P T1 EE 8 6131 C118 0119 gt gt 15V 5VA T 0uF 0 1yF 0 1uF 1 6 IC1008 7 20V Sov 50V VREFL ZCAL 1
10. 1 1 11 441 1 21 Using OPTIMOD 6300 in Streaming 1 21 Loudness isset 1 21 choosing your Encoder a RE ae 1 22 EAS TEST 5 a ev 1 22 PC CONTROL AND SECURITY 55 1 23 WARRANTY USER FEEDBACK 1 24 Feedback sud instet mto o ir ur 1 24 LIMITED WARRANT 1 24 INTERNATIONAL 1 7 ennt nnn nnn tnnt nta snnt nennen 1 24 EXTENDED WARRANTY nnn nnn nnt tnnt nan nts n 1 25 Section 2 Installation MAX Mee Cem 2 1 INSTALLING THE 6300 1 e ar IEEE esce EN VE 2 1 Figure 2 1 AC Line Cord Wire 5 2 2 Figure 2 2 Wiring the 25 pin Remote Interface 2 3 6300 REAR PANEL acere te ie edv e Te dva Ve pe d EUR gw 2 5 INPUT AND OUTPUT 60 10115 2 5
11. i T ens 1 0 DSP BOARD DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 1 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 33 E49 E34 E35 E38 IC501A IC502A IC503A IC504A DSP56367 150 E28 E29 DSP56367 150 E30 1 DSP56367 150 E32 E33 DSP56367 150 SHT9 503 11 5000 4 14 5000 4 11 00 5000 2 14 5000 gt SHT9 SHT9 Se 9 5001 5 9 5001 9 5001 9 5001 gt SHT9 gt pr thg g 5003 5012 3002 5013 gt gt SHT9 44 SDO3 SDI2 002 5013 77 5003 5012 5002 5013 44 5003 9012 5002 5013 gt gt SHT9 gt FSR Fst 12 3 SHT9 FSR FST 72 _F SYNCAK 1 FSR Fst 12 13 FSR FST 12 34 SHT9 SHT9 gt 79 SCKR SCKT 14 SHT9 12 SCKR SCKT 44 SHT9 15 SCKR SCKT 14 SHT9 12 SCKR SCKT 14 SHT9 HCKR HC
12. DQ6 DQ5 DQ4 DQ2 DQ1 090 UDQM LDQM D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 VPEN STS MDj0 31 12 U2A MT48LC16 U1A SC520 LN 26 12 12 36 53 MD15 MA12 36 12 U26 11 35 12 pare St MD14 11 35 212 MD31 A24 T26 43V 22 50 MD13 22 MD31 10 23 8013 MD30 A23 1 R26 MAS MAS pale MD12 aay MAS MD29 821 030 MAG R25 MAB MAB 33 9 47 MD11 33 MAB 9 MD28 20 MD29 525 MAT MAT 32 8 45 MD10 MAT 32 8 MD27 A19 P26 31 24 MD9 MAG 31 MD27 MAG R7 A6 DQ9 R8 A6 MD26 B18 027 MAS N26 MAS M Pk MAS 30 6 0832 MDB MA5 30 46 MD25 A17 026 N25 MA4 MA4 29 45 Ze IEE MD7 MA4 29 45 MD24 816 025 M25 26 Da t 26 MD23 024 26 2 2 5 5 Dao 10 MD5 25 MD22 814 23 26 24 MD4 24 2 MD21 A13 25 23 7 23 MD21 MAO DQ3 MD20 B12 021 Das MD2 810 019 BAI 125 BAO t 20 2 MDO 20 EA 8 4018 BAO Dao BAO MD16 B8 CKELOW mere SDQM1 CKEHIGH 37 oye Mb15 823 Mp45 LDQM MD14 22 SWEA E26 RAMWE N 16 16 MN MD13 A21 F25 RAMCAS N 17 17 MD13 SCASA
13. 888 Hu co lt lt Dr mmu ER Hm Hr 923 984 Lp zi as 0 zus MN ua Sai 9n 1 ie E 6 Bi mma i E 65 0 di Zu 1312 TT J C jm ozn een 4 4 az n HIT 1919 52 seu T n 2 m 9c ws zo Dll ma 88 mm mmm gt m 149 512 055 a zio E m ac nnn m 8 mH B c ne 3910 gt mH P zey 6 zz n E e 5 EH 2g ma NN Ms 2 624 m m Toa E ex mE E 1810 Em 5 T gt _ oye 90 u INY mi 2 2 L 5 mm SQ m L e mm Mis 0252 L LIES 262 ul 9812 m A BH ann 1 zn HOS BN vin T mmu B 502 igi mm m m nb 0 m m 27 mmu HH HN mmu mg 49 10
14. i m EARTH GND GREEN YELLOW PLUG FOR 230 VAC EUROPEAN Figure 2 1 AC Line Cord Wire Standard A Check the power cord ORBAN MODEL 6300 AC power passes through an IEC standard mains connector and an RF fil ter designed to meet the standards of all international safety authorities The power cord is terminated in a U ground plug USA standard or CEE7 7 plug Continental Europe as appropriate to your 6300 s Model Number The green yellow wire is connected directly to the 6300 chassis If you need to change the plug to meet your country s standard and you are qualified to do so see Figure 2 1 Otherwise purchase a new mains cord with the correct line plug attached 3 Mount the 6300 in a rack The 6300 requires one standard rack unit 1 34 inches 6 4 cm There should be good ground connection between the rack and the 6300 chas sis check this with an ohmmeter to verify that the resistance is less than 0 50 It is wise to allow ventilation above and below the unit Mounting the unit over large heat producing devices such as a vacuum tube power amplifier may shorten component life and is not recommended Ambient temperature should not exceed 45 C 113 F when equipment is powered Equipment life will be extended if the unit is mounted away from sources of vi bration such as large blowers and is operated as cool as possible 4 Connect inputs and outputs See the
15. 2 SHT9 S C313 3 RST 20 gaio R307 49 9K 1 AES 300 0 22UF 0 022UF 10 19 SHT8 V RMCK INT 19 SINT 5 lt gt ud R306 11 RERR Sour 18 in 6040HM n 12 oLRck H7 SYNGINERGK SHT5 V 13 056 HE SYNCINSCLK gt SHT5 SHT8 gt SRCRST N K spin tes 15 E317 SHT5 lt SYNCINRMCK R316 R317 lt 3318 T 499K 658427052 PIK 49 9K lt 49 9 1 n n n R344 100 0K E314 7 C319 1 E305 0 01yF 22 R315 100 0K 1 WY E304 1 0 DSP DIGITAL AND SYNC INPUTS TECHNICAL DATA 6 3 1 32 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 1 400 6403 AES EBU 50 D
16. R38 10 0K 33 7 22 Gpaz C9 GPA23 298 25 ISA A12 BUFFRD N 1 BUFFRD N gt SHT 5 L 21 C14 GPA20 i ISA A18 21 20 GPA20 ISA A13 63 RESETDRV N ISA JORD N C21 GPA19 R3 4 75 we ISA A14 23 RESETDRV N 63_RESETORI N 7 sHT3 ACORN 19 822 18 m gt SHT3 ISA A15 25 DSPRST N 18 GPA18 ISA A15 68 SYSTEM SMEMRD N 24_ GPA 7 ISA A16 28 19 RESET N 17 GPA17 524 ISA A17 30 SAAG ISA RESET 09 SA RESET gt 16 GPA16 ISA A17 75 SMEMRD N 3 4 TSMEMWR N 25 ISA AT8 31 SMEMRD N 15 SHT3 x ISA A18 81 MEMRDN 7 ISA AEN 6 USA TAALVC164245 ISA ATS 32 ISA MEMRD N 81 MEMRDN J13 HDR 2X2 14 pane _AF12PIO1 GPBHE N _ 4 S PA 0 25 20 33 SA 19 isA MEMWR N 83_ISA_MEMWR N ISA DO 13 PIO1 GPBHE FT2PIOT GPBHEN GPA15 47 Gay mm 2 ISA 15 38 A20 85 PRGRESET ADDRESS DECODE CONFIGURATION 5401 8 ch mas 46 An 23 35 21 START 97 START gt NOT USED ON CURRENT CONFIGURATION e GPA15 GPA13 4 5 A13 ISA A22 98 ISA ORDN TISA D2 R24 GPA14 GPA12 43 ISA A12 A23 37 5423 ISA 1 og AEN 5 1SA_D3 10 GPA13 224 1 4 14 184 ISA AT ISA A24 93 A24 1 10015 IOWR N lt 1SA_D5 9 N24 GPA12 1A5 1B5 ISA A25 92 ISA IOW
17. g Connection Lists Disconnect the connection in the Connection List 51 3 All Connections window 8300 8300 modem modem If the connection is successful a dialog bubble will appear on the bottom right hand corner of the screen verifying your connection If you have trouble making a connection refer to Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect on page 5 10 If you have trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instructions above try restarting your computer to Clear its serial port 3 To change the properties of an existing connection Right click the connection in the connection List window and choose Proper ties The Connection properties window opens see page 2 58 Updating your 6300 s Software The software version number of PC Remote must be the same as the version number of the software running within your 6300 If the software version of PC Remote is higher than the version running in your 6300 PC Remote will automatically detect this and will offer to update your 6300 s software automatically 1 If you have not already done so prepare your computer and the 6300 for a direct serial modem or Ethernet connection See Networking and Remote Control starting on page 2 36 2 Install the latest version of 6300 PC Remote software on your computer This is available from ftp orban com 6300 See Installing 6300 PC Remote Control Software on pa
18. Disconnect 8300 8300 modem If you have trouble making a connection refer to OS Specific Troubleshooting Advice Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect on page 5 8 If you have trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instruc tions above try restarting your computer to clear its serial port OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 63 3 To change the properties of an existing connection Right click the connection in the connection List window and choose Proper ties The Connection properties window opens see page 2 58 Connecting using Windows XP Modem Connection 1 Add and configure modem for Windows XP Skip this step if your modem is already configured and working A Configure the Windows XP PC ports Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer a If you are using an external modem connect the modem to a serial port on your PC b Make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line C Click Start Control Panel Systems d Go to the Hardware tab and click Device Manager e In the Device Manager dialog box click the next to the Ports COM and LPT icon A list will branch off showing your available ports f Double click Communications Port COM1 or COM2 depending on how you set up your system The Communications Port Comx Properties dialog box opens Not all PCs have a COM2 IM
19. 2 44 CORCIUSIODss ice ed ETA teda ra e cra 2 45 APPENDIX SETTING UP SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 2 47 Preparing for Communication through Null Modem Cable 2 47 Connecting Using Windows XP Direct Serial 2 52 Preparing for Communication through Modems sse 2 57 Connecting Using Windows 2000 Modem Connection 2 57 Connecting using Windows XP Modem Connection 2 63 UPDATING YOUR 630075 2 68 Section 3 Operation EO MEER 3 1 6300 FRONT PANEL lt 3 1 INTRODUCTION TO PROCESSING E a aAa EELT AKEE ae 3 3 Some Audio Processing 60 5 3 3 Distortion in Processing linens petit dote dees 3 3 Loudness and Distortion viel nocet e 3 3 Processing for Low Bit Rate 60 665 nennen nennen nnne nnns 3 4 Speech Music Detector ice i ED d SD ED Ld ict Rp Edi cs 3 5 Optimod 6300
20. INE 2 5 242 2 6 Analog Audio Input siet dde iade ba e dua 2 6 Analog Audio Output aee ec e ee Bs e e eR Sa BAR 2 6 AES3 Digital Input and 0 2 7 Wordclock AES11id Sync 0 2 8 Grounding iic ite eeu a ae 2 8 POWer shes even aree 2 8 2 9 STUDIO LEVEL CONTROLLER INSTALLATION OPTIONAL 2 9 If you are using Orban 8200ST Studio Level Controller ne 2 9 Figure 2 3 8200ST Jumper Settings Factory 2 10 QUICICSETUP cerro qe rv Ds ue dw VET Ta 2 12 ANALOG AND DIGITAL I O 5 1 2 20 AUTOMATION USING THE 6300 s INTERNAL 6 00 2 29 SECURITY AND PASSCODE PROGRAMMING 2 31 Io Create a Passcode Far arr qaad Era dava vaa a dw da 2 32 To Edit a Passcod
21. 0 5 1 6 Analog Left Right 0 1 7 Remote Control Interface 1 8 Computer Interface d le Ran 1 8 RS 232 14 1 8 RJ45 Ethernet Connector 1 8 LOCATION OF OPTIMOD 6300 1 9 At the transmitter is 0 5 1 9 Where access to the transmitter is not possible 1 9 OPTIMOD 6300 at the transmitter gain control before the 5 1 10 UsiNG OPTIMOD 6300 STUDIO LEVEL CONTROLLER 1 10 STUDIO TRANSMITTER LINK 1 12 Transmission from Studio to 7 5 1 12 Digital A ERE 1 13 Microwave STS 2 EE 1 14 Analog landline PT
22. 517 3 4 F18 DISCOL A DISROW A HDR 4 68UF 0 1UF 0 1UF 0 1UF 0 1UF 0 1UF 0 1UF 0 1UF o 9 SKOA 43 14 PISROWA 25V 20 sd 6 Fag 905 16 0 ALL VERSIONS 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 74 574 Of RM bs 17 18 j Sp DISROW C F23 9 10 F24 BISCOLB 19 20 Cio 45V F25 12 226 1 25 NE Bo pif N C 24 N C V p 56 EI 25 26 NC pu ie 8 8x2 FOSTS E 26P 5 4 9 6 POLARIZING PIN 19 F24 10 0 5 18 F25 aD 30 17 F26 5V P1 VIEW FROM 4b H 114 CONTACT END 55 50 15 wc 5 4 7 14 FS2 FS3 4 558 5 6 555 6 SS So DB we FS10 7 8 ESTI ib e 12 817 2818 2819 F512 9 10 5513 110 0 5110 0 5110 0 IM 45V 45V 45V 45V 8 5x2 POSTS 5V 45V 1 19 1 Ci4 R25 R26 R27 R28 74 74 9 c5 100K sy 10805 I 196 196 196 196 NU 3 loo L2 R20 FSS 1 pRO 19 4 o 5 550 2 18 D7 2 a e 110 0 196 40 45 D 02 R21 FS6 512 4 Al B 6 D3 4 Pate fo A2 82 19 DA Q4 s 1100 1 el 2 05 05 R22 4 84 06 Q6 H 20 si V omo IC7A LES R 85 13 D7 07 12 110 0 1 1 10 0K 196 N SENSIT 8 86 ll x ROTARY ENCODER 1 2 9 a 11 D uc R23 Ps Z 2 le o 110 01 74HC374 4 45V 2 74HC245 S R24 FS9 on E LED 10 0K 1 1 7 1
23. Adjust the AI REF VU or PPM control to make the 6300 s meter indicate 10 dB gain reduction d Skip to step G Calibrate using program Skip this step if you are using Tone to calibrate the 6300 to your stan dard studio level see step E above a Verify ExT AGC is set to NO Refer to step 2 on page 2 21 b Feed normal program material to the 6300 Play program material from your studio peaking at the level to which you normally peak program material typically OVU if your console uses VU meters Adjust the AI REF VU or PPM control to make the 6300 s meters indicate an average of 10 dB gain reduction when the console s VU meter or PPM is peaking at its normal level If the AGC gain reduction meter averages less than 10 dB gain reduction higher on the meter re adjust the AI REF VU or PPM to a lower level If the AGC gain reduction meter averages more gain reduction lower on the meter re adjust the AI REF VU or PPM to a higher level When finished reset ExT AGC to YES if required e g if that was its setting prior to setting Al REF VU or PPM level Refer to step 2 on page 2 21 5 Adjust Right Channel Balance Skip this step if the channels are already satisfactorily balanced OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 23 3 dB to 3dB on right channel only 0 1 dB steps Adjust the R CH BAL control SETUP gt IO CALIB gt ANALOG CALIB gt CH BAL to achieve co
24. linear distortion but its transient response is not important e A link that passes processed audio does not need as low a noise floor as a link passing unprocessed audio However its transient response is critical In DAB ap plications such a link must be uncompressed digital and must use digital inputs and outputs to achieve best results We will elaborate below OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 1 3j Digital links Digital links may pass audio as straightforward PCM encoding or they may apply lossy data reduction processing to the signal to reduce the number of bits per sec ond required for transmission through the digital link Such lossy processing will al most invariably distort peak levels and such links must therefore be carefully quali fied before you use them to carry the peak controlled output of OPTIMOD 6300 to the transmitter For example the MPEG Layer 2 algorithm can increase peak levels up to 4dB at 160kb sec by adding large amounts of quantization noise to the signal While the desired program material may psychoacoustically mask this noise it is nevertheless large enough to affect peak levels severely For any lossy compression system the higher the data rate the less the peak levels will be corrupted by added noise so use the highest data rate practical in your system It is practical though not ideal to use lossy data reduction to pass unprocessed au dio to OPTIMOD 6300 s input The data rate should be
25. 12 0 dB B5 DWNEXP THR 18 0 12 0 dB MB DRIVE 0 25 MB GATE Off 44 15 dB LESS MORE read only 1 0 10 0 LOUD THR Off 0 0 12 0 dB PARENT PRESET read only B In Out Auto 100 Hz 200 Hz ss 0 24 dB 0 24 dB Off 0 24 dB Off 0 24 dB Off 85 MaxDeltGr 0 24 dB Off Table 3 9 Multiband Controls ORBAN MODEL 6300 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 49 The 5 band Structure s Full and Advanced Setup Controls The tables below summarize the Multiband and Band Mix controls in the dynamics section The AGC Equalizer Stereo Enhancer and look ahead limiter controls are common to both the 2 band and 5 band structures and are discussed in their own sections in Section 3 Note that advanced controls are accessible only from 6300 PC Remote software MB DRIVE Multiband Drive control adjusts the signal level going into the multi band compressor and therefore determines the average amount of gain reduction in the multiband compressor Range is 25dB Adjust the MULTIBAND DRIVE control to your taste and programming requirements Used lightly with a slow or medium release time the 5 band compressor produces an open re equalized sound that is appropriate for most sound for picture pro gramming The 5 band compressor can increase audio density when operated at a fast or medium fast release because it acts more and more like a fast limiter not a compressor
26. 21227 747 01 CAPACITOR RADIAL LEADS 470UF 16V HFS C994 21319 610 01 CAPACITOR 10uf TANT SMT C112 C122 C129 C130 C131 C804 C917 C918 C919 C920 C922 C923 C946 C995 C1010 22083 068 01 DIODE VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR 6 8 VLT CR902 22101 001 01 DIODE 1N4148WT R CR900 CR901 22102 001 01 DIODE SIGNAL 1N5711TR CR700 22104 000 01 DIODE RECTIFIER 1N5818 CR903 CR904 22106 000 01 DIODE SMCJ26C TRANZORB CR100 CR103 CR104 CR105 CR202 CR203 CR204 CR205 23214 000 01 TRANSISTOR NPN MMBT3904 Q900 24024 000 01 IC OPA2134PA 100 IC102 24307 901 01 IC LINEAR DC 5V POS 1C902 24334 000 01 IC 1 5A SWITCH REG 1 8V 1C901 24417 000 01 IC OCT D TYPE FLIPFLOP W 108 IC406 700 24753 000 01 AD1895 SRC 192KHZ 1C302 IC400 24757 000 01 IC DSPB56367PV150 150MHZ 1C501 IC502 503 504 24858 000 01 IC SO 14 SMT IC804 24945 000 01 IC 74AHC541 OCTLBUF SOL20 6701 24946 000 01 IC 8 BIT DUAL TRANSVR W 3 1C702 24951 000 01 IC HC151 8CH MUX SOIC16 407 24958 000 01 DRV134PA DIP 12213 IC214 24960 000 01 OPA2134UA 104 105 106 201 202 212 24963 000 01 5383 5 107 24980 000 01 IC 74ACT32D 410 704 24994 000 01 74ACT04 SOIC 14 1C409 807 24997 000 01 IC DAC AK4393 SSOP28 6211 27053 003 01 CONNECTO
27. 7 BYPASS GAIN dB 00 18 925 TONE FREQ 16 20 25 31 5 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 9500 10000 12500 13586 76 15000 20000 44 1 kHz and higher output SR only Step TONELVL TONE CHAN Table 3 12 Test Modes Using the 6300 PC Remote Control Software 6300 PC Remote control software allows you to access any front panel 6300 control remotely Moreover you can access all of the Advanced Modify controls that are un available from the 6300 s front panel The software also gives you the ability to backup user presets system files and automation files to your computer s storage devices hard drives etc and to restore them later to your 6300 The 6300 PC Remote software can connect to your 6300 via modem direct serial ca ble connection or Ethernet network It communicates with your 6300 via the TCP IP protocol regardless of how it is connected to your 6300 PC Remote works best on displays of 1024x768 pel or higher Scroll bars will appear when using lower resolutions Before running 6300 PC Remote you must have installed the appropriate Windows communications services on your computer By default the installer installs a short cut to 6300PC exe on your desktop and in your Start Menu under Orban Optimod 6300 6300 PC Remote can control only one 6300 at a time but it can
28. Technical Support If you require technical support contact Orban customer service Be prepared to de scribe the problem accurately Know the serial number of your 6300 this is printed on the rear panel of the unit Current contact information is found at http www orban com contact Please check Orban s website www orban com for Frequently Asked Questions and other technical tips about 6300 that we may post from time to time Manuals in pdf form and 6300 software upgrades will be posted there too click Downloads from the home page Factory Service Before you return a product to the factory for service we recommend that you refer to this manual Make sure you have correctly followed installation steps and opera tion procedures If you are still unable to solve a problem contact our Customer Ser vice for consultation Often a problem is relatively simple and can be quickly fixed after telephone consultation If you must return a product for factory service please notify Customer Service by telephone before you ship the product this helps us to be prepared to service your unit upon arrival Also when you return a product to the factory for service we rec ommend you include a letter describing the problem Please refer to the terms of your Limited One Year Standard Warranty which ex tends to the first end user After expiration of the warranty a reasonable charge will be made for parts labor an
29. The algorithms filter compress and limit the audio signal The four DSP chips each operating at approximately 150 million instructions per second MIPS for a total of 600 MIPS provide the necessary signal processing A sampling rate of 48 kHz is used System initialization normally occurs when power is first applied to the 6300 and can occur abnormally if the 6300 s watchdog timer forces the SC520 to reboot Upon ini tialization the 5 520 CPU downloads the DSP executable code stored in the flash memory This typically takes about 7 seconds Once a DSP chip begins executing its program execution is continuous The SC520 provides the DSP program with pa rameter data representing information like the settings of various processing con trols and extracts the front panel metering data from the DSP chips During system initialization the C520 queries the DSP hardware about its opera tional status and will display an error message on screen if the DSP fails to initialize normally Please note any such messages and be ready to report them to Orban Cus tomer Service The DSP chips are located on the I O DSP board see the drawings starting on page 6 29 Power Supply Warning Hazardous voltages are present in the power supply when it is connected to the AC line Several parts including the heat sink are hot to the AC power line Except for servicing do not remove the insulating shield from the power supply The power supply is
30. it C ede eee E eds 6 18 Display Board cut ttt dite e cuta c 6 19 SCHEMATICS AND PARTS LOCATOR DRAWINGS 6 19 Function Description Drawing Page Chassis Circuit Board Locator and Basic In Top view 6 21 terconnections not to scale Control board Control microprocessor Services Parts Locator 6 22 front panel serial port Ethernet Drawing and DSP I O board Contains General Purpose bus address de Schematic 1 of 5 6 23 coder DSP and I O interface Memory and clock generation Schematic 2 of 5 6 24 Ethernet Schematic 3 of 5 6 25 Miscellaneous input output Schematic 4 of 5 6 26 Power and Ground Schematic 5 of 5 6 27 l O DSP Board Analog Input output Parts Locator 6 28 AES3 Input output Drawing DSP Chips Local regulators Contains L and R Analog Inputs Schematic 1 of 9 6 29 L and R Analog Outputs Schematic 2 of 9 6 30 Digital Input and Sync Input Schematic 3 of 9 6 31 Digital Outputs Schematic 4 of 9 6 32 DSP Extended Serial Audio Inter Schematic 5 of 9 6 33 face ESAI and Host Interface DSP Serial Peripheral Interface Schematic 6 of 9 6 34 Power and Ground General Purpose bus 8 bit Schematic 7 of 9 6 35 Serial Audio Interface and Clock Schematic 8 of 9 6 36 Generation Power Distribution Schematic 9 of 9 6
31. 0 50 dB 0 50 dB B4 Knee 0 50 dB B5 Knee 0 50 dB Transient Enhance 0 10 ms Table 3 11 MB Attack Release Controls You can use these controls to set independent frequency balances for music and speech page 3 5 3 52 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 MB GATE Multiband Gate Threshold control determines the lowest input level that will be recognized as program by OPTIMOD 6300 lower levels are considered to be noise or background sounds and cause the AGC or multiband compressor to gate effectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing The multiband gate only works appropriately when the KNEE and Ratio controls of all bands are set identically which is typically the case in broadcast applications We recommend turning off the multiband gate if the individual KNEE and RATIO settings are unequal There are two independent gating circuits in the 6300 The first affects the AGC and the second affects the multiband compressor Each has its own threshold control The multiband silence gate causes the gain reduction in bands 2 and 3 of the multi band compressor to move quickly to the average gain reduction occurring in those bands when the gate first turns on This prevents obvious midrange coloration un der gated conditions because bands 2 and 3 have the same gain The gate also independently freezes the gain of the two highest frequency bands forcing the gain of the highest f
32. 1 5 3 Excessive Sibilance ess 50 09 5 4 Commercials Too Loud in Sound for Picture Applications 5 4 System Will Not Pass Line Up Tones at 100 Modulation 5 4 System Will Not Pass Emergency Alert System EAS USA Standard Tones at the Legally Required Modulation Level essen nennen 5 4 System Receiving 6300 s Digital Output Will Not Lock esee 5 4 AES Channel Status Bits Will Not Set the 6300 to Stereo or Dual Mono Mode 5 5 Equipment Receiving the 6300 s AES Output Changes Operation Mode Unexpectedly 5 5 General Dissatisfaction with Subjective Sound 5 5 Security Passcode Lost When Unit is Locked Out 5 5 Connection Issues between the 6300 a PC Modem or Network 5 5 Troubleshooting 0 2 5 6 You Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection to 6 6300252 ctas tfe Au EU utr o d osi der 5 6 OS SPECIFIC TROUBLESHOOTING ADVICE
33. 1 3 3 35 vss 36 20 21 vss AUXVDD 1 32 vss AUxVDD 33 1 15 85 Auxvop S 4 6 lyss 18 26 vss 27 84 85 136 137 vss AUXVDD 202 5 vss pcivop 8 VSS PCIVDD 80 103 VSS PCIVDD 94 103 vss PCIVDD 97 vss PCIVDD 57 58 121 1 AUXVDD 5s 3 4 51 5 Auxvop 56 52 vss 55 vss 33 38 39 vss Aup 4 T lyss IAUXVDD 47 37 49 40 128 VSS VREF R33 10 0K 3 3 4 6175 176 C178 181 6183 184 1 00 1 00 1 0UF 1 00 1 00 0 1UF 33 C177 6179 6182 6180 0 1UF 0 147 0 1UF 0 01UF 4 4 4 VBAT 25V CR11 T R34 n U1F SC520 426 10 OHM 4 166 166 CORE VCC CORE C186 C185 2 O 1UF 0 01UF CORE ee 0 1UF B25 VCC GORE BBATSEN 166 CORE L CR12 m CORE GND CORE 4 2 CORE 2 CORE 54 VCC CORE CORE CORE R35 BBATSENSE VCC CORE 3 3 1 00K VCC 0 VCC lO sls VCC lO BATTERY VCC lO vcc lo VCC 0 VCC lO J12 166 0 j FROM sP 1 VCC lO DR 2 166 0 VCC lO VCC lO VCC lO 25 A25 GND ANLG ANLG 826 3 3V 3 3 43 3V U2B MT48LC16 U3B MT48LC16 UAB E28F128 28 1 28 1 v
34. 96 kHz as configured in software Passband is limited to approximately 14 7 kHz when using 32 kHz output sample rate Word Length Software selected for 24 20 18 16 or 14 bit resolution First order highpass noise shaped dither can be optionally added Dither level automatically adjusted appro priately for the word length Connector XLR type male EMI suppressed Pin 1 chassis ground pins 2 and 3 trans former balanced and floating 1100 impedance Output Level 100 peak modulation 20 0 to 0 0 dBfs software controlled Filtering RFI filtered Sync Input Configuration Can accept wordclock AES11id 750 sync selectable in software Connector Female BNC Termination Unterminated For wordclock use an external 750 terminator if the 6300 is the last item in the chain For AES11id always use 750 terminator Remote Computer Interface Configuration TCP IP protocol via direct cable connect modem or Ethernet interface Modem is not supplied Serial Port 115 kbps RS 232 port DB 9 male EMI suppressed Ethernet Port 100 Mbit sec on RJ45 female connector Remote Control GPI Interface Configuration Eight 8 inputs opto isolated and floating Voltage 6 15V AC or DC momentary or continuous 12 VDC provided to facilitate use with contact closure Connector DB 25 male EMI suppressed Control User programmable for any eight of user presets factory presets bypass test tone stereo or mono mo
35. Connectors Two XLR type male EMI suppressed Pin 1 chassis ground Pins 2 and 3 electronically balanced floating and symmetrical D A Conversion 24 bit 128x oversampled Filtering RFI filtered Digital Audio Input Configuration Stereo or Two Channel dual mono per standard 24 bit resolution software selection of stereo or dual mono Unit can detect Stereo or Two Channel status bits and switch modes appropriately No jumper selection available for 6000 Through hole pads are available on I O circuit board for user installed 6000 termination OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 3 User Bits Unit can pass AESS User Bits from its AES input to AES Output 1 Sampling Rate 32 44 1 48 88 2 or 96 kHz automatically selected Connector XLR type female EMI suppressed Pin 1 chassis ground pins 2 and 3 trans former balanced and floating 1100 impedance Input Reference Level Variable within the range of 30 dBfs to 10 dBfs J 17 Deemphasis Software selectable Filtering RFI filtered Digital Audio Outputs x2 Configuration Stereo or Two Channel per AESS standard Output configured in software as flat or pre emphasized to the chosen processing preemphasis 50 5 75ys with or without J 17 preemphasis Sample Rate Internal free running at 32 44 1 48 88 1 or 96 kHz selected in software Can also be synced to the AESS digital AES11id or Wordclock input at 32 44 1 48 88 1
36. Radio Oriented Applications From Bach to Rock 3 5 Sound for Picture Applications Controlling Dynamic 3 6 ABOUT THE 6300 s SIGNAL PROCESSING FEATURES 3 6 Signal 3 6 2 band P rist Processing d eati n a 3 9 Inputloutput Delay on etit eo ta et cere t aet 3 10 CUSTOMIZING THE 6300 S SOUND 3 10 Basie Modify aiaa e EE Dedi rea Ec i re E Ee eade 3 10 F ll Modify 3 11 Advanced Modify asinn nean aeaa aid 3 12 Gain Reduction Metering 3 12 To Create or Save a User 5 3 13 ABOUT THE PROCESSING 5 1 3 14 FACTORY PROGRAMMING PRESETS 3 16 Protection and AGC Presets iiid nr 3 17 Table 3 1 Protection and AGC 5 15 3 18 Radio Style Presets m e teat e ee rr tries 3 19 Table 3 2 Radio Style 8 5 15 3 20 Sound
37. CAPACITOR 01 0805 10 C10 C126 C127 C133 C134 C156 C158 C160 C162 C180 C185 21167 047 01 CAPACITOR 4 7pf 50V X7R 0805 C1 21170 018 01 CAPACITOR 18pf 1 50V COG 0805 C3 C4 21171 105 01 CAPACITOR 1uf X7R 0805 C14 C17 C36 C37 C38 C125 C132 C151 C153 C155 C157 C159 C161 C175 C176 C178 C181 C183 C201 NO STUFF 21322 547 01 CAPACITOR 4 7uf TANTALUM 3528 10 C12 21325 610 01 CAPACITOR 10UF 10 TANTALUM 3528 C13 C15 C16 C18 C35 C42 C44 C202 22101 001 01 DIODE 1N4148WT R CR1 CR2 CR5 22209 000 01 DIODE SHOT 1A 60V SMD CR6 CR7 CR8 CRY 24331 025 01 IC VOLTAGE REGULATOR LT1963 2 5 U14 SOT223 24331 033 01 IC VOLTAGE REGULATOR LT1963 3 3 U15 SOT223 24417 000 01 IC OCT D TYPE FLIPFLOP W U20 24541 000 01 IC SDRAM MT48LC16 TSOP54P U2 U3 24638 000 01 IC OCTAL BUS TRANS W 3 U22 24654 000 01 PWRST 8115 05 24656 475 01 IC PWRST MCP120 SOT 23 U16 24900 000 01 IC HEX INVERTER SURFACE MOUNT _ U23 U24 24965 000 01 IC 74ALVC164245DGG U7 U8 U9 24968 000 01 IC MAX208ECNG U12 PART OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL Control Board DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DATA 6 1 5 COMPONENT IDENTIFIER 24972 520 01 IC MICROPROCESSOR ELANSC520 BGA388 U1 24979 000 01 IC BAT54C 7 CR11 CR12 24983 000 01 IC 7064STC100 10 U6 250
38. If silence is detected at the analog input as well as the digital input as in the case of a studio operational fault automatic switching will not oc cur When an active signal is restored to the digital input the 6300 will automatically switch back to that input This feature is unavailable in the 6300 s audio processing mode A Navigate to SETUP gt TALLY gt SILENCE THRESHOLD and set the Silence Threshold to the level below which the 6300 will interpret the input as being silent This setting is with respect to the current analog reference level and digi tal reference level B Press NEXT as necessary to see the SILENCE DELAY control Set it to the amount of time that the input must be below the Silence Threshold before the 6300 automatically switches to the analog input C Press NEXT as necessary to see the ANALOG FALLBACK control Set it to YES if you wish the 6300 to switch automatically from the digital to analog input when silence is detected Set the control to No to defeat automatic switching 17 Program Tally Outputs Skip this step if you do not wish to use the tally outputs See step 6 on page 2 4 for wiring instructions You can program the two tally outputs to indicate a number of different opera tional and fault conditions A Navigate to SETUP gt TALLY gt TALLY OUT1 B Program tally output 1 To program a given tally output press and hold the soft button associ ated with the output you are pr
39. The 6300 can be a useful tool for mastering and production applications in the pro fessional audio industry such as preparation of equalized level controlled peak lim ited CD masters We have frequently used the 6300 in this context achieving excel lent results Because of their broadcast origins most of the 6300 s presets provide more process ing than would ordinarily be required for mastering In addition we would expect that the mastering engineer would want to tweak a preset carefully to complement the program material being mastered The 6300 provides important tools to allow a mastering engineer to fine tune the processing to complement the program mate rial e Astereo enhancer with two operating modes See page 3 31 Used subtly this can add transient punch and definition to a mix e Three bands of parametric equalization with low noise filter structures and curves modeled after classic second order analog bell shaped EQ See Equalizer Controls on page 3 26 e powerful low noise parametric bass shelving equalizer with sweepable fre quency and a choice of 6 12 or 18 dB octave slopes 3 66 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 e program adaptive high frequency enhancer This is a program adaptive 6dB octave shelving equalizer with a 4 kHz turnover frequency It constantly monitors the ratio between high frequency and broadband energy and adjusts the amount of equalization in an attempt to make this ratio constant as t
40. gt DATA 13 a SHT4 DIN DATA 14 21 DOUT1 DATA SHT5 5 666 Bi DOUTIBCLK lt 36 864MHZ 1 wc 88 Ste T Sie 20 DOUT2 DATA girs 6807 tg umbo 45 DOUT2 gt SHTS lt lt lt lt gt 1 2 24 576 gt SHTS 2 84 DOUT2 V 220HM 3 NC i 3 3 74ACT04D 1 8 NC GNDIO 33 28 NC GNDIO 26 R819 19 NC GNDINT ae 24 576MHZ_ 2 NC GNDIO HZ0805G402R 10 220HM 23 NC GNDIO 5 1 50 NC GNDIO 6 0 NC GNDINT ef s 1 8048 12 NC GNDIO i IC807D roo R810 8 NC anes cat 2 99 8 18432MHZ SHTS S EPM7064AETC100 10 3 P 1 11 za 14401040 osc 4 5 1500 cz 7 8 cs03 CMX 309FBC 27 000000M lt 2 l O DSP BOARD SAI AND CLOCK GENERATION OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 37 FROM POWER SUPPLY
41. vas H3 c302 SDATA I 25 SHT9 C301 1000 22 0 1uF 1 50 AGND DoD SHT9 5 Reiko 2 IN_FCLK FILT _21 a EN EE ow 9 RST 204 6312 1304 6 iReLK I spata 23 DIN DATA SZ 10 10 _19 DINT 49 9K 5V 750HM 1 33V 11 SHT9 V VDD IO VDD CORE R302 RERR spout 18 4 62K E300 45 m amp c309 1 E301 ILRCK OLRCK DGND DGND 3022 13 156 oscik 16 Wis 56 JZ gt sHTa gt SRCRSTN 14 spin tes 15 E316 4 TOMLIN gt AESINRMCK 2 AESINRMCK SHT5 ic 10 SMODE SMODE OUT 0 19 is CS8427 CSZ 11_ IN 1 5 our 1 1 18 V 12 IN 2 WLNGTH OUT 7 SHTS RCRSTN 13 RESET WLNGTH OUT 1 44 45 Note Jumper show as shipped IN OUT J302 HDR AD1895AYRS Nje Sirac PICSDI sHTay gt SYNCCS N R312 750HM R305 SYNC E318 49 9K INPUT L302 Guy zs 3301 FERRITE PICSCK 0 01uF 12301 2 i308 mm 1 scucciuk H lt SHT8 1 FERRITE C318 ADO CS ADi CDIN 27 5 7 4 364 795 8 3 0 01uF EMPH TXR Eo E308 314 2 sy m 4 29 E30 TV RXN us 24 1 2316 4700PF ag C312 VA 23 c315 NO STUFF 25 5 1000 22 01 PES AGND DGND 777
42. 17 126 GNDD 12 GNDD 712 4 1 GNDD 50 8 8 5 8 1 30 8 8 B 30 8 8 5 8 113073 8 5 ao gt 58556686 x 5 6 lt gt 5686686 o o o o wo wo wo 1 0 DSP BOARD DSP SPI POWER GROUND amp NC ORBAN MODEL 6300 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL 1C702 TALVX4245 33 5V 23 22 _ DSP BUSEN N 21 20 THD 19 5 18 HD 17 HD 16 HD 15 HD 14 HD HD 0 7 soo 43 3V Ut cO B e RN701 100K RESNET 5V J701 lt RESET 1 5 DSP BUSEN N ISA D7 3 4 gt lt gt ISA D4 ISA D5 lt gt ISA 03 NES ISA_D2 4 11 12 ISA_D1 gt lt gt on ISA AEN um NC SMEMWR N 18 20 3 3 SMEMRD N IOWR N 17 18 gt SHT
43. Bass Clipper Input Output Transfer Curves as Bass Clip Shape Control is Varied from 0 0 Hard to 10 0 Soft The distortion control adjustments are common to the 2 band and 5 band structures except as noted in the descriptions on the following pages Bass Clip threshold controls Orban s patented embedded bass clipper Note that The SPEECH BASS CLIP THRESHOLD control overrides the BASS CLIP THRESHOLD control when OPTIMOD PC automatically detects speech see Speech Music Detector on page 3 5 The bass clipper is embedded in the multiband crossover so that harmonics created by clipping are rolled off by part of the crossover filters The threshold of this clipper is ordinarily set between 4dB below the threshold of the look ahead limiter depending on the setting of the LEss MORE control in the parent preset upon which you are basing your Advanced Control adjustments This provides headroom for contributions from the other four bands so that bass transients don t smash against OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 39 the look ahead limiter causing audible intermodulation distortion between the bass and higher frequency program material Some 6300 users feel that the bass clipper unnecessarily reduces bass punch at its factory settings To accommodate these users the threshold of the bass clipper is user adjustable The range with reference to the look ahead limiter threshold is 10 to 10dB and OFF As you raise the threshold
44. Because of improvements in the 6300 s sig nal processing by comparison to the 6200 these controls are not extremely danger ous although you can still get into trouble if you try hard enough Most people will never have any reason to go beyond Full Modify Note Full Modify does not provide LESS MORE control Furthermore once you have edited a preset s dynamics parameters in Full Modify LEss MoRE control is no longer available in Basic Modify and will be grayed out if you access its screen As noted above we recommend using the Basic Modify LEss MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possi 3 12 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 ble to your desired sound before you make further modifications at the Full Modify level Advanced Modify If you want to create a signature sound for your broadcast that is far out of the or dinary if your taste differs from the people who programmed the LEss MORE tables or if you are using the 6300 in mastering or production applications you will find Advanced Modify useful Advanced Modify is available to you from the 6300 PC Re mote software only not from the 6300 s front panel At this level you can custom ize or modify any subjective setup control setting to create a sound exactly to your taste You can then save the settings in a User Preset and recall it whenever you wish This sort of customization is usually unnecessary and inappropriate for sound for picture but can be very useful for radio
45. CAS n CAS n MD12 B20 K25 RAMRAS N 18 18 MD12 SRASA RAS n RAS n MD11 A18 RASA 125 RAMCS N 19 19 MD11 550 5 5 MD10 817 MD9 16 MD10 MD9 815 SDQM2 MD7 MD7 500141 MD6 813 MD6 SDQMO MD5 12 MD4 pii 5 MD4 SRASB MD3 A10 MD3 SCASB MD2 BI SCASB MD2 SWEB MDT AB B7 MDO 5651 25 SCS2 MECC6 Y26 E MECCS D25 SEES DRAMCLK 433V MECC4 c26 MECCS cikMEMOUT B19 CLKMEMOUT on MECC3 25 4 1 10 MECC2 W26 R6 2 9 026 2 3 8 MECCO cos 22 OHM 4 7 CLKMEMIN 44 CLKMEMIN RNET4 7K d 01 SHT2 E28F128 eet A24 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 25 415 14 1 T A12 11 A10 L5 C10 1000PF 1000 ohm 0 01UF AT 4LLLEPLL A6 R32 AS R31 10 3 3V Ask C12 A3 4708 U1E SC520 A2 xi Al VCC 080 4 1 66 056 4 Es VDD L AF24 e 2 GND our 3 6 tS SG 636PCE 33MC2 AC26 33MXTAL2 54 OEN 55 2820 33MXTAL1 gt 800708 logge B U13 DS32KHZS S 22 CE1 N R37 4 23 14 vBAT 3zkuz 1 8Ie CL0C 4549 sokxrA 2 46 2 10 0K SHT2 5 RP N 2 ne 100PF D 15 AF26 3 oKXTAL1 3 12 3 12 N C A 5 NC 6 9 NC NC MEMORY AND CLOCK GENERATION MD31 MD30 MD29 MD28
46. MD27 MD26 MD25 MD24 MD23 MD22 MD21 MD20 MD19 MD18 MD17 MD16 SDQM3 ORBAN MODEL 6300 gt SHT2 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL U10A DP83816AVNG AD31 AD30 AD29 AD28 AD27 AD26 AD25 AD24 AD23 AD22 AD21 AD20 AD19 CBE3N CBE2N CBE1N CBEON RSTN DEVSELN STOPN IRDYN TRDYN FRAMEN PERRN SERRN PAR REQN GNTN INTAN IDSEL 3VAUX PWRGOOD PMEN CLKRUNN PCICLK COL MA16 CRS RXCLK RXDV MA11 RXER MA10 RXD3 MA9 RXD2 MA8 RXD1 MA7 RXDO MA6 TXCLK MD7 MD6 MDS MD4 EEDO MD2 3 3 RN4 1 10 2 9 3 8 4 7 5 6 PCI AD 0 31 RNET4 7K icd SC520 A2 PCI AD31 PCI AD31 66 R3 AEA AT PCI_AD30 PCLAD30 67 REQS PCI AD29 29 68 02 PCI 4028 PCLAD28 70 PCI_AD27 PCLAD27 71 Di PCI AD26 PCLAD26 72 lang PCI AD25 43 3V PCLAD25 73 1383 PCI_AD24 PCLAD24 74 P3 9 3 PCI_AD23 PCLAD23 78 2 A23 PCI_AD22 PCLAD22 79 ae G2 PCI AD21 7 1 PCLAD21 81 E H4 PCI AD
47. Once the New Connection Wizard has opened Click Next C Create a New Windows 2000 Direct Connection File Edit View Tools Connect Help a Launch 6300 PC Remote pj E 0 kd T Connection List b Choose Connect New 6300 z Disconnect All Connections 8300 Give your 6300 a name e g KABC by entering this name in the 6300 Alias field 8300Alias 8300 If you wish to have 6300 PC Password Leave password blank to be prompted upon conne Remote remem be r the Local Folder C Program Files Orban Optimod 83008300 1 password for this Optimod Comment enter the password in the Password field r C Ethemet Connection Serial Connection IPAddress 127 0 0 1 Connection to 8300 e Select Serial Connection PotNumber f Click the Add button OK Cancel OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 59 9 Select Dial up to private network Network Connection Wizard X Type of Connection i h ick Next Select the type of the connection Gi Connect using C Connect to a private network through the Internet Create a Virtual Private Network VPN connection or tunnel through the internet C Connect directly to another computer Connect using my serial parallel or infrared port lt Back Cancel i Enter the phone
48. R260 NO STUFF 100 1 0805 R261 R262 R263 R264 NO STUFF 475 1 0805 C236 C237 C238 C239 NO STUFF 1000pF 1 50V 0805 AGND4 AGND3 AGND2 AGND1 AGND C240 C241 C242 C243 NO STUFF 1500pF 196 50V 0805 1 0 DSP BOARD ANALOG OUTPUTS OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL E313 8650 ESIEBU gt AESINCS N INPUT 3800 V 1996 AESINLRCK gt sir FEMALE AESINSCLK C300 _PICSCK AESINSCLK simo 1 2 foe mo MN 00 Piceno 12302 FERRITE 50937 02 1 SDA CDOUT SCLICCLK 28 SHT8 2n n ZH 1100HM AE 27 MMODE 2 FH d 3 ADO CS AD1 CDIN EM 8151104 EMPH 26 E303 2 uot MMODE 1 27 RXP 25 E35 4 TNR 5 XN NEP 3 OUT MMODE 0 HS 7 C305
49. SST OIK n 2 DACK1 N SHT7 581 0 28 2 gt 25 26 9 27 28 SSLIDO gt SHT7 Nc A8 29 30 NC SA A4 6 ISA A5 NC NC At 33 34 NC NC ISA A1 35 36 71 isA 42 eM 37 38 gt lt 24 576MHZB 39 40 771 pio25 GPIOCS16 N SHT9 gt 5 626 16 41 42 PIO27IGPCSO N Ne icine ae DSPENON de uc DSPENTN gt om 7 SHT6 7 lt 2 47 48 DSPENG N gt SHT6 7 7 lt PIO28ICTSZN RTS2 N lt 50072 e B SIN2 gt Nc S PIOZ GPRDY PITGATEZIGPCSEN lt NO ROMCST N GPCST N CAE ROMCSZ N GPCSZN START SHT9 lt 57 58 4 lt 59 60 5 725 IDC HEADER 30X2 4 99K 1 Ww FROM CONTROL COMBO gt SHT6 Note from CONTROL COMBO PCA via J701 3 3V come Z 2 pi 5 02 a2 03 AE ds 15 ADRSTN De 16 DARSTN gt 16 DARSUN gt By Q6 19 SRCRSTN a x 74HCT374PW MISCCS N TECHNICAL DATA 6 35 5V IC703 PIC16C67 20L E712 E713 E714 gt gt SHT4 RDO PSPO RCO TiOSorTicKi 16 ay E715 18 Bure RD1 PSP1 RCI TIOSUCCP2 S E705 RD2 PSP2 RC2 CCP1 9 GHI S RD3PSP3 RCS SCK SCL 20 gt sHT4 5 RDA PSP4 RCA SDI SDA SHT4 5 26 P
50. To produce look ahead limiter gain reduction turn up the LESS MoRE control Each step of the LEss MORE control increases the drive level to the look ahead limiter by 1 dB and increases the input output gain by 1 dB for signals below the limiter threshold At LEss MORE 10 the processor s gain below threshold has increased to 9 dB 3 18 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Instead of adjusting LEss MORE you can adjust the FINAL LiMIT DRIVE control which what LEss MoRnE actually does Do not set the FINAL DRIVE control below 0 with this preset doing so will compromise system headroom Adjusting the LEss MORE or FINAL Limit DRIVE controls is equivalent to si multaneously decreasing the threshold and increasing the make up gain in a protection limiter having threshold and output make up gain con trols AGC FLAT 50 us 75 us LIMITER These presets allow the 6300 to serve as a stu dio AGC substituting for the AGC in an Optimod at a radio or television transmitter and providing protection limiting for the STL that links the output of the 6300 to the input of the Optimod at the transmitter Choose the preset that matches the 6300 s preemphasis setting see step 8 on page 2 23 This step explains how to choose the 6300 s preemphasis setting to match your STL The 50 us and 75 us presets have been tuned so that the 5 band compressor serves only as a subtle high frequency limiter that uses bands 4 and 5 to perform a few dB of fast
51. While almost any balanced shielded cable will work for relatively short runs 5 meters or less longer runs require used of 1100 balanced cable like Belden 1800B 1801B plenum rated multi pair 180xF 185xF or 78xxA Single pair category 5 5e and 6 Ethernet cable will also work well if you do not require shielding In most cases the tight balance of Category 5 5e 6 cable makes shielding unnecessary The AES3id standard is best for very long cable runs up to 1000 meters This specifies 750 unbalanced coaxial cable terminated in male BNC connectors 1100 750 balun transformer is required to interface AES3id connection to your Optimod s digital program input or output Conversely the wordclock AES11id sync input is designed for 750 op eration The digital input clip level is fixed at 0 dB relative to the maximum digital word The maximum digital input will make the 6300 input meters dis play OdB The reference level is adjustable using the DI REF control The 6300 s internal sample rate is 48 kHz Because of asynchronous re sampling any output sample rate other than 48 kHz internal sync can introduce overshoots If you need to use an STL with 32 kHz sample rate because that is all that is available you will achieve lowest overshoot by setting the 6300 s in ternal bandwidth to 15 kHz That way the 6300 s peak limiter operates 2 8 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 on a signal with 15 kHz bandwidth and subsequ
52. Za 4210 920 uh m ur T NE E 058 298 658 goa 024 828 588 nim gio zn 0142 55 Hm mmm 982 v an zin m 842 CUN Ted s Inzi i He 790 e zm mi m m mm m m e zo WINE gm m m m m m NUN UU W 890 998 G9 094 690 298 199 898 90 9 8 552 084960 652 950 WE 95 1 492 692 870 970 070 162 080 422 L 250 158 192 SSUES 290 98 990 698 0 0 228 499 288 T e e Ux 5 e e e Sr CONTROL BOARD PARTS LOCATOR OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 23 5V C44 10UF 33V R1 10 0K SYSTEM RESET N SHT 5
53. and well balanced sound quality The 6300 can generate test tones itself The 6300 can also be put into Bypass mode locally or by remote control to enable it to pass externally generated tones at any desired level See Test Modes on page 3 56 System Will Not Pass Emergency Alert System EAS USA Standard Tones at the Legally Required Modulation Level See System Will Not Pass Line Up Tones at 10096 Modulation directly above for an explanation These tones should be injected into the transmitter after the 6300 or the 6300 should be temporarily switched to BYPASS to pass the tones System Receiving 6300 s Digital Output Will Not Lock Be sure that the sample rate at the 6300 s output is set to match the sample rate that the driven system expects Use the DO1 RATE or DO2 RATE control as appropri ate Be sure that the 6300 s output mode AES3 or SPDIF is set to match the stan dard expected by the driven system OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5 5 AES Channel Status Bits Will Not Set the 6300 to Stereo or Dual Mono Mode Be sure that the equipment driving the 6300 is set in AES3 or AES EBU mode SPDIF will not work Similarly you must set the 6300 s digital output mode via the DO1 FORMAT or DO2 FORMAT control to AES in order to send AES channel status bits to downstream equipment Equipment Receiving the 6300 s AES Output Changes Operation Mode Unexpectedly Some equipment will respond incorrectly to AES Channel Status a
54. applies noise shaping and emits a bitstream at 48 kHz sample rate 3 Digital Input Receiver and Sample Rate Converter SRC Located on input output DSP board The receiver IC300 accepts digital audio signals using the AES3 interface format AES3 1992 It applies its output to sample rate converter IC302 This accepts and sample rate converts any of the standard 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz and 96 kHz rates in addition to any digital audio sample rate within the range of 32 kHz and 96 kHz The SRC converts the input sample rate to 48 kHz for process ing by the DSP Receiver 01 accepts sync signals in either AES11 or wordclock formats and generate a reference sample rate for the 6300 s output sample rate converters Relay 04 determines if the 6300 s sync input will accept AES11 or wordclock These chips are surface mounted and not field replaceable OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 9 Output Circuits This circuitry interfaces the DSP to the analog and digital audio outputs The digital audio from the DSP is transmitted to the digital to analog converter D A and out put sample rate converter SRC The digital to analog D A converter converts the digital audio words generated by the DSP to analog audio The analog output stages scale and buffer the D A output signal to drive the analog output XLR con nectors with a low impedance balanced output The digital output transmitter ac cepts the digital audi
55. den sity and audible distortion for a given amount of processing We believe that most 6300 users will never need to go beyond the 55 level of control because the combinations of subjective setup control settings produced by this control have been OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 1 1 optimized by Orban s audio processing experts on the basis of years of experience designing audio processing and upon hundred of hours of listening tests The LEss MORE control has a different effect in the radio presets than it does in the sound for picture presets In the radio presets the air sound will become louder as you go from less to more but as with any processor processing artifacts will increase In the sound for picture presets except for those few based on ra dio presets the LESS MORE control sets the average amount of dynamic range control provided by the processing As you go from less to more the loudness of loud sounds will stay about the same but the loudness of quieter sounds will in crease Because of the 6300 s sophisticated gating circuits very quiet material like background sounds quiet underscoring hiss and hum will not be pumped up Please note that in the radio presets the highest LESS MORE setting is purposely designed to cause unpleasant distortion and processing artifacts This helps assure you that you have chosen the optimum setting of the LEss MORE control because turning the control up
56. distortion in the look ahead limiter caused by heavy bass transients you can reduce this effect by setting the Bass CLIP to a lower level The Bass CLIP control is cali brated in dB below the look ahead limiter threshold It is most effec tive when the B1 B2 CROSSOVER control is set to 100 Hz as this setting prevents intermodulation between vocals and instrumental bass in the clipper P If you wish to compare your processed sound to the unprocessed original re call the LOOK AHEAD LIMITER preset and toggle between it and your processing preset If there is a gross loudness disparity you may wish to edit the gain within the LOOK AHEAD LIMITER preset and save this as a user preset However be careful not to clip the output if you set the bypass for gain You can determine whether you are clipping by observing the level me ter in the OUTPUT page of the mixer Q Save your preset using File Save Preset Once you have created one mastering preset you can edit it to create others and save them under different names R For a 44 1 or 88 2 kHz output sample rate set the digital output level step 10 page 2 25 to approximately 0 5dBfs this will prevent overshoots caused by sample rate conversion For a 48 or 96 kHz output sample rate set the digi tal output level to 0 1dBfs 3 70 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 At 44 1 kHz the output samples are not exactly the same ones that the look ahead limiter controlled at th
57. gating level equalization noise reduction etc The dynamic range of the A D Converter which has a specified overload to noise ratio of 110 dB primarily governs it The dynamic range of the digital signal processing is 144 dB Total System L R Channel Separation gt 70 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz 90 dB typical analog I O Digital separation is essentially infinite Polarity Bypass Mode Operate Mode when processing chain is configured for linear phase Absolute polarity maintained Positive going signal on input will result in positive going signal on output Internal Processing Sample Rate 48 kHz We believe this provides maximum audible transparency by minimizing numerical noise in the equalizers and filters while still pre serving a pure transparent sound The double precision equalizers and crossover filters used throughout the 6300 produce at least 6 dB lower noise and nonlinear distortion than they would at 96 kHz Processing Resolution Internal processing has 24 bit fixed point or higher resolution uses Freescale formerly Motorola DSP56367 DSP chips 6 2 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 Delay The minimum available input output delay is approximately 20 ms with look ahead limiting active and 6 ms with look ahead limiting bypassed This can be padded to ex actly one frame of 24 25 29 97 or 30 frames second video up to a maximum delay of 50 ms Operating mode Stereo or dual mono In dual mono mode both
58. particularly where soft knee compression is desired These presets are not designed to be used without being manually tweaked to comple ment the program material being processed See Using the 6300 for Production and Mastering starting on page 3 65 We strongly recommend using 6300 PC Remote to adjust these presets Many of the important controls like the KNEE and Ratio controls are accessible only from PC Remote and not from the 6300 s front panel These presets are phase linear They set all equalization flat and turn off the AGC The multiband compressor 2 band or 5 band is set to supply a very soft knee com pression characteristic with approximately 5 10 dB of gain reduction The ratio for a given compressor starts out at 1 1 and ends up at infinity 1 when the input level is 20 dB above threshold Mastering engineers will certainly want to adjust the compression thresholds and band coupling to complement the program material The ratio and knee controls are separately adjustable for each band s compressor For example one might want to use a low ratio and soft knee in bands 1 4 while using a higher ratio and or harder knee in band 5 for de essing The 6300 s powerful equalization section is of course also available Additionally these presets set the look ahead limiter drive control conservatively which ensures highest quality However the 6300 s look ahead limiter can be driven quite hard without objectionable side effects s
59. please do not jump to the conclusion that the 6300 is at fault The troubleshooting information in Section 5 will help you determine if the problem is with OPTIMOD 6300 or is somewhere else in the station s equip ment 3 Periodically check for corrosion Particularly in humid or salt spray environments check for corrosion at the input and output connectors and at those places where the 6300 chassis contacts the rack 4 Periodically check for loss of grounding Check for loss of grounding due to corrosion or loosening of rack mounting screws 5 Clean the front panel when it is soiled Wash the front panel with a mild household detergent and a damp cloth Do not use stronger solvents they may damage plastic parts paint or the silk screened lettering Do not use paper based cleaning towels or use cleaning agents con taining ammonia or alcohol An acceptable cleaning product is Glass Plus For best results when cleaning the lens use a clean lint free cloth 4 2 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 6300 Subassembly Removal and Replacement See page 6 21 for the Circuit Board Locator and Basic Interconnections diagram 1 Removing the Top Cover To access any internal board including the display assembly you must remove the top cover A Disconnect the 6300 and remove it from the rack Be sure power is disconnected before removing the cover Warning Hazardous voltage is exposed with the unit open and the power ON Par
60. these are defined by software and will automatically be correct if the DSP is otherwise operating normally It is often more convenient to make measurements on the bench away from high RF fields which could affect results For example in a high RF field it is very difficult to accurately measure the very low THD produced by a properly operating 6300 at most frequencies However in an emergency it is usually possible to detect many of the more severe faults that could develop in the 6300 circuitry even in high RF envi ronments See the assembly drawings in Section 6 for component locations Be sure to turn the power off before removing or installing circuit boards Follow these instructions in order without skipping steps Note To obtain an unbalanced output connect pin 1 ground to pin 3 and meas ure between pin 1 ground and pin 2 hot OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4 7 Note All analog output measurements are taken with a 6200 5 resistor tied be tween pin 2 and 3 of the XLR connector 1 Prepare the unit A Use the front panel controls to set the 6300 s software controls to their de fault settings as follows Be sure to write down the old settings so you can re store them later a Navigate to SETUP lO CALIB ANALOG CALIB Set controls as follows AE eric chy vac sees oes sa Ese ANALOG AI REE VU insect ve tea latins ro rete a 14 0 DBU BAL t
61. 01 1 R0805 4750 196 1 8W R261 R262 R263 R264 20129 604 01 1 R0805 6040 196 1 8W R306 20130 100 01 1 RO805 1K 1 R702 21170 282 01 CCC 0805 0082U 50 5 COG C132 C133 C134 C135 21170 310 01 CCC 0805 01U 50 5 COG C100 C102 C104 C106 24676 000 01 IC TRANS CS8427 28 PIN 6300 24760 000 01 1 IC QUAD CMOS SPST SWITCH 1C101 IC103 24762 000 01 1 IC QUAD BUFFER 3 STATE OUTP 401 24763 000 01 1 EPM7064AETC100 10 800 24766 000 01 1 IC PLL1707DBQ 801 27479 002 01 1 CONNECTOR HEADER 156 2 PIN J901 27479 004 01 1 CONNECTOR HEADER 156CTR 4 PIN J902 27479 006 01 1 CONNECTOR HEADER 156CTR 6 PIN J900 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 29537 102 01 INDUCTOR 0805 FERRITE 1000 L800 L801 L802 32296 000 03 1 PCB I O DSP BOARD Display Board Front DISPLAY BOARD FRONT PART DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER 15057 010 01 SPACER 100 HIGH CR1 CR2 CR5 CR6 CR7 CR8 CR9 CR16 15061 005 01 LED MNT 1 POS N 240 HIGH MNTCR10 25106 001 01 LED YELLOW T 1 HIGH EFFICIENCY LMP CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 25106 003 01 LED RED T 1 HIGH EFFICIENCY LMP CR10 25167 000 01 LED ARRAY 1 RED 1 YEL 8 GRN CR7 CR16 25168 000 01 LED ARRAY 9 YELLOW 1 RED CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5 CR6 27368 000 01 CONNECTOR 100 SC
62. 1 8W 196 3 48K 0805 R204 R210 R217 R220 R245 R246 20130 499 01 RESISTOR 4 99K 1 0805 R103 R105 R118 R124 R725 R800 R903 20130 562 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 196 5 62K 0805 R113 R128 20130 845 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 196 8 45K 0805 R201 R202 R205 R207 R208 R211 R212 R214 R215 R218 20131 100 01 RESISTOR 10K 0805 R237 R251 R252 R406 R407 R703 20131 113 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 1 11 3K 0805 R206 R219 R233 R234 20131 147 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 1 14 7K 0805 R114 R129 20131 499 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 1 49 9K 0805 R301 R304 R310 R311 R317 R318 R401 R402 R700 R706 R707 R900 R901 R904 20131 825 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 1 82 5K 0805 R104 R123 R203 R209 R213 R216 20132 100 01 RESISTOR 100K 0805 R704 R705 R816 R817 R818 20135 100 01 RESISTOR MF 1 8W 1 1 00M SMT R142 R152 R247 R248 20151 365 01 RESISTOR 0 1 3 65K 0805 R101 R108 R116 R121 R130 R133 R135 R136 R143 R145 R147 R148 20151 536 01 RESISTOR 0 1 5 36K 0805 R102 R109 R117 R122 20221 101 01 RESISTOR NET SIP 2 100K 10PIN RN701 20511 310 01 TRMPTS 10K 20 TOP ADJ VR200 VR201 21137 447 01 CAPACITOR 0 47UF 25V 10 1206 C113 C117 C234 C235 C502 C504 C506 C508 21138 247 01 CAPACITOR SMD1206 4700PF 50V 5 C109 C110 C115 C116 C306 21139 000 0
63. 2 40K 5 03 1 R119 7 11 2 IC106A _ NO STUFF t 04 53 R128 IC105B P R149 196 R124 5 6 5 3 T gt lt 7 4 GND 54 5 62 4 4 2490HM 4 99K gib 196 4 7 21340 1 AGND 1 _ 6 lt 15 IC102B OPA2134UA L106 6 R121 i ud R152 Dn 4 ee OPA2134PA 0 47 UF tae AGND 1000PF C106 R122 25V 5 36 ATPF CR105 uc 0 196 5 100V TRANSZORB C135 77 58162 H3 AGND2 04 77 AGND2 5V 2 8 COMPONENT REF DESIGNA TOR 6300 VALUE 9300 VALUE AGNDA AGND AGND GNDI AGND R100 R107 R115 R120 1 00K 1 0805 3010 1 0805 R101 R108 R116 R121 4 99K 1 0805 3 65K 0 1 0805 R159 R160 R161 R162 NO STUFF 1 50K 1 0805 SHT8 6100 C102 C104 C106 1000pF 1 50V 0805 0 01 5 50V 0805 74HCT374PW 1 0 DSP BOARD LEFT AND RIGHT ANALOG INPUTS C132 C133 C134 C135 NO STUFF 8200pF 596 50V 0805 NGANGEN LAATS SHT8 6 30 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 LEFT ANALOG UTPUT 6300 NALOG UTPUT 1 9300
64. 3 37 for more detail about these modes The 5 band Structure The 5 band structure consists of a stereo enhancer a slow gain riding 2 band AGC an equalization section a 5 band compressor a dynamic single ended noise reduc tion system an output mixer for the five bands and a low IM look ahead limiter Unlike the 2 band structure whose 2 band compressor has a continuously variable release time the release time of the 5 band compressor is switchable to seven in crements between slow and fast Each setting makes a significant difference in the overall flavor and quality of the sound When the input is noisy you can sometimes reduce the noise by activating the sin gle ended noise reduction system Functionally the single ended noise reduction system combines a broadband downward expander with a program dependent low pass filter This noise reduction can be valuable in reducing audible hiss rumble or ambient studio noise We use it for the news and sports factory presets 3 48 OPERATION The 5 band structure does not have a separate Loudness Controller because its 5 band compressor automatically re equalizes the spectral balance of various pieces of program material in a way that tends to make their loudness more consistent Putting the 5 band Structure on the Air The 5 band structure is very flexible enabling you to fine tune your sound for your target audience and desired market position There are several basic Factory
65. 41 breakpoint 3 46 Brilliance control 3 30 buttons escape 3 2 circuit description 6 7 modify 3 1 ref level I O setup 2 21 NEXT 3 1 analog input 2 6 PREVIOUS 3 1 analog landline 1 15 RECALL 3 1 analog output setup 3 1 circuit description 6 9 buzz 5 1 analog output 2 6 bypass archiving presets 3 60 local 1 22 artifacts PC remote 1 23 minimizing codec 3 4 remote interface 1 23 Attack test mode 1 20 Multiband 3 55 attack 3 37 audio C bandwidth 1 16 connections 2 5 cable input connecting 2 6 shielding 2 8 output 2 7 type recommended for analog 2 5 output connecting 2 6 chassis Audio Precision 4 6 getting inside 4 2 auditing performance 4 6 ground automation circuit board locator drawing 6 21 circuit description control 6 5 LCD display 6 6 user control interface 6 6 circuit description 6 4 add event 2 30 delete event 2 31 edit event 2 31 automation 2 29 automation 3 62 Classical music 3 21 cleaning front panel 4 1 clipper control list 3 38 clipper bass 3 8 dipping 3 3 clock battery 6 6 setting 2 29 codec overshoots in 3 70 processing for low bit rate 3 4 commercial loudness 5 4 common mode rejection 2 8 components obtaining 6 13 compression 3 3 compression ratio 3 45 compressor gate 3 34 computer connecting to 2 4 interf
66. 7x 100pF AF16 4515 DTRZ AE23 DTR2 N RESERVED 13 777 AE15 52 1022 RTS2 N 5 2 2 14 4515 V24 2 2 3 2 15 ADi4 NC SIN2 023 SOUTZ Cre AEN NC 80072 WS DTRIN gt SHT2 5V AF NC DTR W4 RTSIN HDR 8X2 Wa 1 RIS MAEZ SINT U24E digi NC 2 50071 d TV26 JPV1 a 10 TV28 TV29 JPV2 a4 AD13 Nc p JOD 3 AE19 SSI DI I Ti 1 018 Nc ssi SSFDO 5 3 AETB L 5 5 24 DATASTRBICFG1 DATASTRBICFG1 24 5 oray TV32 7 ACT uc GPCS cFGo 4020 ROM GPCSNICFGU 1 24 124 NC R30 4 75 9 AF20 NC ROMRD 23 ROMRD N VY SYSTEM RESET N 10 NC ROMRD 4823 ROMRDN gt SHTA 4 11 AE20 Inc FLASHWR 4824 FLASHWRN 5 SHT3 KEY 12 U23E ADIZ LASHWR AB25 BOOTCS N hdr 2mm 2x6 TV35 U28F 55800108 25 2 SETS 11 10 TV38 JPV4 13 12 TV40 ROMBUFOE lt J14 xm E KEY 6 TO FRONT PANEL 14 L KT 74HC14A 5 DISPLAY 3 314 REVISIONS 01 02 03 key 2 3 5V A KEY 2 15 R47 301 OHM vad o i TRIMMED FOR KEY HDR 2x2 5 QU 60 6 2 6 c31 0000000000 5V 01 FRONT PANEL 24 1 5 CONNECTIONS R48 U17A U23A 1 16 gat AN 2 604 OHM 3 Roy M k pag AHCIMA 45
67. 90 FP ROW 52 Fp ROW C N gt SHT 5 ISA A3 35 GPD6 55 Ee Pb 4 15 1B5 082 22 SHT 5 ISA A5 GPD5 cg GPD4 GPDi 38 146 186 ISA 40 16 FP ROW D NI 75 Fp BUSEN N gt SHT 5 BAM 33 GPD4 Cg GPDO 37 1 7 ISAAT 54 SAAD FP_BUSEN N 76 SMEMWR N gt SHT 5 ISA AT 32 GPD3 188 ISA A1 SMEMWR N 26 MEME gt C7 GPDZ GPD15 36 13 96 SA 80 DSP BUSEN N 131 GPD2 281 1 TVA ISA A2 DSP gt ISA AG 8202 BS GPDi GPDi4 35 241 2511 D14 Tu ISA 32 eis DSPENDN 65 DSPENO N 30 ppp C4 GPDO GPDi3 33 222 288 16 D13 Vis A4 1 DSPENTN 7 DSPENT N 29 GPDI2 32 243 283 17 D2 Mon ISA A5 9 DSPENZN 64 DSPENZ N SHT 5 51 90 28 NO STUFF GPD11 30 289 19 Di Dons ISA A6 DSPENSN 42 DSPENS N 27 rae 4 T5 33V GPD10 29 245 285 20 DIO ISA AT 41 SELI ea 26 C3 25 Xi RN 6509 27 22 ISA_D9 AB 18 40 SELO T l 25 GPA25 DEBUG_ENTER 2A7 2B7 1147 ISA AB SELO R39 10 0K DACKI N 24 GPA24 GPD8 26 23 ISA_D8 ISA A8 14 44 REMOTE IN N 24 GPAZA INST TRACE 2A8 288 ISA A9 IN N 44 REMOTE sts SS CLK GPA23 AMDEBUG DIS 23 2 R4 4 75 ISA A10 17 A10 SHT 5 es Gonos F3 GPA22 GPA24 844 BUEFRD N1 ipis 1 48 ISA A1 18
68. AGC Controls The AGC is common to the 2 band and 5 band structures Five of the AGC controls are common to the Full Modify and Advanced Modify screens with additional AGC controls available in the Advance Modify screen as OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL noted in the following table Note that advanced controls are accessible only from 6300 PC Remote software These controls are explained in detail below Each Factory Preset has a LESS MoRE control that adjusts loudness by altering the amount of dynamics processing LESS MORE simultaneously adjusts several of the dynamics processing controls to optimize the trade offs between unwanted side ef fects If you wish you may adjust the Advanced Modify parameters to your own taste Al ways start with LESS MORE to get as close to your desired sound as possible Then edit the Advanced Modify parameters using the Advanced Modify screen and save those edits to a User Preset AGC Off On control activates or defeats the It is usually used to defeat the AGC when you want to create a preset with minimal processing such as a CLASSICAL preset The AGC is also ordinarily defeated if you are using a studio level controller like Orban s 8200ST However in this case it is better to defeat the AGC globally in System Setup AGC DRIVE control adjusts signal level going into the slow dual band AGC there fore determining the amount of gain reduction in the AGC This control also
69. AGND3 2 2 216 SHT9 DEM1 26 R211 R212 R213 AGNDS 55 5 AOUTR Sanat z NALOG 112 piro 8 45 1 845 1 825 1 02028 UTPUT 2 9300 13 piF1 21 15V 5 S OPAZT94UA Ed L206 t 19 1500PF 7 AGND3 P E200 R250 gt _ 01 1C202A 50 6 3908 CKSO 46 2 _ 21340 1 R220 m 1100HM L202 MALE CKS1 0 1 RE ROSA R248 1 FILTER C202 2 2 1 3 49 1 845 R219 3 48K lt 100 VR201 IO 1 3 2 1 2 50V 196 1 5 1 1 1 GET C200 R246 1 11 3K 0 47 25V L210 T g L4 15 1 um 1 0 50V 25 3 48K 10220 1 15V 00 Eum R214 R215 R216 1 11 3K gt lt 5 2 77 1 50V 15V 5 2 1 1 1 212 24 2 T l 845 1 845 1 825 19 2 S o s i AGND4 AGNDA 1 4 4 AGND AGND4 3 Men 1 214 2 d 4 DRV134PA H3 AGND4 R264 L203 15 AGND4 3 E 720239 FILTER 9 a 2 CS R256 R260 4 4 WYN 1 4 4 1211 1000PF 1207 AGND4 COMPONENT REF DESIGNA TOR 6300 VALUE 9300 VALUE L204 L205 L206 L207 3 9uH 1008 NO STUFF L208 L209 L210 L211 NO STUFF 1200uH 5 R253 R254 R255 R256 NO STUFF 49 9ohm 1 0805 R257 R258 R259
70. AH LL ROT SLAY Z lt SL AH 6L Sa 5 xz 4 gt 6 VP PLAN 1 7 EL Pn VE 1 PLAN Zl ns B b E amp B gu gu su pes ue 3 iy 5 2 amp 4 LAU 6L LAN LL LAY SL E y y o 3 SE Sg SE gt gt 1 gt g lt LAY S 9 LAY ZL LAY 6 LAY LAY L 5 o E E E 58 22 S f mA mat SL 4 PLAY 6L PLAY LL LAY 1 Bu Ba t gt 9 OLA ZL gt Swe eS lt eR Eg Eg Eg 5 r are saa Oh 6AU 6L Aw 6AU LL 6AU Ar SL 6AU Z 6AU 6L Aw 67 6 lt Qo Eg Bg 8 Eg 5 gt NS 4 gt xz b xz AU L el 6 1 At BAU EL S AU L NN X ri Eg 58 5 gt A iS LAU SL Z ZAY 61 52 LAU LL ZAY SL Iv gt 19 z 9 58 Sg 55 55 5 gt gt ish eh EL SAU S YAY ZL 9AH 6 AD 9AH OAU EL z a 5 Eg 5 lt b p gt LL Aa GAY Z NON S AH 6L SAU LL NT TAL 58 g 85 85 5 6 6 YAY YAY EL 5 lt A YAY
71. Aspecial 2 band preset creates a no compromise Protect function that is func tionally similar to the Protect structures in earlier Orban digital processors The 5 band and the 2 band structures can be switched via a mute free crossfade e OPTIMOD 6300 s 2 band structure includes a CBS Loudness Controller for DTV applications This system measures subjective loudness as perceived by an average listener and then closes a feedback loop to limit loudness to a preset level It effectively controls loud commercials which are the primary irritant in sound for picture applications The CBS Loudness Controller is not needed with the 5 band processing because the 5 band processing s spectral consistency creates consistent loudness as a desirable byproduct e The 6300 s AGC rides gain over an adjustable range of up to 25dB compressing dynamic range and compensating for both operator gain riding errors and gain inconsistencies in automated systems The AGC output is available to drive STLs so the 6300 can be used as a studio AGC e The 6300 s processing structures are all phase linear to maximize audible trans parency e The 6300 s equalizers and crossovers use 48 bit arithmetic to ensure mastering quality noise and distortion performance Controllable e The 6300 can be remote controlled by 5 12V pulses applied to eight pro grammable optically isolated general purpose interface GPI ports e 6300 PC Remote software is a graphical
72. Controller on except for preset 2B GEN PUR NO LC The easiest way to turn the Loudness Controller off is to recall this preset You may also create a User Preset with the Loudness Controller turned off Radio oriented 2 band presets all have the Loudness Controlled turned off The 5 band structure does not have extra loudness control because its multiband processing tends to automatically re equalize and condition program material to control loudness variations This is true in both sound for picture and radio oriented applications Factory Programming Presets Factory Programming Presets are our factory recommended settings for various program formats or types The Factory Programming Presets are starting points to help you get on the air quickly without having to understand anything about ad justing the 6300 s sound You can easily edit any of these presets with the LEss MORE control to optimize the trade off between loudness and distortion according to the needs of your format although this is often unnecessary It is OK to use unmodified factory presets on the air These represent the best efforts of some very experienced transmission process ing sound designers We are sometimes asked about unpublished programming se crets for Optimods In fact there are no secrets that we withhold from users This manual reveals our secrets and the presets embody all of our craft as processing experts The presets are editable because other
73. H veco Mosi veep 7 11 veco Mosi 86 VCCD ss 2 86 ss 2 1708 55 2 1 03 vCCD ss 2 8 HREQ 8 VCCA HREQ 8 VCCA HREQ 8 VCCA FREQ jg 5800 8801 5802 h veca 2 VCCA aci 2 2 4 VCCA act 28 2244 E VCCQH 2244 224 a 2 49 vccaH 400 1 49 vccaH 400 2 49 vccaH 400 4 29 vccaH ADO 1 8v 120 1 8 20 1 8v 20 1 8V 1720 720 5 720 VCCQH 56 720 gt 720 56 t 126 1126 vccqL 100 t 2 vccqL 26 vccQL 100 1756 141 1 56 CCQL 141 56 141 7 56 141 284 141_ S vccaL H4 4 2 4 L VCCQL 140 140 140 140 19 19 19 19 54 GNDQ 139 54 139 54 GNDQ 139 54 GNDQ 139 54 TDO 54 TDO 54 GNDQ TDO 4 94 TDO 90 90 90 90 132 9 442 127 142 7127 9 142 127 GNDQ 142 22 115 2 ts 2 GNDQ ts 2 GNDQ ts 2 GNDA 4 GNDA GNDA GNDA 81 GNDA 81 GNDA 4 81 GNDA 811 GNDA GNDA 8 GNDA GNDA GNDA 26 GNDA 4234 GNDA 4108 1 GNDD 104
74. If you escape to the main screen from Setup you can now see the station name toggle on the main screen 21 Set up response to AES3 status bits optional The default behavior of the 6300 is to ignore AES status bits because many pieces of external equipment handle these incorrectly However the 6300 allows the AES3 channel mode determine its operating mode stereo or dual mono The AES3 channel mode specification provides for two channel mode correspond ing to 6300 dual mono mode with bits 1 4 in byte 1 in the pattern 0001 and stereophonic mode corresponding to 6300 stereo mode with these bits in the pattern 0100 The 6300 can also emit these status bits at its digital output to control down stream equipment A Navigate to SETUP gt IO CALIB gt DiG OuT CALIB and set the DIGITAL FORMAT to AES OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 25 1 9 SPDIF cannot be used to handle status bit because the specification does not allow it B To enable the 6300 to change its operating mode in response to AES status bits received at its AES input e Navigate to SETUP gt NETWORK amp REMOTE gt AES STAT BITS e Set IN gt MODE to ON Unless you are sure that upstream equipment will correctly format these bits set IN gt MODE to OFF e Make sure that the equipment driving the 6300 is formatting its output as AES3 SPDIF will not work C To send two channel mode and stereophonic mode bits indicating the 6300 s
75. It cannot make loud sounds seem louder Compression reduces dynamic range relatively slowly in a manner similar to riding the gain Limiting and clipping on the other hand reduce the short term peak to average ratio of the audio Limiting increases audio density Increasing density can make loud sounds seem louder but can also result in an unattractive busier flatter or denser sound It is im portant to be aware of the many negative subjective side effects of excessive density when setting controls that affect the density of the processed sound Clipping sharp peaks does not produce any audible side effects when done moder ately Excessive clipping will be perceived as audible distortion Look ahead limiting is limiting that prevents overshoots by examining a few milli seconds of the unprocessed sound before it is limited This way the limiter can an ticipate and control peaks that are coming up Distortion in Processing In a competently designed processor distortion occurs only when the processor is controlling peaks to prevent the audio from exceeding the peak modulation limits of the transmission channel The less peak control that occurs the less likely that the listener will hear distortion However to reduce the amount of peak control you must decrease the drive level to the peak limiter which causes the average level and thus the loudness to decrease proportionally Loudness and Distortion In processing there is a
76. Net works checked if you like Click OK m When the Connection window appears click OK properties INSTALLATION 2 5 1 Modem Configuration 2 xl B Communications cable between two computers COM1 Maximum speed bps Modem protocol gt Hardware features Enable hardware flow control Enable modem error control Enable modem compression Initialization papa Show terminal window Run script Edit Browse Cancel Enable modem speaker Connection to 8300 General Options Security Networking Sharing Type of dial up server am calling PPP Window 00 Internet Settings Components checked are used by this connection 2 Intemet Protocol TCP IP vi File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks m Client for Microsoft Networks Install Uninstall Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks 2 52 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 2 Launch an existing Windows 2000 Direct connection Once you have set up a connection specifying Direct Connect in the 6300 PC Remote application see To set up a new connection on page 3 58 choosing this connection from 6300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows Direct Connec tion to your 6300 You can connect
77. OPTIMOD 6300 fits into the DAB and DTV broad cast plants and how to use it for netcasting Chapter 2 explains how to install it Chapter 3 explains how to operate OPTIMOD 6300 Chapters 4 through 6 provide reference information OPTIMOD 6300 was designed to deliver a high quality sound while simultaneously increasing the average modulation of the channel substantially beyond that achiev able by recording studio style compressors and limiters Because such processing can exaggerate flaws in the source material it is very important that the source audio be as clean as possible For best results feed OPTIMOD 6300 unprocessed audio No other audio proc essing is necessary or desirable If you wish to place level protection prior to your studio transmitter link STL use OPTIMOD PC 1100V2 or another 6300 Either of these can substitute for the broad band AGC circuitry in OPTIMOD 6300 which is then defeated User Friendly Interface e An LCD and full time LED meters make setup adjustment and programming of OPTIMOD 6300 easy you can always see the metering while you are adjust ing the processor Navigation is by dedicated buttons soft buttons whose func tion is context sensitive and a large rotary knob The LEDs show all metering functions of the processing structure 2 band or 5 band in use e Push one of the dedicated buttons to Recall a preset to Modify processing or to access the system s Setup controls Absolute Cont
78. ORBAN MODEL 6300 G R gain reduction HD Radio See IBOC HF high frequency HP high pass IBOC In Band On Channel a form of digital radio commercialized by iBiquity Corporation where the digital carriers use a form of COFDM modulation and share the frequency alloca tion of the analog carriers Also known by its trademarked name of HD Radio IC integrated circuit IM intermodulation or intermodulation distortion VO input output ITU International Telecommunications Union formerly CCIR ITU R is the arm of the ITU dedi cated to radio JFET junction field effect transistor LC inductor capacitor LCD liquid crystal display LED light emitting diode LF low frequency LP low pass LVL level MHF midrange high frequency MLF midrange low frequency MOD modulation N amp D noise and distortion N C no connection OSHOOT overshoot PC IBM compatible personal computer PCM pulse code modulation PPM peak program meter RAM random access memory RC resistor capacitor RDS RBDS Radio Broadcasting Data Service a narrowband digital subcarrier centered at 57 kHz in the TV baseband that usually provides program or network related data to the consumer in the form of text that is displayed on the radio Occupied bandwidth is 2500 Hz REF reference RF radio frequency RFI radio
79. Presets for the 5 band structure Each of these presets can be edited with the LEss MORE control This control affects the sound for picture oriented presets differently than it does the music presets presets with music in their names When a sound for picture oriented preset is on the air the LESS MORE control adjusts the average amount of gain reduction by adjusting the drive level to the 5 band structure s in put This also adjusts the idle gain the amount of gain reduction in the AGC section when the structure is gated It gates whenever the input level to the structure is be low the threshold of gating When a music preset is the air the LESS MORE control sets the amount of overall processing making optimum tradeoffs between loudness brightness and distor tion In sound for picture there are no loudness wars for music presets there is no need to advance the LESS MORE control beyond its setting in the Factory Presets Customizing the Settings The controls in the 5 band structure give you the flexibility to customize your station sound However as with any audio processing system proper adjustment of these controls requires proper balancing of the trade offs explained above The following provides the information you need to adjust the 5 band structure controls to suit your programming and taste Multiband Controls Full Name Range DWNEXP CPL On Off DWNEXP THR Off 18 0
80. Rate and Audio Bandwidth Most DAB audio is at 48 kHz sample rate However the iBiquity HD AM system operates at 32 kHz requiring 15 kHz audio bandwidth The Eureka 147 system of fers a 24 kHz sample rate option requiring 10 kHz audio bandwidth The Digital Ra dio Mondiale DRM system also allows reduced audio bandwidths and sample rate for speech grade services OPTIMOD 6300 s bandwidth can be adjusted from 10 kHz to 20 kHz to provide cor rectly anti aliased audio for any of these systems As long as any anti aliasing filters following OPTIMOD 6300 s output are phase linear and have integer sample time delays these filters will pass the band limited OPTIMOD 6300 output without intro ducing overshoot because they remove no further spectrum and do not cause their output samples to become asynchronous with the peak controlled samples at OPTIMOD 6300 s output The bandwidth limiting filter is located before the processing so it affects all out puts equally OPTIMOD 6300 always operates at 48 kHz sample rate internally Its output is equipped with a sample rate converter that can output at 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 88 2 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 1 7 or 96 kHz These rates can be synchronized to the 6300 s internal clock its AES3 digi tal input its AES11id input or its wordclock input We expect that transmitters that transmit sample rates below 32 kHz will provide internal sample rate conversion and that most wi
81. SHT2 Sura 604 OHM 52506 4 1004 g _ SHT2 106 10 ms UB 3 74 245 TO LCD T EL ISA IORD N 1 8 eee eee e e P cs2 css cse oom Gum D7 2 DR 18 R53 R54 40 80 777 4 1 4 1 ISA D6 E Bt DB25 M ce2 cse 659 51 m R55 5V ISA D3 6 5 12 5 6 EL 44 84 t ISA D2 7 604 OHM da 15A D1 8 45 BS 712 R56 Hc R57 u18 ISA D0 9 49 5711 22 00 BNET 1 4 4 4 TAACT244 FP_BUSEN N j 2 i 604 OHM 52506 4 Took 2 CONTRAST 3 Tn U23D 9 4 TO LCD BACKLIGHT R58 4 7 10 9 8 y 18 18 DO 3 804 OHM 6 Ya 16 15 D1 2 TRIMMED 5 1 A 7 R59 74 14 7 ISA D2 1 FOR KEY 4 8 1 B 9 5 ISA 03 HDR 22 9 4 604 OHM PS2506 4 10 1 AB 7 S ps Jn 1 E Ree 16 1 itd TS ESAD ISA 001 e 28 3 D7 25 604 OHM Ya E 12 14 23 4 Re4 2 15 R65 gt 5 gt 604 OHM PS2506 4 R67 20 U19B U24B 20 H R68 3 14 n4 20 OHM SHT2 FP_COL B N 19 Ou FP ROW C N 19 19 604 OHM FP ROW BNI TO FRONT PANEL 2 peas Aa 74 SHT2 17 DISPLAY PCA 21 4 4 R71 m R72 10 0K 2 el lear 604 OHM 52506 4 Took NM 2 00K Aer gut gt FE AN 14 U1
82. To do this set the AGC MAXDELTGR control greater than zero AGC Max Delta GR determines the maximum gain difference permitted between the two channels of the AGC Set it to 0 for perfect stereo coupling This control works the same regardless of whether the AGC operates in left right or sum difference MATRIX modes in both cases controlling the maximum gain difference between the channels Depending on the Matrix mode setting the channels will handle left and right signals or will handle sum and difference signals When the AGC operates in sum difference MATRIX mode this control determines the maximum amount of width change in the stereo soundfield Master Delta Threshold allows you to set the difference between the compression thresholds of the sum and difference channels This control is only useful when you set the AGC to SUM DIF By setting the threshold of the difference channel lower than the sum channel you can have the AGC automatically produce more gain reduction in the difference channel This will reduce the separation of material with an excessively wide stereo image like old Beatles records To make this work you must set the Max DELTA GR control away from zero For example to limit an ex cessively wide image while preventing more than 3 dB difference in gain between the sum and difference channels set the Max DELTA GR control to 3 0 and the MASTER DELTA THRESHOLD control to some positive number de
83. ZL 6 6 as 8 58 58 55 55 5 lt gt lt lt gt lt D lt qh 4 8 EAM 6L EAM LL Ar SL 4 8 AU 2 7 lt E LL eus On TAY Oy EL eae thot ea s SS S E a em 8 Eg ig E 5 5 ES gt ES SL LAY Z NC LAU 61 SCA LAY LL LAY NDA VOCAT lt lt 5 Eg E E 8 5 5 ex VAY L Ant AW EL S OAY ZL Qe OAY 6 VAY L ut olla coe zem alo zis SS am EE ge ES 525 22g 05 2 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt EIE 512 279 x x m m E 9 3 een fen rm omi 9 e 5 Z mne D ac ac lt Jor lt A85 gt 5 5 mp z 3 a a E 46 8855 gt 2222 OF 2 ol BIB m 2e Edi bi CK gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt foe o Ed 588 2 0h 3 S ml o m fin gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 22 2212 02 2 122 2212
84. a Direct or Modem Connection of the 6300 on page 5 6 1 Add and configure a Direct Connection for Windows 2000 A Create a New Windows 2000 Direct Connection a Launch 6300 PC Remote b Choose Connect New 6300 Give your 6300 a name e g KABC by en tering this name in the 6300 Alias field 9 you wish to have 6300 PC Remote remember the password for this Optimod enter the pass word in the Password field e Select Serial Connec tion f Click Add 9 Select Connect Directly to another computer h Click Next 8300 PC File Edit View Tools Connect Help kd Nev Local Folder Files Orban Optimod 830018300 Disconnect 3 All Connections 8300 Connection Properties x r General Settings 8300 Alias 8300 Password Leave password blank to be prompted upon connect Comment Ethernet Connection 3 IPAddress 127 0 0 1 Port Number 201 Settings Add TN Network Connection Wizard xi Type of Connection Select the type of the connection a C Dial up to private network Connect using my phone line modem or ISDN C Connect to a private network through the Internet Create a Virtual Private Network VPN connection or tunnel through the internet x er Connect using my serial parallel or infra
85. a maximum program indication on the meter that is lower than the clipping level so those peaks that the meter does not indicate will not be clipped Line up level is usually at this same maximum meter indication In facilities that use VU meters this level is usually at OVU which corresponds to the studio standard level typically 4 or 8dBu For facilities using 4dBu standard level instantaneous peaks can reach 18dBu higher particularly if the operator overdrives the console or desk Older facilities with 8dBu standard level and equipment that clips at 18 or 21dBu will experi ence noticeable clipping on some program material In facilities that use the BBC standard PPM maximum program level is usually 4 for music PPM6 for speech Line up level is usually PPM4 which corresponds to 4dBu Instantaneous peaks will reach 17dBu or more on voice In facilities that use PPMs that indicate level directly in dBu maximum program and line up level is often 6dBu Instantaneous peaks will reach 11dBu or more OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 1 9 Transmission Levels The transmission engineer is primarily concerned with the peak level of a program to prevent overloading or over modulation of the transmission system This peak overload level is defined differently system to system In FM modulation FM VHF radio and television broadcast microwave or analog satellite links it is the maximum permitted RF carrier f
86. adjusts the idle gain the amount of gain reduction in the AGC section when the struc ture is gated It gates whenever the input level to the structure is below the thresh old of gating The total amount of gain reduction in the 5 band structure is the sum of the gain AGC Controls OPERATION 3 33 Full Modify Name Range AGC Off On AGC B CPL Off 12 0 dB AGC DRIVE 10 25 dB AGC GATE Off 44 15 dB AGC Matrix L R sum diff AGC METR Master Delta AGC REL 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 20 dB S BassDeltaThr 6 0 6 0 dB MaxDelta GR 0 0 24 0 Off dB MstrDeltaThr Allpass LinearNoDelay 1 10 1 10 dB sec 120 2 5 dB 10 10 dB 0 2 6 E 0 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 0 5 20 dB 25 0 dB Bass Delta Threshold 6 0 6 0 dB Table 3 6 AGC Controls 3 34 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 reduction in the AGC and the gain reduction in the multiband compressor The total system gain reduction determines how much the loudness of quiet passages will be increased and therefore how consistent overall loudness will be It is determined by the setting of the AGC DRIVE control by the level at which the console VU meter or PPM is peaked and by the setting of the MULTIBAND DRIVE compressor control AGC REL AGC Master Release control provides an adjustable range from 0 5 dB second slow to 20 dB se
87. already has a great deal of presence power Therefore with large amounts of gain reduction the density of presence region energy will be increased more than will the level of energy in that region Because the 3 7 kHz band compressor is par tially coupled to the gain reduction in the 6 2 kHz band in most presets tuning MID FREQ to 2 4 kHz and turning up the MID GAIN control will decrease energy in the 6 2 kHz band you will be increasing the gain reduction in both the 3 7 kHz and 6 2 kHz bands You may wish to compensate for this effect by turning up the BRILLIANCE con trol With 2 band presets the midrange equalizer will behave much more as you might expect because the 2 band structure cannot automatically re equalize midrange en ergy Instead increasing midrange energy will moderately increase the Master band s gain reduction Use the mid frequency equalizer with caution Excessive presence boost tends to be audibly strident and fatiguing Moreover the sound quality although loud can be very irritating We suggest a maximum of 3 dB boost although 10 dB is achievable In some of our factory music presets we use a 3 dB boost at 2 6 kHz to bring vocals more up front High Frequency Parametric Equalizer is an equalizer whose boost and cut curves closely emulate those of an analog parametric equalizer with conventional bell shaped curves 3 30 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 HIGH FREQ determines the center frequency of the equaliza
88. and DJ BASS these equalization controls are common to both the 2 band and 5 band structures The equalizer is located between the AGC and multiband compressor sections of both structures Any equalization that you set will be automatically stored in any User Preset that you create and save For example you can use a User Preset to combine an unmodi fied Factory Programming Preset with your custom equalization Of course you can OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 27 also modify the Factory Preset with Basic Modify Full Modify or Advanced Modify before you create your User Preset In general you should be conservative when equalizing modern well recorded pro gram material This is particularly true with general purpose video programming Except for BASS GAIN most of the factory presets use less than 3 dB of equalization Bass Shelf Controls the 5 band structure s low bass equalization controls are de signed to add punch and slam to rock and urban music They provide a parametric shelving equalizer with control over gain hinge frequency and slope in dB octave BASS FREQ sets the frequency where shelving starts to take effect BASS GAIN sets the amount of bass boost dB at the top of the shelf BASS SLOPE sets the slope dB octave of the transition between the top and bottom of the shelf The moderate slope 12 dB octave shelving boost achieves a bass boost that is more audible on smaller receivers but which can s
89. and audio processing using digital signal processing A block diagram of the DSP signal processing appears on page 6 41 e The Power Supply provides power for all 6300 circuit sections It is a modular switching supply and is not user serviceable Control Circuits The control circuit is based an AMD Elan SC520 microprocessor which is 586 class processor running an Orban executable program over a third party real time operating system A flash memory emulates a hard drive The memory is non volatile and does not rely on a battery to retain information when mains power is off The flash memory holds the operating system the Orban executable program and all preset files both factory and user It also contains a write protected boot seg ment that functions as a boot ROM The control circuits process and execute user initiated requests to the system The source of these requests is the front panel buttons and rotary encoder the rear panel RS 232 port Ethernet port and the remote contact closures These changes affect hardware function and or DSP processing The control circuits also send in formation to the LCD display the LED bar graphs and the control status indicators The control circuit communicates with the DSP and display circuitry through the SC520 s General Purpose bus The SC520 periodically refreshes a watchdog timer If the timer times out without being refreshed it assumes that the control program has crashe
90. and manually duplicating each control setting you see Advanced 2 band Controls The following 2 band controls are only accessible from the 6300 PC Remote soft ware 2B Master Compression Threshold sets the level where gain reduction starts to occur in the Master above 200Hz band of the 2 band Compressor 2B Bass Threshold determines the compression threshold of the bass band below 200 Hz in the 2 band Compressor It can be used to set the target spectral balance of the 2 band Compressor As the 2 band Compressor Bass control is moved towards 100 the 2B BASS THRESHOLD control affects the sound less and less 2B Master Attack sets the attack time of the 2 band Compressor master compres sor above 200Hz 2B Bass Attack sets the attack time of the 2 band Compressor bass compressor be low 200 2 2B Master Comp Ratio and 2B Master Comp Ratio set the compression ratio of the Master compressor and Bass compressor respectively at their thresholds of com pression Beyond threshold the ratio increases with increased gain reduction until it becomes o 1 at the amount of gain reduction in dB set by the 2B MASTER KNEE con trol When you adjust these controls the thresholds of the multiband compressors automatically change so that the total amount of gain reduction stays approxi mately the same This automatic adjustment is internal to the 6300 s DSP the dis played settings of the MB THRESH controls do not
91. broadcast tones and data directly into the transmitter thus bypassing the 6300 for the duration of the EAS tones and data broadcast PC Control and Security Passcode PC software control provides access to OPTIMOD 6300 via network modem or direct null modem cable connection with IBM PC compatible computers running Win dows 2000 or XP PC access is permitted only with a valid user defined passcode PC remote control can be ended from the front panel this feature effectively pre vents simultaneous remote and local control See Security and Passcode Programming starting on page 2 32 for more detail 1 24 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Warranty User Feedback User Feedback We are very interested in your comments about this product We will carefully re view your suggestions for improvements to either the product or the manual Please email us at custserv orban com LIMITED WARRANTY Valid only for products purchased and used in the United States Orban warrants Orban products against defects in material or workmanship for a period of two years from the date of original purchase for use and agrees to repair or at our option replace any defective item without charge for either parts or labor IMPORTANT This warranty does not cover damage resulting from accident misuse or abuse lack of reasonable care the affixing of any attachment not provided with the product loss of parts or connecting the product to a
92. broadcasters that feel that the LOUD HOT presets are too aggressive but that think that the ROCK presets are insufficiently loud for their market position LOUD BIG compromises between LOUD HOT and LOUD HOT BASS It uses a 12 dB octave bass equalizer slope to achieve punchy bass that still has enough mid bass boost to help smaller radios LOUD FAT has dramatic punch on percussive material and a very fat sounding low end It avoids overt bass distortion despite the full bass sound It is slightly quieter than the loudest of the loud preset family NEWS TALK This preset is quite different from the others It is based on the fast multiband release time setting so it can quickly perform automatic equalization of substandard program material including telephone It is useful for creating a uni form intelligible sound from widely varying source material particularly source ma terial that is hot from the field with uncontrolled quality SPORTS Similar to NEWS TALK except the AGC Release AGC Release Time is slower and the Gate Thresh Gate Threshold is higher This recognizes that most sports programming has very low signal to noise ratio due to crowd noise and other 3 24 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 on field sounds so the preset does not pump this up as the NEWS TALK preset would tend to do ROCK ROCK DENSE ROCK MEDIUM and ROCK OPEN are appropriate for gen eral rock and contemporary programming They provide a bright high end
93. close to identical in magnitude and phase 3 32 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 In this case the enhancer assumes that the program material is actually mono and thus suppresses enhancement to prevent the enhancement from exaggerating the undesired channel imbalance The ratio of L R L R of the enhanced signal tries to exceed the threshold set by the L R L R Ratio Limit control In this case the enhancer prevents further enhancement in order to pre vent excess L R energy which can increase multipath distortion Stereo Enhancer Controls Basic Full Modify Name Range DEPTH 0 10 DIFFUSION Off 0 3 10 0 ENH AMT 0 0 10 0 ENHANCER Out In RATIO LMT Ratio Lim 70 100 STYLE Style L R Expand Delay Table 3 5 Stereo Enhancer Controls The stereo enhancer has the following controls Amount sets the maximum spatial enhancement Enhancer In Out bypasses the stereo enhancer OUT is equivalent to setting the AMOUNT to 0 L R L R Ratio Limit sets the maximum amount of enhancement to prevent multi path distortion However if the original program material exceeds this limit with no enhancement the enhancer will not reduce it Diffusion applies only to the DELAY enhancer This control determines the amount of delayed L R added to the original signal Style sets one of two stereo enhancer types 222 or DELAY Depth sets the delay in the delay line It applies only to the DELAY enhancer
94. dB and 25 dB Higher values are useful in sound for picture processing to prevent background sounds and underscoring from being pumped up while lower settings are more common with musical programming BASS CPL 2B Bass Coupling is used to set the balance between bass and the rest of the frequency spectrum The 2 band compressor processes audio in a master band for all audio above ap proximately 200Hz and a bass band for audio below approximately 200Hz The Bass CPL control determines how closely the balance of material below 200Hz matches that of the program material above 200Hz Bass coupling is set to 10096 on all of the 2 band presets because these presets are designed to do gentle gain riding without increasing program density or signifi cantly modifying the spectral balance of the program When bass coupling is set to 10096 the bass band will usually have the same amount of gain reduction as the master band Only with material having unusually heavy bass will you see additional gain reduction in the bass band Bass Clip Bass Clip Threshold See page 3 38 Loudness Threshold sets the maximum subjective loudness allowed by the process ing with reference to the input of the 6300 s multiband look ahead limiter 2 band or 5 band It is most useful in 2 band mode because the 5 band compressor creates more uniform loudness than does the 2 band compressor limiter 3 44 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 The loudness controller is
95. delay monitor signal to drive talent headphones only See step 10 on page 2 14 Customizing the 6300 s Sound The subjective setup controls on the 6300 give you the flexibility to customize your station s sound Nevertheless as with any audio processing system proper adjust ment of these controls consists of balancing the trade offs between loudness den sity and audible distortion The following pages provide the information you need to adjust the 6300 controls to suit your format taste and competitive situation When you start with one of our Factory Presets there are two levels of subjective adjustment available to you to let you customize the Factory Preset to your re quirements Basic Modify and Full Modify A third level Advanced Modify is accessi ble only from the 6300 s PC Remote software See page 6 41 for a block diagram of the processing Basic Modify BASIC MODIFY allows you to control three important elements of 6300 processing the stereo enhancer the equalizer and the dynamics section multiband compres sion limiting and clipping At this level there is only one control for the dynamics section LESS MoRE which changes several different subjective setup control settings simultaneously according to a table that we have created in the 6300 s permanent ROM Read Only Memory In this table are sets of subjective setup control settings that provide in our opinion the most favorable trade off between loudness
96. designed to follow 2 band or 5 band compression which prevents it from being overdriven It is only available in the MULTIBAND and MULTIBAND LIMITING processing chains The LOUDNESS THRESHOLD control sets the subjective loudness level at which the loudness controller will add further gain reduction to the gain reduction that the multiband compressor produces To minimize spectral gain modulation artifacts the loudness controller applies gain reduction to the Master band only in 2 band mode and in bands 2 5 in 5 band mode In 2 band mode the 2B Master gain reduction meter shows the sum of the compressor induced gain reduction and the loudness controller induced gain reduction In 5 band mode the band 2 5 gain reduction me ters indicate the sum of the gain reduction in the band in question and the loudness control gain reduction The loudness controller s attack and release times are tuned to match the loudness integration times of the ear are program adaptive and are not user adjustable The loudness controller responds almost entirely to program material that has dominant energy between 1 and 7 kHz which is the ear s most sensitive range If you find that the loudness controller is producing audible artifacts in 2 band mode because the program forces it to do more than approximately 6 dB of extra gain re duction we suggest using 5 band mode instead This will automatically re equalize such program material and will de ess extremely sibil
97. lift the power supply up to remove it 6 Reattaching the Power Supply A Set power supply into main chassis so that it aligns with its associated stand offs B Thread but do not tighten the three Phillips screws that hold the power sup ply board to the main chassis C Thread the long threaded standoff in the remaining mounting hole Tighten it firmly D Tighten the three Phillips screws that hold the power supply board to the main chassis E Reattach the plug that connects the power supply to the AC line socket F Reattach the cable that connects the power supply board to the 05 board G Secure the insulating cover to the long standoff This cover must be replaced for safety 7 Replacing the Control board and Board DSP board Referring to steps 3 and 4 follow the instructions in reverse 8 Replacing the Front Panel Assembly A Set the front panel face down on a soft cloth to prevent scratches B Lightly reattach the bottom and top circuit boards by mating the four plugs and jacks Use care to align the pins with the jacks so that all pins are correctly aligned and no pins are bent Do not push the pins all the way into the jacks yet leave room between the upper and lower boards for spacers C Reattach the board assembly to the front panel using the eight 1 Philips head screws and spacers removed in step 2 E on page 4 2 a Thread each screw through a spacer placed between the upper and l
98. light re equalization The preset produces very low listening fatigue so it is a good choice for broadcast ers that want listeners to stay all day Note that broadcasters programming smooth jazz should investigate the SMOOTH JAZZ preset which is much louder and more commercial sounding LOUD There are several LOUD presets LOUD HOT is very bright and present with up front vocals Release time is medium LOUD HOT BASS is based on LOUD HOT It is tuned for the maximum amount of bass we could add without creating objectionable artifacts on some program mate rial For maximum punch it uses the HARD bass clipper at higher LESS MORE set tings This amount of bass may be excessive with certain consumer systems particularly boom boxes that already have substantial bass boost Use it with care LOUD SLAM is similar to LOUD HOT BASS but uses HARD bass clipping mode with a SHAPE of 7 6 a BASS SLOPE of 18 dB octave It has modified tuning in the band 1 compressor to control bass clipping distortion that could otherwise be introduced by Hard bass clipping This preset provides slamming bass punch which it trades off against bass cleanliness on certain program material Because of the 18 dB octave BASS SLOPE its advantages will be appreciated most through radios with good low bass response LOUD PUNCHY is the quietest of the loud preset family It is designed for a bright sizzling top end and very punchy lows It is a good choice for
99. limiter which will have to eliminate attack transients exceeding the look ahead limiter s threshold N Set the amount of peak limiting with the FINAL Limit control In general the less peak limiting you use the better sounding the result will be However if your client demands a loud result the 6300 s look ahead peak limiter is a powerful tool for achieving this with minimum distortion or other side effects Nevertheless be aware that this function is not like some familiar look ahead limiters The release time is in the order of a few milliseconds and is not user adjustable The purpose of the limiter is only to limit peaks that pass through the earlier compressors be cause of their finite attack times Functionally it is used like a peak clip per but thanks to a built in psychoacoustic model it has vastly reduced modulation distortion by comparison to a clipper whether soft knee or hard knee The main potential side effects of the look ahead limiter are gain breath ing and a warbling sound in the midrange when heavy bass is simulta neously present Listen carefully for this intermodulation effect particu larly on vocals when you are adjusting the FINAL Limit control Adjust the BAss CLIP THRESHOLD and BASS CLIP SHAPE controls to complement the amount of final limiting See page 3 38 For most mastering applications you can set the BAss CLIP THRESHOLD to Orr However if you hear pumping or warbling
100. moderate Band 5 attack time 25 ms works well e f necessary lower the Band 4 compression threshold Starting with one of our suggested presets will help keep you out of trouble when you edit them to create user presets We have supplied several presets tuned for the Microsoft WMA V9 at 32 kbps This codec has severe artifacts at this bitrate and no preprocessing can mask them com pletely The 6300 s WMA presets strictly limit the amount of high frequency energy applied to the codec To prevent the processing from adding L R energy these pre sets operate with full stereo coupling and without stereo enhancement OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 5 The 6300 s ability to maintain source to source spectral consistency is also an impor tant advantage Once you have set up the processing to minimize codec artifacts caused by a given piece of program material the 6300 will automatically minimize codec artifacts with any program material Speech Music Detector The Speech Music Detector allows the 6300 to change its processing parameters de pending on whether the input program material is speech or other material usually music The algorithm is straightforward Speech is detected if 1 the input is mono and 2 there are syllabic pauses at least once every 1 5 seconds Speech with a stereo music background will usually be detected as music or the detector may switch back and forth randomly if the stereo content is very close to th
101. na rara aaa saa aan 5 7 Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect seen 5 7 Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem 5 8 Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect 5 9 Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect 5 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 11 TECHNICAE SUPPORT 5 12 FACTORY SERVICE EE 5 12 SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS 5 12 Section 6 Technical Data ouexseuvc 6 1 SPECIFICATIONS seo cc cc 6 1 Performante ts nine nel enit ei 6 1 Installation E 6 2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION seconds 6 4 Ou 6 5 Contro CIFCUITS uiris vica tai cat E d ana d 6 5 User Control Interface and LCD Display Circuits sse 6 6 IP PU E CIRCUITS 3s s 6 7 Output 6 9 BIS ohonea basis tote 6 10 Power SUPP lyssa 6 10 EEA EP 6 11 E A A ON 6 13 Obtaining Spare Parts dete itp tp pede aes 6 13 Control Board EI AE IEEE cce rada 6 13 Combined Input Output and DSP I O DSP Board 6 15 Display Board Front
102. number of the modem connected to the 6300 that you are Phone Number to Dial You must specify the phone number of the computer or network you want to setti ng u connect to j Click the Next button Type the phone number of the computer or network you are connecting to If you want your computer to determine automatically how to dial from different locations check Use dialing rules Area code Phone number gt 555 5554 Country region code Use dialing rules Select either For all users or Only 1122 myse If Connection Availability You may make the new connection available to all users or just yourself The correct setting depends on how your network and secu rity are confi 9 You may make this connection available to all users or keep it only for your own use ure d connection stored in your profile will not be available unless you are logged on This screen may not appear in com Create this connection gu puters set up for single users Ee Only for myself 2 60 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Click the Next button Network Connection Wizard Finished m Type in a name for your The wizard is ready to create your connection Connection such as Connection to 6300 Modem n Click the Finish button Click Yes D Edit your new Direct Connection Properties Connection propert
103. of the clipper you will get more bass but also more distortion and pumping Be careful when setting this control do not adjust it casually Listen to program material with heavy bass combined with spectrally sparse midrange material like a singer and listen for IM distortion in duced by the bass pushing the midrange into the look ahead limiter Although the low IM technology in the 6300 s look ahead limiter substantially reduces this distor tion overdriving the limiter hard enough can still cause problems In the 5 band structure band 1 drives the clipper In the 2 band structure the Bass band drives the clipper Bass Clip Shape allows you to change the knee of the input output gain curve of the bass clipper It allows you to control the shape of the knee the transition be tween no clipping and flat topping 0 provides the hardest knee where the tran sition between linear operation and flat topping occurs abruptly as the clipper s in put level is changed 10 is the softest knee where the transition starts 6 dB below BASSCLIPTHRESH setting and occurs gradually The factory default setting is 7 6 Final Limit Drive controls AGC and MB adjust the level of the audio driving the low IM look ahead limiters that OPTIMOD PC uses to control fast peaks thereby ad justing the peak to average ratio of the processed audio The FINAL Limit DRIVE con trols primarily determine the loudness distortion trade off Turning up th
104. of the equalization in Hertz Range is 20 500Hz GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut in dB over a 10 dB range LF WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization in octaves The range is 0 8 4 0 octaves If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric equalizer 1 5 octaves is a good starting point These curves are relatively broad because they are designed to provide overall tonal coloration in stead of notching out small areas of the spectrum The LF parametric can be used in the mid bass region 100 300Hz to add warmth and mellowness to the sound when boosting When cutting it can remove a woody or boxy sound The equalizer like the classic Orban analog parametrics such as the 622B has con stant Q curves This means that the cut curves are narrower than the boost curves The width in octaves is calibrated with reference to 10 dB boost As you decrease the amount of EQ gain or start to cut the width in octaves will decrease However the Q will stay constant Q is a mathematical parameter that relates to how fast ringing damps out Tech nically we are referring to the Q of the poles of the equalizer transfer function which does not change as you adjust the amount of boost or cut OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 29 The curves in the 6300 s equalizer were created by a so called minimax minimize the maximum error or equal ripple IIR digital approximation to the cur
105. opens for Optimod 6300 Direct D Click the Networking tab E Set Type of dial up server am calling to PPP Windows 95 98 2000 Internet F Select the Settings button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked then click OK G In This connection uses the following items uncheck all except for Internet Protocol TCP IP You can also leave QoS Packet Scheduler checked if you like H In This connection uses the following items select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click the Properties button The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens Choose Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically J Click the Advanced button on the Internet Protocol TCP IP Window K In the Advanced TCP IP Settings select the General Tab make sure that no check boxes are checked L Click OK to dismiss the Advanced TCP IP Settings window M On the Properties window for Optimod 6300 Modem click the Ad vanced tab N Click OK to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection O Click Cancel to dismiss the Connect nnnn dialog box P Restart your computer This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood that you will en counter problems connecting to the 6300 Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect If you are having trouble establishing a connection check your New Con nection s properties to mak
106. otherwise waste modulation IC212 and associated components form a low frequency servo amplifier to re move residual DC from the signal The 0 1Hz 3 dB frequency prevents tilt induced overshoot in the processed audio The buffered output of IC201 is applied to 213 a balanced output line driver This driver emulates a floating transformer its differential output level is independent of whether one side of its output is floating or grounded C213 and its right channel counterpart 1 214 are socketed for easy field re placement other circuitry is surface mounted The corresponding right channel circuitry is functionally identical to that just described 6 1 0 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 3 Digital Sample Rate Converter SRC and Output Transmitter Located on input output DSP board Output sample rate converter SRC chips IC400 and 402 convert the 48 kHz 6300 system sample rate to any of the standard 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz and 96 kHz rates for the 6300 s Digital Out 1 and Digital Out 2 respectively The sample rate converters drive digital audio interface transmitters IC403 404 which encode digital audio signals using the AES3 interface format AES3 1992 These chips are surface mounted and are not field replaceable DSP Circuit The DSP circuit consists of four Motorola DSP56367 24 bit fixed point DSP chips which execute DSP software code to implement digital signal processing algorithms
107. over the word DAILY and turn the knob so that is reads DATE instead b Use the PREv and buttons to move the cursor to the day month and year when the automation event will occur Set the desired values with the knob Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor set the hour minute and second in 24 hour format when the automation event is to occur Set the desired values with the knob D For events that occur on a daily or weekly schedule a Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor the each day of the week in turn and use the rotary encoder to turn the day on or off You can program the event to occur on as many days of the week as you wish b Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor set the hour minute and second in 24 hour format e g 18 00 00 for 6 00 PM when the automation event is to occur Set the desired values with the knob Automation events have a start time but no stop time The 6300 will indefinitely remain in the state specified by an existing automation event until its state is changed by another automation event or by another ac tion such as a user s interacting with the front panel or PC Remote soft ware E For all events a Press the SELECT button b Turn the knob to set the desired event The available events are e Recall factory preset e Recall user preset e stereo mode e dual mono DUALMONO mode This mode processes the two input c
108. rates and you should match your encoder to your potential audience An encoder appropriate for a dial up rate of 20kb sec may not be optimum for ISDN DSL or E 1 T 1 rates This makes it necessary to use more than one algorithm to optimally serve audiences with these disparate connection speeds MPEG 1 Layer 3 has become a de facto standard for distribution of non streaming high fidelity audio on the Internet although aacPlus as used in Opticodec PC is far more efficient Orban s OPTICODEC PC FE is an AAC aacPlus file encoder application that can create such efficient files Thanks to the Apple iPod is rap idly becoming the defacto standard for downloadable music OPTIMOD 6300 is well matched to AAC aacPlus and to MP3 It can effectively pre process audio intended for playback from either format If you decide to use MP3 choose your MP3 encoder wisely as not all MP3 encoders are created equal and pro vide different levels of quality for a given bitrate EAS Test For stations participating in the Emergency Alert System EAS in the United States broadcast of EAS tones and data can be accomplished in three different ways 1 Run EAS tones and data through the 6300 Note that 6300 processing may not allow the full modulation level as required by EAS standards It may therefore be necessary to temporarily defeat the 6300 s processing during the broadcast of EAS tones and data Placing the 6300 in its BYPASS
109. show it To achieve a classic soft knee characteristic set the 2B MASTER COMP RATIO control to 1 1 and set the KNEE control to the gain reduction in dB at which you wish the com 3 46 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 pression ratio to level off to o1 The maximum setting produces the softest knee Setting the KNEE to 0 dB produces a classic hard knee curve with o 1 compression ra tio regardless of the setting of the 2B MASTER Comp RATIO control See Figure 3 2 on page 3 46 for the curves of output level vs input level for various settings of the KNEE and controls 2B Knee see 2B MASTER RATIO above 2B Breakpoint The release rate measured in dB second in the 6300 s compressors is constant when the gain reduction is higher than the control s setting and expo nential when the gain reduction is lower than the control s setting When the release is exponential the release rate is proportional to the amount of gain reduction Do not confuse this with the reverse exponential characteristic trig gered by setting the 2B REL SHAPE control to EXPONENTIAL In this case release com n 16 20 24 28 32 36 4t Figure 3 2 Output level in dB y for a given input level in dB x at various settings of the KNEE and control OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 47 mences slowly and then speeds up as it progresses The 2B BREAKPOINT control is only active whe
110. sophisticated proprietary optimization program The curves are matched to better than 0 15dB This means that their sound is very close to the sound of an Orban analog parametric They also use very high quality filter algo rithms to ensure low noise and distortion The 6300 HF Enhancer is a program controlled HF shelving equalizer that intelli gently and continuously analyzes the ratio between broadband and HF energy in the input program material It can equalize excessively dull material without over enhancing bright material It interacts synergistically with the 5 band compressor to produce sound that is bright and present without being excessively shrill Multiband Compression The multiband compressor can be operated in 5 band or 2 band mode In 5 band mode each band compressor has a KNEE and RATIO control A soft knee and gentle ratio are particularly useful in production and mastering ap plications allowing subtle compression that retains as much of the dynamics of the input program material as the operator desires Several band coupling controls allow the gain reduction of a given band s compres sor to be partially controlled by the gain reduction in its neighboring band s com pressor These coupling controls allow anything from quasi wideband compression to fully independent multiband compression A clipper embedded in the crossover protects bands 1 and 2 from transient over shoot This clipper has a shape control allowing yo
111. sound designers may have different preferences from ours not because the presets are somehow mediocre or improv able by those with special arcane knowledge that we withhold from most of our customers Start with one of these presets Spend some time listening critically to your sound Listen to a wide range of program material typical of your format and listen on sev OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 17 eral types of audio systems not just on your studio monitors Then if you wish cus tomize your sound using the information in the Protection Limiter 2 band and 5 band sections that follow Each factory preset has full LEss MORE capability The table shows the presets in cluding the source presets from which they were taken and the nominal LEss MORE setting of each preset Some of the 5 band presets appear several times under dif ferent names because we felt that these presets were appropriate for more than one format these can be identified by a shared source preset name Important If you are dissatisfied with the sound available from the fac tory presets please understand that each named preset is actually 19 pre sets that can be accessed via the LESS MORE control Try using this control to trade off the amount of dynamic range reduction against processing artifacts and side effects Once you have used LESS MORE save your ed ited preset as a User Preset Do not be afraid to choose a preset other than the one named for
112. the device that will be used to make the connection a j Click Next 2 54 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 k Type in a name for your Connection such as Connection to 6300 Click Finish m Click Yes B Edit your new Direct Connection properties a Click Settings New Connection Wizard The wizard is ready to create your connection E OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 55 b Click the General tab Connection to 8300 Properties Select the device you set up in step i General Options Security Networking Advanced on page 2 53 This will usually be Communications cable between two Select a device computers COM 1 d Click Configure Show icon in notification area when connected e Set the Maximum Speed bps to _ z 115200 m Communications cable between two computers COM1 f Check Enable hardware flow con E trol Maximum speed tos 7 g Make sure all other hardware features lt are unchecked Hardware features Enable hardware flow control Enable modem error control Enable modem compression h Click OK Show terminal window Enable modem speaker Lok 2 56 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 i Select the Networking tab j Make sure that PPP Windows 95 98 NT 4 2000 Internet appears in the Type of dial
113. the gain of its neighbor As the fundamental frequency moves lower more of this energy leaks into the bottom band and you hear more bass If the fundamental frequency is very low a rarity there OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 3 1 will be enough energy in the bottom band to force significant gain re duction and you will hear less bass than if the fundamental frequency were a bit higher This control is only available in the 5 band structure If the GATE THRESH Gate Threshold control is turned Orr the DJ BAss boost setting is disabled HF Enhance High Frequency Enhancer is a program adaptive 6 dB octave shelv ing equalizer with a 4 kHz turnover frequency It constantly monitors the ratio be tween high frequency and broadband energy and adjusts the amount of equaliza tion in an attempt to make this ratio constant as the program material changes It can therefore create a bright present sound without over equalizing material that is already bright Highpass Filter determines if a sweepable 18 dB octave highpass filter will be placed in circuit before other processing This filter is useful for reducing low fre quency noise particularly when the 6300 is being used for production or mastering Lowpass Filter control sets the bandwidth and therefore the amount of high fre quency signal the 6300 passes from 10 kHz to 20 kHz The lowpass filter can replace any anti aliasing filters in downstream equipment Set the filte
114. to do with using the 6300 itself as a studio level controller If you are doing this see Using OPTIMOD 6300 as a Studio Level Controller on page 1 10 e As of this writing the currently manufactured Orban products that can be used as external AGCs are Optimod PC 1101 and Optimod 6300 Their manuals con tain instructions on how to use them in this application They are the preferred choices because their AGCs are identical to the AGC in the 6300 e Discontinued Orban products usable as external AGCs include the 8200ST 464A Co Operator 8100AST and 1100 OPTIMOD PC In this manual we do not pro vide step by step instructions for setting up all of these older products although it should be easy to extrapolate from the instructions we do provide If you are using Orban 8200ST Studio Level Controller If the STL uses preemphasis its input preemphasis network will probably introduce overshoots that will increase peak modulation without any increase in average modulation We therefore strongly recommend that the STL transmitter s preem phasis be defeated freeing the STL from such potential overshoot and that the 8200ST be used to provide the necessary preemphasis If the STL transmitter s preemphasis cannot be defeated then configure the 8200ST for flat output In this case average modulation levels of the STL may have to be re duced to accommodate the overshoots These issues are extensively discussed start ing on page 1 9 1 Co
115. towards 100 fully coupled this control reduces the amount of dynamic upper midrange boost preventing unnatu ral upper midrange boost The gain of band 5 is further affected by the 4 gt 5 CPL control The COUPLING controls use an OR algorithm the final gain reduction in a given band is the higher of 1 the gain reduction that would have been produced in that band with no coupling OR 2 the gain reduction in the adjacent coupled band mul tiplied by the setting of the CouPLING control For example assume that Band 4 would produce 10 dB of gain reduction with no B3 gt B4 coupling If the B3 gt B4 CPL control is set to 5096 Band 3 will not affect Band 4 s gain reduction unless Band 4 is producing more than 20 dB of gain reduction At 3 54 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 this point every 2 dB increase in Band 45 gain reduction will cause a 1 dB increase in Band 3 s gain reduction B4 gt B5 CPL Band 455 Coupling controls the extent to which the gain of band 5 6 2 kHz and above is determined by and follows the gain of band 4 The sum of the high frequency limiter control signal and the output of the B4 gt B5 CPL determines the gain reduction band 5 The B4 gt B5 CPL control re ceives the independent left and right band 4 gain control signal Range is 0 to 100 coupling B3 gt B2 CPL and 2 gt CPL controls determine the extent to which the gains of bands 2 and 3 track each other When combined
116. unprocessed audio to the 6300 the STL s noise level can severely limit the overall noise performance of the system because compression in the 6300 can exaggerate the STL noise For example the overload to noise ratio of a typical analog microwave STL may only be 70 75 dB In this case it is wise to use an Orban Studio AGC to perform the AGC function prior to the STL transmitter and to control the STL s peak modulation This will optimize the signal to noise ratio of the entire transmission system An uncompressed digital STL will perform much better than any analog STL See Studio Transmitter Link starting on page 1 12 Gain pumping when high frequency energy is present This will occur with most OPTIMOD PC factory presets when the 6300 s preemphasis is set to 50 us or 75 5 See step 10 C page 2 25 The gain pumping happens be cause the preemphasis creates a large high frequency boost before the look ahead limiter so the look ahead limiter must produce large amounts of gain reduction to control peak levels To correct this problem turn down the FINAL DRIVE control page 3 39 until the pumping is no longer audible It may also be helpful to adjust band 5 so that it pro duces some high frequency limiting Then save your work as a User Preset Shrill Harsh Sound This problem can be caused by excessive HF boost in the HF Equalizer and HF Enhan cer It could also be caused by an excessively high setting of the band 4 or
117. 0 01 1 HEADER 2MM 2X 6 J7 27479 002 01 1 CONNECTOR HEADER 156 CENTER 2 J12 PIN 29535 000 01 1 INDUCTOR 3 9uH CHIP 1008 L1 L2 L3 29536 000 01 1 INDUCTOR SURFACE MOUNT 10uH L4 10 43050 014 01 1 SASY IDC 60PIN 1 4 J2 Combined Input Output and DSP 0 05 Board l O DSP BOARD PART DESCRIPTION COMONENT IDENTIFIER 20040 604 01 RESISTOR MF 1 8W 1 604 2 R106 R119 NO STUFF 20128 000 01 RESISTOR 00 0805 R600 R601 R602 R603 NO STUFF 6 16 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 5 BOARD PART DESCRIPTION COMONENT IDENTIFIER 20128 022 01 RESISTOR 22 1 0805 R806 R807 R808 R809 R810 R811 R813 R820 20128 075 01 RESISTOR 750 196 0805 R158 R303 20129 100 01 RESISTOR 100 0805 R257 R258 R259 R260 20129 110 01 RESISTOR 1100 0805 196 R249 R250 R300 R400 20129 150 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 1 1500 0805 R138 R151 R815 20129 249 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 1 2490 0805 R137 R139 R149 R150 R155 20129 768 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 1 7680 0805 R111 R126 20130 150 01 RESISTOR MF 1 8W 1 1 50K SMT R131 R134 R140 R141 R144 R146 R159 R160 R161 R162 20130 162 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 196 1 62K 0805 R132 R153 R156 R157 R302 20130 210 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 196 2 10K 0805 R112 R127 R902 R905 20130 348 01 RESISTOR
118. 08 000 01 IC PS2506 4 U17 U19 27017 009 01 CONNECTOR RT AGL PC MNT 9P J5 27017 025 01 CONNECTOR RT AGL PC MNT 25P J9 27147 124 01 IC SCKT DIP 24 PIN DUAL SU12 27306 000 01 CONNECTOR RJ45 W MAGS J1 27406 014 01 CONNECTOR SOCKET STRIP 14 PIN JP1 27421 004 01 CONNECTOR HDR DBL RW 4P 2 X2 J8 J10 J13 27421 006 01 CONNECTOR HDR DBL RW 6P 2 X3 J14 27421 010 01 CONNECTOR HDR DBL RW 23 2X 5 J3 27421 016 01 CONNECTOR HDR STR 23 2X8 J6 NO STUFF 27451 005 01 CONNECTOR STR DBL ROW 26 PIN J11 27630 001 01 JUMPER PC MNT TEST POINT TP100 28031 000 01 HOLDER BATTERY LITH CELL BT1 HLDR 28041 000 01 CELL COIN BATTERY LITHIUM 3V BT1 28089 000 01 OSCILLATOR 33MHZ SG636PCE 4P x1 SMD 28090 000 01 IC TCXO DS32KHZ 36P BGA U13 28091 000 01 XTAL 25MHZ RXD MP35L SMD Y1 44099 100 01 FIRMWARE 8300 U4 28F 128 U4 20129 604 01 0805 6040 1 1 8W R48 R49 R51 R53 R55 R56 R58 R60 R62 R64 R68 R69 R76 R77 R80 R82 20238 000 01 1 RESISTOR NET 100K 8RESISTOR 2512 RN52 RN61 22210 000 01 1 DIODE MBR530 SOD123 CR10 23216 000 01 1 TRANSISTOR MMBT4400 SOT23 Q1 Q2 Q3 24646 000 01 1 IC 74ACT244 OCTAL TSSOP U18 24674 000 01 1 IC 10 100BT ETHERNET CONTROLLER U10 NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR 24761 000 01 1 IC LO POWER DC DC CONVERT U21 27374 000 01 1 HEADER 2MM 2 X 10 J4 NO STUFF 27375 00
119. 1 CAPACITOR X7R 0 1UF 10 0805 C111 C118 C119 C120 C121 C123 C124 C125 C126 C127 C128 C202 C203 C233 C300 C301 C302 C309 C400 C700 C802 C803 C805 C809 C916 C932 C933 C934 C935 C936 C937 C938 C939 C940 C941 C942 C943 C944 C945 C947 C948 C949 C950 C951 C952 C953 C954 C955 C956 C957 C958 C959 C960 C961 C962 C963 C964 C965 C967 C968 C969 C970 C971 C972 C973 C974 C975 C976 C977 C978 C979 C988 C996 C1003 C1004 PART OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL 5 BOARD DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DATA 6 17 COMONENT IDENTIFIER C1012 C1013 21140 000 01 CAPACITOR NPO 470PF 196 0805 C217 C218 C219 C220 21141 000 01 CAPACITOR NPO 1000PF 1 0805 C236 C237 C238 C239 C305 21142 000 01 CAPACITOR NPO 100PF 196 0805 C989 21143 000 01 CAPACITOR NPO 1500PF 1 0805 C221 C222 C240 C241 C242 C243 C987 C990 C993 21144 000 01 CAPACITOR 5 100V 47PF 1206 C101 C103 C105 C107 C108 C114 C136 21146 310 01 CAPACITOR 01uf 0805 10 C900 C901 C902 C903 C904 C905 C906 C907 C908 C909 C910 C911 C912 C913 C914 C915 21154 433 01 CAPACITOR 33uf 0805 20 C303 21171 105 01 CAPACITOR 1uf X7R 0805 C200 C201 C232 C701 C985 C986 C991 C992 C1011 C1014 21175 000 01 CAPACITOR 6800pF 1096 X7R 0805 C501 C503 C505 C507
120. 1 0 1uF 5V 74 74 SHT8 9 75 1 538MHZ IC807F E NU 68 gt 13 12 12 288MHZ o 9 gt SHT5 8 of WZ 000 67 40 MCLK SHT6 3D00 __67_ 40 gt SHTA 220HM n IC801 euros gt 8001 35 41 15 8 sage PLL1707 Note J801 is for diagnostic SHT6 SD02 36 42 MCLK C ree TaAGITOAD gt 555 C807B purposes jumpering J801 pins SHT6 lt SD03 37 64 EXTALA rede R820 MCLK B 1 64 5 12 CSEL MCK01 14 E800 3 4 R807 33 8688MHZ and 3 together causes IC800 tc SHT6 lt SD04 33 63 FSYNCA SHT6 gt SHT4 14 5004 5 65 _ 3 gt SHT5 re route AOUT DATA gt 5010 32 48 220HM 5 gt 500 32 48 gt 8 Esi 220HM DOUT1 DATA and 9011 31 47 OUT Sire 1 TARCTOAD 196 DOUT2 so as to come lt gt SD20 30 85 OUT SHTe 5020 ____30 85 OUT 252 18 directly AIN_DATA directly 5021 29 SCK00 Mig ii bypassing all DSP circuitry SHT6 lt gt 530 12 46 BCLK NA 7 SCKO1 C807C SHT6 3D90 1 46 IN BCLK SHT2 4 6 sR o m SHTe 10 65 29 5 6 R811 36 864MHZB gt 8032 gt 5032 99 4 gt SHT5 S 5033 100 23 AQUT DATA stra we 220HM SHIT 7 5034 25 57 AOUT BCLK 7AACTOAD 1 71 gt SHT3 AIN DATA 13 2 GHT SHT2
121. 10 0 196 3 od olal 7 14 SOEARTH pa MNT HOL E FRONT PANEL REAR SIDE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM TECHNICAL DATA 6 4 1 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL LIMITER 1 PRE EMPHASIZED FLAT LIMITER 1 PRE EMPHASIZED FLAT T PRE EMPH OUTPUT LIMITER 1 PRE EMPHASIZED FLAT H U TI N G lt FLAT M PRE EMPH 001 ROUTING LF SHELF LIMITER 1 PRE EMPHASIZED FLAT 4 FLAT ET OUT A ENHANCER T v A A A MULTIBAND i LIMITERS DELAY a v RGIA A LIMITER 2 PRE EMPHASIZED FLA gt AGC PT __ gt 4 LIMITING gt a PRE EMPH v A LIMITER 2 PRE EMPHASIZED FLAT ROUTING AGC PRE EMPH x PEUT FLAT TUAL gt OPTIMOD 6300 SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ROUTING CONCEP
122. 102 6 10 RSTAD N 196 RST R140 FILTER R107 1103 R108 i gu R142 1120 02112 enol 1 b 5 1 50 0 1pF 0 1uF 9 SHT9 4 Don NN e ca I 1200 1 00M 1 AGND 50V 50V E C103 21 4 0 47uF 1 3 18 DFS 1000PF 102 a 25V 9 VCOML DFS R109 ATPF 12 SHT9 CR103 IIL 5 36K 5 100 as TRANSZORB C133 777 SR0 0 196 gt ENS 11 AGND1 0112 SMODE2 m b dk 3 of am vere ANALOG INPUT 1 15 a TEL MCLK J103 idi m e 01024 TOK 1 25 AINR 14 IN_BCLK R115 L105 R116 0 1 3 SCLK SHT9 1 2 B 3 21 4 103 114 AGND 4 ian 1200pH 1 24 aR C136 5 C105 H PORA m Y 1000PF C104 _ 16723 124 5 100V 77 ee R153 6 Lev 13 IN 7 R150 LRCK SHT9 CR104 C134 R117 15V 15V 1 62K t TRANSZORB R161 5 36KAGND2 5 24 QM 28 uis 777 0 1 OPA2134UA p147 1 _ 0122 C125 C126 spata 115 AIN DATA 7 ADG442ABRZ R157 R146 363K dE Boy mV 27 20 TONM SHT9 4 2 R126 0 1 GNDR TEST 196 x 2 9 AGND2 j 150K 1 R148 81512 C115 C116 R155 E205 R123 d o 7 R145 secko 1500HM gt 4700PF 4700PF 8 8 2490HM 82 5K 2 3413 2 3 65K AGND2 2 1 5 50 5 50 1 2p 0 1 15 D D2 2 4
123. 106 70 05 106 70 05 105 8 440 350 04 106 10 440 350 106 aaoiRaso 04 106 70 AAOIRASO 106 63 _ AATIRAS 105 63 _ AAT RAS 105 63 _ AATIRAS1 105 89 AATIRAS1 105 2 2 02 104 2 2 D2 104 AA2IRAS2 02 102 2 2 02 102 101 101 101 _ 52 CAS 100 52 CAS po 10 52 CAS 100 52 CAS 100 68 68 68 68 RD RD RD RD 67 RD 67 RD 67 RD 67 RD WR WR WR WR 62 WE 62 WE 62 WF 62 WF 93 93 BR 93 93 71 BR 71 BR 71 BR 71 BR 7 64 BG gt BG 1 e BG gt 88 88 88 88 lt S8 CIK 1 1 1 SHT8 DSPENO N DSPENT N DSPEN2 N DSPEN3 N SHT8 5 SHT8 K SHT8 Sav lt SHTB IC501D NO STUFF IC502D NO STUFF IC503D NO STUFF IC504D NO STUFF 3 3 3 3 3 3 43 3V 33V 05 56367 150 00 DSP56367 150 Redi 33V 05 56367 150 R602 33V 05 56367 150 s 5 0 OHM sl 8 ES 0 OHM sess 0 OHM sess 0 OHM 3 3 1 3 V 496 3 3V 1 3 3V 1 de 45 52 de 129 O 0 1 129 0 0 1 129 OQ 1 129 1 9 9 9 SCK 139 9 9 9 SK 1 9 9 SOK 1 49 9 0 9 9 SOK gt 7 MISO 143 IT gt MISO 143 gt gt 2 0 713 TUM qna gt 7 MISO tA
124. 13 20 relationship to EQ 1 20 HF enhancer 3 8 High Frequency Enhancer 3 31 high frequency limiter 3 54 high pass filter 30Hz 3 7 Highpass Filter 3 31 hum 5 1 I AES EBU 2 7 connections 2 2 board replacing 4 4 troubleshooting 5 11 idle gain 3 36 input analog connecting 2 6 analog specifications 6 2 digital specifications 6 2 input level line up 1 18 input meters 1 19 input meters 3 2 input selector setup 2 21 input output board removing 4 3 inspection of package contents 2 1 installation procedure 2 1 Instrumental format 3 22 Internet cannot access 5 6 address 2 36 port 2 37 J J 17 and 6300 digital I O 1 7 deemphasis applied to digital audio input 6 43 defined 1 7 preemphasis applied to digital audio output 6 3 Jazz format 3 23 K knee control 3 46 L latency 3 10 LEDs gate 3 2 Less More index 3 45 Less More 3 33 level metering 1 19 setup 2 14 transmission 1 19 limiter attack 3 55 limiting look ahead 3 3 9 limiting 3 3 line voltage 2 2 linear phase crossover 3 38 line up tones system will not pass at 100 modulation 5 4 line up tones 1 19 Lo Pass control 3 31 location 1 9 lock driven equipment cannot lock to 6300 output 5 4 lockout immediate 2 33 programming local 2 33 unlockin
125. 18 PPP PCLADi8 86 J8 NIG ORA PCI_AD17 RN5 PCLADi7 87 PCI AD16 4 7K PCI_AD16 88 PCI_AD15 PCI_AD15 101 ADS 2 PCI_AD14 PCLADi4 102 371 PCI_AD13 PCLADi3 104 ABUS Ui PCI_AD12 PCLADi2 105 U2 PCI_AD11 11___106 V2 PCI_AD10 10 108 vi PCI ADS _ 109 ADS Wi _ 110 Y2 PCI_AD7 PCLAD7 112 6 6 113 PCLADS PCLADS _ 115 205 AA2 PCI AD4 PCLAD4 116 ADA LAB2 PCLADS PCLAD3 118 2 PCLAD2 119 102 PCLADi 120 ADI 402 PCLADO 121 F2 PCI 75 Ki PCI_CBE2 N 89 RI PCI 100 W2 PCLCBEON 111 5 PCI RESET N 62 DEVSEL N 95 SEEN PCI STOP N T 96 12 PCI_IRDY N 92 ROY PCI_TRDY N 1 93 FADE PCI FRAME N 1 91 RAME NZ PCI_PERR N T 97 P2 PCI_SERR N 98 ERR PCI_PARITY 99 L3 PCI REQO N 64 REQO PCI_GNTO N 63 ANTO KS PCI INTA N 61 PCLAD24 76 43 3V 122 123 59 R10 33 2 OHM PCI CLKOUT PCI 60 cikeciour 28 29 R11 33 2 OHM 1 6 15 14 12 11 10 7 Ga PCI CLKRETURN 31 141 140 139 138 135 134 CNFGDISN 133 132 R17 1 00K MD1 CFGDISN TPTDP TPTDM TPRDP TPRDM x1 MDC MDIO RXOE TXEN TXD3 MA15 TXD2 MA14 TXD1 MA13 55 TXDO MA12 MWRN MR
126. 2 35 i 32 HD6 35 n 2 32 HD6 35 32 HD5 36 yp 33 HD5 36 yp 33 HD5 36 33 HD5 36 33 HAG HD4 37 ie uS 22 HRD N 37 59 22 HRD N sug 37 ig ues 22 NHD4 37 0 22 HRD N 40 HRD 30 DSPENO N 40 HRD 736 DSPENT N 40 HRD 30 DSPEN2 N 40 HRD 30 DSPEN3 N H3 HCS SHT8 H3 HCS SHT8 H3 HCS SHT8 H3 HCS SHT8 HD2 41 24 HD2 24 HD2 41 24 HD2 24 H2 HOREQ 4 H2 HOREQ 4 H2 HOREQ 4 H2 HOREQ 4 HDi 42 23 HDi 42 i PRES 23 HDi 42 23 HDi 42 23 43 HACK 721 HWR N 43 71 HWR N ___43 HACK 21 HWR N 23 51 HWR N HO HWR 21 HUNRA pK SHT8 HO HWR 21 HWR N AK SHTS HO HWR 21 HURN pK SHT8 HO HWR 21 SHT8 SHT8 RESET SHT8 RESET SHT8 RESET SHT8 l O DSP BOARD DSP ESAI AND HOST INTERFACE 6 34
127. 2 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 B Feed the 8200ST either with tone at your system reference level 0VU or with typical program material at normal levels C Adjust the GAIN REDUCTION control for the desired amount of gain reduction If the STL uses preemphasis its input preemphasis network will probably introduce overshoots that will increase peak modulation without any in crease in average modulation We therefore strongly recommend that the STL transmitter s preemphasis be defeated freeing the STL from such potential overshoot and that the 464A be used to provide the necessary preemphasis We recommend 8 15 dB gain reduction for most formats If the STL transmitter s preemphasis cannot be defeated configure the 8200ST for flat output In this case average modulation levels of the STL may have to be reduced to accommodate the overshoots Quick Setup Quick Setup guides you through 6300 setup It is appropriate for users without spe cial or esoteric requirements Following this section you can find more detailed in formation regarding setup beyond the Quick Setup screens In most cases you will not need this extra information Quick Setup assumes that your 6300 will be driving flat channels because this is the most common scenario If you need it you can turn on pre emphasis after you com plete Quick Setup For the following adjustments use the appropriately labeled soft button to choose the parameter you wish to
128. 3 of the XLR type connector Connect the Low pin of the XLR type connector 3 or 2 depending on your organization s standards to ground take the HiGH output from the remaining pin No special precautions are required even though one side of the output is grounded e Use two conductor foil shielded cable Belden 8451 or equivalent e At the 6300 s output and at the output of other equipment in the system do not connect the cable s shield to the CHASSIS GROUND terminal pin 1 on the XLR type connector Instead connect the shield to the chassis ground at the in put destination Connect the red or white wire to the pin on the XLR type con nector 2 or 3 that is considered HiGH by the standards of your organization Connect the black wire to the pin on the XLR type connector 3 or 2 that is considered Low by the standards of your organization AES3 Digital Input and Output There is one AES3 and two AES3 outputs The program input and outputs are all equipped with sample rate converters and can operate at 32 44 1 48 88 2 and 96 kHz You can force the output sample rate to be genlocked to signal appearing at either the wordclock AES11id input or the audio input The output can also syn chronize to the 6300 s internal clock Per the AES3 standard each digital input or output line carries both the left and right stereo channels The connection is 1100 balanced The AES3 standard specifies a maximum cable length of 100 meters
129. 300 0 Es D N 2 o 2 D S4 CR11 000000 0000000 0 e y orban 2000 32150 000 E CR I ei ee e ee e ee e e ee e ee e ee ee e ee FRONT VIEW 1 1 2 oS 3 4 4 5 6 POLARIZING PIN P5 P5 CABLE MTB B We MT1O Cmm C6 E gu Cg ice H2 aw ENTRY MEW C gt a gt gt e JP202 e 5 Be one 2 oram 3 5 HS SBE EEE EF EE Ell 11 pes E z E vs EL ate coll c2 8 mini 2 E 1228 gt 29 1 CRI E 8225 5 orban uu 1 i a 22 2000 X T ome iun H Os REAR VIEW FRONT PANEL PARTS LOCATOR DIAGRAM TECHNICAL DATA 6 39 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL gt Bg Bg 5 gt SL
130. 300 software controls are set to their default settings Refer to page 4 7 B Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode see step 3 F C Connect a THD analyzer to the Left Analog Output XLR connector Set the THD analyzer s bandwidth to 22 kHz D Connect the oscillator to the Left Analog Input XLR connector E For each frequency used to measure THD adjust the output level of the oscil lator to make the OUTPUT meter the 6300 read 0 DB You will have to reduce the output level of the oscillator at higher fre quencies to compensate for the preemphasis boost in the 6300 Measure the at the frequency levels listed below Frequency THD N Typical THD N Maximum 50 Hz 0 0396 100 Hz 0 03 400 Hz 0 0396 1 kHz 0 03 2 5 kHz 0 03 5 kHz 0 0396 7 5 kHz 0 03 10 kHz 0 03 20 kHz 0 01596 0 03 4 1 0 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 6300 G Repeat the above measurements for the right channel Connect the oscillator to the right analog input and the distortion analyzer to the right analog out put H Disconnect the oscillator and THD analyzer from the 6300 6 Test Digital Sample Rate Converter Receiver A Verify 6300 software controls are set to their default settings Refer to page 4 7 Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode see step 3 F C Navigate to SETUP gt I O CALIB and Set the INPUT to DIGITAL D Connect the digital source generator to the AES3 DIGITAL IN XLR connector of the
131. 37 Display Board Front Panel LCD LEDs Buttons Parts Locator 6 38 and Rotary Encoder Drawing Contains Front of board Schematic 1 of 2 6 39 Rear of board 6 40 DSP Block Shows signal processing 6 41 Diagram Index circuit description 5 8 specification 6 2 8 Abbreviations 6 11 AC Line Cord Standard 2 2 82005 2 9 Advanced Modify 3 12 AES channel status bits 5 5 A AES EBU I O 2 7 A D converter AES11 sync 2 25 AES3 status bits 2 18 AGC B bass attack control 3 37 bass coupling control 3 35 B5 down expand 3 53 backing up presets 3 60 balance adjust 2 22 bass release control 3 37 bass threshold control 3 36 control list 3 32 crossover control 3 37 balanced defeating 3 33 inputs 2 6 defeating 3 21 output simulates transformer 2 6 drive control 3 33 band coupling 3 53 external AGC setup 2 9 bandwidth 2 13 20 gate threshold control 3 34 base board idle gain control 3 36 removing 4 2 master attack control 3 37 replacing 4 4 master release control 3 34 Basic Modify 3 10 meter 3 2 BASS CLIP control 3 38 ratio control 3 36 bass threshold 3 36 using 6300 as 3 17 battery window release control 3 36 replacing 6 6 window size control 3 36 AGC 3 7 AGC Matrix 3 37 allpass crossover 3 37 analog I O 1 7 analog input bit depth of internal processing 6 1 block diagram 6
132. 60 015 eene nennen 3 41 The 2 band Structure s Full and Advanced Setup Controls 3 41 Advanced 2 band Controls 3 45 Figure 3 2 Output level in dB y for a given input level in dB x at various settings of the KNEE and RATIO control 3 46 THE 5 BAND STR CT RE a inge teet de 3 47 Table 3 9 Multiband Controls 3 48 Putting the 5 band Structure on the Air 3 48 Customizing the 5 5 3 48 The 5 band Structure s Full and Advanced Setup 5 3 49 Table 3 10 MB Band Mix 5 aaa nennen enne nnn 3 49 Table 3 11 MB Attack Release Controls 3 51 Advanced 5 band Controls 3 55 3 56 3 12 3 57 USING THE 6300 PC REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWAR
133. 6300 E Set the frequency of the digital source generator to 400 Hz and its output level to 6 dB below full scale F Set the word length of the digital source generator to 24 bit In turn set the generator to emit 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz and 96 kHz sample rates Listen to the analog outputs of the 6300 and verify that the output sounds clean and glitch free regardless of the source sample rate G Leave the digital source generator connected to the 6300 7 Test Digital Sample Rate Converter Transmitter A Connect an AES3 analyzer like the Audio Precision System 2 to the 6300 s AES3 DIGITAL OUT 1 B Set the sample rate of the digital source generator to 48 kHz C On the 6300 navigate to SETUP gt CALIB gt DIGITAL CALIB gt DO1 OUT CALIB D Change the 6300 s Do1 RATE to 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz and 96 kHz and verify that the frequencies measured at the 6300 s AES3 output fol low the values in the chart below within given tolerances Sample Rate Tolerance PPM Tolerance Hz 32 0 kHz 1 60 Hz 44 1 kHz 4 41 Hz 48 0 kHz 2 40 Hz 88 2 kHz 8 82 Hz 96 0 kHz 100 PPM 4 80 Hz E Disconnect the digital source generator from the 6300 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4 1 1 8 Repeat step 7 for Digital Out 2 9 Optional tests A You can test each GPI Remote Interface input for functionality in the obvi ous way by programming a function for it and then verify
134. 8 R3 R4 R7 R8 R26 R27 R28 R29 R30 R32 6 14 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 PART Control Board DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER 20130 475 01 RESISTOR 4 75K 0805 R36 NO STUFF R205 R207 R209 R211 R213 R215 R217 20130 562 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 1 5 62K 0805 R74 20131 100 01 RESISTOR 10K 0805 R1 R2 R9 R33 R37 R38 R39 R72 20131 113 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 1 11 3K 0805 R87 20131 147 01 RESISTOR 1 8W 1 14 7K 0805 R18 R73 20132 100 01 RESISTOR 100K 0805 R40 R41 R42 R43 R44 R45 R50 R54 R57 R59 R65 R70 R78 R83 R85 20135 002 01 RESISTOR 0805 5 20 R63 R67 R75 20136 000 01 RESISTOR 300 Q 5 1 2W 2010 R81 20233 472 01 RESISTOR NETWORK 4 7K CTS745C 8R BUS RN1 RN2 RN3 RN4 20237 472 01 RESISTOR NETWORK 8R ISO 5 RN5 21136 010 01 CAPACITOR SURFACE MOUNT 1206 10PF 5 C5 21139 000 01 CAPACITOR X7R 0 1UF 10 0805 C6 C7 C8 C9 C19 C20 C21 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C39 C43 C45 C177 C179 C182 C184 C186 C187 C188 C200 21141 000 01 CAPACITOR NPO 1000PF 196 0805 C11 21142 000 01 CAPACITOR NPO 100PF 1 0805 C22 C34 C40 C46 C47 C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C58 C59 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 C68 C69 C70 C71 C72 21146 310 01
135. 9 C27 AD2 NC PIOSODCD2 AF3 PIO29 DSR2 N 1 10 NC 2029 0582 AES PIOZSIDSREN 1 49 11 45 10 ADT NC PIO28 CTS2 N PIO2BCTSZN i 2025 CTS2 RING NC RINT RINGEN 120 13 Blow 8 y DCDT N 029 NC D V4 14 2 G 2825 0001 DSRIN 2 2 NC DSR eo 15 630 13 V3 CISIN Ld 3 TA E 483 NC S EIS TN lt 16 4 4 __ NC 5 17 5 E23 4019 851 5 5 sour 5 2 2 52 ssi_cik A019 551 gt SHT2 18 6 RISIN 18 1 NC 19 7 2 19 5 24 lt NC CF DRAM cFG2 M24 CF DRAMNICFG2 ED KEY 20 8 21 20 Ce NC Y24 PITOUT2ICFGS 4 75 2mm 2x10 8 7 6 cs PITOUTZICFG3 A7 CLKTIMER CLKTEST 122 Pio 4i i riour E SN CS INC CLKTIMER CLKTEST CLKTIMERICLKTEST 9 3 16 NO STUFF MT R20UT NC 23 22 DSRI N Ba 1 DBS M T 16 R2N 7 DCDI N R4OUT NC R29 CR6 A3 Ine m 475 T 9 HSM160J 048 4 75 4 mH 5 4 cR7 912 AET Inc AF17_STOP TX MAX208ECAG ADIT STOPITX 17 T 777 H Hsmeos 1 ACIT NC CMDACK 025 ACIE 4 ORBAN ACIS JTAG TDO 1 9 USE ONLY 24 PIN SOCKET AG NC JA TR AE22 JTAG TRST N 2b 3 9uH AE16 N a TV24 11
136. 96 5 HDR 2x1 lt 2 UNSHRD V v 1 0 DSP BOARD 8 BIT I O CONTROL INTERFACE 6 36 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 5V to 43 8V 33V 43V JTAG PORT 3 3V IC807G R816 28817 818 IC800 74401040 100 0 100 0K 100 0K 0 n J800 VCCINT SH VCCINT 1 2 3 3 4 3 vecio 5 6 8 vccio 7 8 H vecio 10 4 4 51 vecio 2 66 vecio wA HDR 5X2 NU 82 vecio 5V UNSHRD 3 3 14 TDI IC804A amp MS gt C804 z 73 2 76 AIN MCLK py lt gt 2 5 11 10 16 9344MHZ 79 CKS01 L801 1800 D Q gt SHT5 ES SHT3 20V 220HM gt maperw SHT3 3 3 88 93 DARST N 3 7AACTOAD 1 J801 t 89 OE 94 RSTDAN lt HZ0805G102R 10 HZ0805G102R 10 GCLRN 94 RSTDAN _ v m 36 864MHZ 90 OE2 GCLK2 96 ADRSUN C802 C805 d R800 97 RSTAD N gt SHT 499K gt DSPRSTN 6 1 1 1 gt START 8 52 IROB N SIART 5 22 IRQB N gt 0
137. 9c U24C SHT2 18 24 R6 5 D P REMOTE IM sur 18 25 pul 00 8 SHT2 ENCODER 14 2 C68 c69 C70 cn 604 OHM 2 SAHCMA 01 gt SHTI FP_ROW_D N 10 MT 1 R77 EH 02 BKLITE_ON LED N 9 4 D3 5 87 8 C72 2 504 OHM PS2506 4 D4 Q4 15 R79 2 00K 1N4148W 7 100 U24D D5 05115 MMBT4400 H 777 UD 10 9 8 ps 96 18 T 5 F t 07 a7 AS oH TAHCTAA 02 3 R82 8 WM MMBT4400 2 2 CR10 1 45V L4 10uH MBR0530 604 OHM PS2506 4 100K TALLY 2 CRZ 12 ANA dk 84 200K HDR 13X2 U21 TPS61041 En swLl R85 10 OHM 1N4148W 03 8 s 100PF L MMBT4400 OUTLINE j n Sura MISC OUT N SOT 23 ue 4 R89 084 R88 200 CONTROL BOARD 1 0UF 10 TALLY 4 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL U10B DP83816AVNG 2 RESERVED 127 2 Ine RESERVED 50 _ nc RESERVED
138. ASSCODES If the front panel is already password protected you can only access this screen by entering a passcode with Access privileges B Turn the knob until you see the passcode you want to delete C Press the NExT button The Confirm Delete screen appears D Press the YES soft button to delete the passcode Press the NO or ESCAPE buttons to abort deleting the passcode To Lock the Front Panel Immediately After you have adjusted the processor to maximize security you will often want to lock it immediately without waiting for the timeout To do so A Press the SETUP button B Press the Lock Now soft button To Program local lockout A Navigate to SETUP SECURITY If the front panel is already password protected you can only access this screen by entering a passcode with ALL ACCESS privileges B Hold down the AuTOLOCK soft button and turn the knob to set the desired lockout time if any You can program the lockout delay time in hours minutes from 15 min utes to 8 hours or Orr This is the time delay between the last access to a local front panel control and when the front panel automatically locks it self out requiring entering a passcode to obtain front panel control of the 6300 Autolock can only be turned on if at least one passcode exists with ALL ACCESS privileges because an ALL ACCESS passcode is required to fully unlock the panel or to turn off the Autolock function C Press the ESCAPE butt
139. B GEN PURPOSE preset ex cept that the 6300 s CBS Loudness Controller is activated Note that this can cause audible pumping on program material with grossly excessive midrange energy or highly sibilant material We suggest using a TV 5B preset if you routinely broadcast such material because the 5B structure can automatically re equalize such material to correct the program s spectral balance while simultaneously controlling loudness 3 26 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 These presets defeat the AGC and do all gain riding with the 2 band compressor which is set for reverse exponential release This release characteristic does not sig nificantly increase the density of material whose level is well controlled while still performing fast correction of levels that are too low TV 5B GEN PUR W NR TV 5 band General Purpose with Noise Reduction provides effective dynamic range control and automatic re equalization of most dramatic material It applies single ended noise reduction to the material which will reduce unwanted noise like hiss hum or stage rumble However it will also reduce ambi ence If the program material is carefully produced as are most contemporary fea ture film soundtracks you may wish to use TV 5B GEN PURPOSE which does not ap ply noise reduction or if the material is so well produced that it would not benefit from automatic re equalization use TV 2B GEN PURPOSE TV 5B GEN PURPOSE TV 5 band General Purpose witho
140. B Press the SET DATE button a Set today s date using the days month and year buttons b Press the ENTER DATE button C Press the DAYLIGHT TIME button a Using the Daylight Saving DT MONTH and DT WEEK buttons set the month and week when Daylight Saving Time Summer Time begins or Orr b Using the Standard Time ST and ST WEEK buttons set the month and week when Daylight Saving Time Summer Time ends Note that setting DT DT WEEK ST or ST WEEK to OFF will defeat Daylight Time functionality C Press the Escape key to back out of the daylight saving screen D Optional Press the STATION ID button to specify your station s identifier call sign or call letters a Use the knob to select characters Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor b When you are finished press SAVE Navigate to Setup Next Automation If the AUTOMATION button reads DISABLED hold it down and turn the knob to en able automation INSTALLATION 2 29 2 3 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 This button allows you to easily enable or disable all automation events without having to edit individual automation events 3 To add an automation event A Push the ADD EVENT button B Choose whether you wish to program an event that occurs only once or an event that follows a daily or weekly schedule C For events that occur only once a Use the Prev and Next buttons to move the cursor
141. B below full scale See the notes in step 9 D on page 2 25 L Navigate to SETUP IO CALIB DIGITAL CALIB DO2 CALIB and repeat steps A through K for Digital Output 2 11 Set the 6300 s response to AES3 status bits See step B on page 2 19 12 Choose whether the 6300 digital output will emit status bits depending on whether the 6300 is in stereo or dual mono modes See step C on page 2 19 13 Choose whether the 6300 s will pass or block AES3 user bits See step 22 on page 2 19 14 End Analog and Digital I O setup If you are using a external AGC and you temporarily set the Exr AGC to NO in step 2 on page 2 21 set the to YES 15 Select a processing preset See step 18 C on page 2 17 16 Program Silence Sense optional You can program the 6300 to switch automatically from its digital input to its analog inputs if the INPUT SOURCE is set to DIGITAL and the signal at the digital input falls silent There are two silence detectors one for the analog input and one for the digital input The silence sense parameters apply to both simultaneously Both detectors are available to drive the 6300 s tally outputs but only the 2 28 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 digital input silence detector is used for automatic input switching See step 17 below Silence sense will be activated if either channel falls silent thus also pro tecting against loss of one stereo channel faults
142. BCLK 5 R406 z fv pele 777 FERRITE E406 51 6 23 10 0K SHT9 DOUT2 6 SDATA 0 23 vD 1 1 5V YZ 5V 3 3V 7 22 7 22 4 7 test 4 14 S aci Note ALL THESE 4 C401 8 21 MCKOUT2 COMPONENTS ARE V 2 6 8 DGND 061 21 TEST s STUFFED ONLY ON 5 25 R404 THE 6300 THEYARE 9 8 74ACT32 7 9 20 lt 7 gt SRCRST N O ger ALL NO STUFFS ON V BYPASS TOMLIN V SHT8 E404 49 9K 1 9300 74 10 19 9 test int 9 DOZINT __ 4 i S SMODE IN 0 SMODE OUT 0 SETS ICA11C 18 9 11 SMODE IN 1 SMODE OUT 1 18 TEST TEST 11 10 10 5 12 17 4 12 ILRCK test 17 SMODE IN 2 WLNGTH OUT 0 2 13 16 4 16 gt SRCRSTN 13 RESET wiNGTH our 1 16 ISCLK TEST E a MM DEM 14 15 R405 14 IN MUTE our p 198 49 9K 1 SPARES E i ME E407 AD1895AYRS i GRAOS CZA 11 E409 E 1 405 T B E413 C409G gt 15 vec 74 2 5 5 AACTOA4D 14 20E NA 10 30E 1 74ACTO4D OE ICA11D f rd 11 SHT4 2A x EAM SYNCINLRCK 9 8 13 SHT4 gt SYNCINERCK 3 SHT4 12
143. C action and then fine tune the compression with the 5 band structure s con trols AGC GATE AGC Gate Threshold control determines the lowest input level that will be recognized as program by OPTIMOD 6300 lower levels are considered to be noise or background sounds and cause the AGC or multiband compressor to gate effectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing In sound for picture the setting of the gate threshold controls are quite critical if you want the processing to be undetectable to the audience If this control is set too low then the 6300 will pump up quiet sounds such as ambience and underscoring to unnaturally high levels There are two independent silence gating circuits in the 6300 The first affects the AGC and the second affects the multiband compressor Each has its own thresh old control OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 35 AGC Idle Gain on page 3 36 explains how the AGC gate s no signal gain is deter mined The multiband silence gate causes the gain reduction in bands 2 and 3 of the multi band compressor to move quickly to the average gain reduction occurring in those bands when the gate first turns on This prevents obvious midrange coloration un der gated conditions because bands 2 and 3 have the same gain The multiband gate also independently freezes the gain of the two highest fre quency bands forcing the gain of the highest frequency band to be identical to its lower neighbor and independe
144. CD into your computer s CD drive 2 44 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 The installer should start up and ask you if you wish to install the PC Remote appli cation on your computer If it fails to do so navigate to Start Run on your com puter and type X setup where X is the drive letter of your CD drive Follow the prompts on your screen to install the PC Remote software automatically on your computer e You might have obtained the automatic installer application from some other source than Orban s CD like Orban s ftp site or another computer on your net work If so just run the application and follow the on screen instructions e This program installs the necessary files and adds an Orban Optimod 6300 folder to your computer s Start Menu This folder contains shortcuts to the PC Remote application and to the documentation If you accepted the option dur ing installation there is also a shortcut to the PC Remote application on your desktop You have now installed all files necessary to use the PC Remote software If you are using a direct serial or a modem connection the next step is to install and configure the Windows communications services that allow your computer to communicate with your 6300 Setting Up Serial Communications on page 2 47 provides details Setting Up Ethernet LAN and VPN Connections If you are using an Ethernet connection and your computer can successfully connect to the Internet through its Ethern
145. CSTS DA 2055 GPATS 36 148 188 13 ISA 19 SHT 5 RAD 1006 PIO2S GPIOCS16 ASt POA MGPIRGTI gt GPA18 EN 282 4 ISA A18 PIO13 GPIRQ10 BOD TEPIRGD GP_RESET a3 2s 282 16 R41 100K PIOZ3 GPIRQO REP piosse ka 1153 GP_AEN 82 244 283 17 AEN n RN2 PIO22 GPIRQ1 AF6 PIOZIGPIRQZ 20 245 2805 19 18 17 sv CONTROL BOARD 1 PIO21 GPIRQ2 e 1115 GPA16 29 200 285 20 15 A16 R42 100K PIO15 GPIRQB She 1116 GP MEMRD N 27 045 288 22 MEMRD N 15 GPIRQ8 22 15 MEMRDN 3 PIO12 GPDACKO Afs DREO GP MEMWR N 26 247 287 23 MEMWR N GENERAL PURPOSE BUS i NIE PIO8 GPDRQ0 ATS DREQO _______ p 5 DREQO 24 DIR 10E 55 ADDRESS DECODER 33v _ 28 299 20 mud 1 DSP AND I O INTERFACE elelelele NO TOON 10 2 6 24 TECHNICAL DATA MT48LC16 0015 0014 0013 0012 0011 0010
146. DN MCSN EESEL MAS MA4 EECLK MAS EEDI MA2 LED100N MA1 LED10N MAO LEDACTN TECHNICAL DATA 6 25 43 3V R21 0 OHM 54 R19 499 OHM EN ETHERNET C5 c n 0 1UF R20 1 49 9 OHM 53 TXDATA TXCT 2 3 46 DS R22 4 49 9 OHM 5 ee 5 cr C7 01 0 1UF 499 45 RXDATA l 6 52 7 NC 3V R25 301 OHM 16 9 YELLEDA T YELLEDC 12 GRNLEDA R24 301 OHM CAREERS v1 8 GND 25MHZ GND RJ45 MagJack 1 40138 cs c4 18PF 18PF 5 4 MDIO R18 2 147K 131 7 130 129 128 3 2 1 144 LED100LINK 143 142 LEDACTIVITY CONTROL BOARD ETHERNET 6 26 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300
147. E ennt 3 57 set up a new lt 3 58 To initiate communication 3 58 To modify a control 56 3 59 To recall a preset i iau d e E E e e Dated 3 59 To save a user preset you have created 3 60 To back up User Presets system files and automation files onto your computer s hara QTIVE 3 60 To restore archived presets system files and automation files 3 61 To modify INPUT OUTPUT and SYSTEM 5 1 3 62 To modify AUTOMATION 3 62 To group multiple 63005 3 62 Navigation Using the Keyboard sss seinen nns 3 63 To Quit the Program nose ete sade t aptid ra 3 63 About Aliases created by Optimod 6300 PC Remote Software 3 63 Multiple Installation
148. EASE to achieve the de sired compression density If you are using the 5 band structure you can use the DELTA RELEASE con trols to fine tune the release time of each band independently The release characteristic is always automatic i e multiple time con stant and the RELEASE control simply scales this process This combined with multiband operation makes the compression remarkably resistant to the usual compressor pumping and squashing H Adjust the ATTACK TIME controls on the individual compressors to trade off overshoot control against transient punch Adjust the RATIO and KNEE controls in each band to taste The RATIO control sets the compression ratio at the threshold of compres sion To achieve a classic soft knee characteristic set the RATIO to 1 1 and adjust the softness of the knee with the KNEE control 3 68 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 The control s setting is the gain reduction in dB at which the com pression ratio reaches 1 See page 3 45 for a description of the RATIO KNEE and BREAKPOINT controls J After you adjust the RATIO and KNEE controls adjust the THRESHOLD controls in the individual bands to achieve the desired amount of gain reduction The KNEE control automatically and invisibly changes a given band s in ternal compression threshold to keep the compressor s output level con stant whenever the drive level is high enough to move the gain reduc tion into the o 1 range T
149. EXT button to make your desired preset active This step selects the processing to complement various program formats There are presets for radio style and video style applications After this step you can always select a different processing preset pro gram the 6300 to automatically change presets on a time date schedule use a GPI input to trigger preset changes modify presets to customize your sound and store these presets as User Presets Preset names are just suggestions Feel free to audition different presets and to choose those whose sound you prefer You can easily modify a preset later with the 6300 s one knob LEss MORE feature Refer to Section 3 Congratulations You are now on the air with your initial sound Feel free to read the material in Section 3 of this manual which describes the various presets and how you can customize them to achieve your desired signature sound 20 Complete Station ID optional The Station ID is an optional setting that you can provide to name a given 6300 The name can be up to eight characters long It is used to identify your 6300 to Orban s 6300 PC Remote application and appears on the Main Screen when PC Remote is controlling the 6300 A Navigate to SETUP gt NEXT gt TIME DATE AND ID gt STATION ID B Use the knob to set the each character in the ID Use the NEXT and PREV but tons to control the cursor position C When finished entering your name press the SAVE button
150. Features Signal Flow The signal flows through the 6300 through the following blocks see page 6 41 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 7 e Input Conditioning including sample rate conversion defeatable highpass fil tering and defeatable phase rotation e Stereo Enhancement e 2 band Gated AGC with target zone window gating and silence gating e Equalization including high frequency enhancement e Multiband Compression in either two or five bands depending on the proc essing structure e Look Ahead Limiting A sample rate converter converts the sample rate at the digital input to the 63005 internal 48 kHz rate This 48 kHz rate accommodates a 20 kHz audio bandwidth with a comfortably wide 4 kHz transition band for the anti aliasing filter We are aware of no bias controlled double blind studies that have ever demonstrated that sample rates higher than 48 kHz are audibly superior to 48 kHz or even that there is any audible difference at all Moreover the noise and distortion produced by a given digital filter at 48 kHz is about 6 dB lower than the N amp D produced by a filter having the same frequency response but operating at 96 kHz The 6300 uses many digital filters both in its equalizer section and for the crossovers in the multiband compres sor Hence we believe that 48 kHz is the ideal rate for the 6300 s audio processing A sweepable 18 dB octave highpass filter and a defeatable phase rotator complete the input condi
151. GC slowly moves to wards the idle gain The idle gain is primarily determined by the AGC DRIVE setting a setting of 10 dB will ordinarily produce an idle gain of 10 dB i e 10 dB of gain reduction How ever sometimes you may not want the idle gain to be the same as the AGC DRIVE setting The AGC IDLE GAIN control allows you to add or subtract gain from the idle gain setting determined by the AGC DRIVE setting You might want to do this if you make a custom preset that otherwise causes the gain to increase or decrease unnaturally when the AGC is gated For example to make the idle gain track the setting of the AGC DRIVE control set the AGC IDLE GAIN OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 37 control to zero To make the idle gain 2 dB lower than the setting of the AGC DRIVE control set the AGC IDLE GAIN control to 2 AGC Bass Attack sets the attack time of the AGC bass compressor below 200 2 AGC Master Attack sets the attack time of the AGC master compressor above 200Hz AGC Bass Release sets the release time of the AGC bass compressor AGC Matrix allows you to operate the AGC in left right mode or in sum difference mode Usually you will operate in left right mode However sum difference mode can give a type of stereo enhancement that is different from the enhancement modes offered in the 6300 s built in stereo enhancer This will only work if you allow the two channels of the AGC to have different gains
152. ICSDO IC704A RD5 PSP5 RCS SDO CI 3DO gt SHTA 5 rm m RD6 PSPG RCG TXCK 2 542 3 RD7 PSP7 RC7IRXIDT 2 REORD FIT 7 SHT2 5 lt 7AACT32 NZ RE2 CS ___________ 2706 iB RAO INGAINCS N 4 36 lt 5 gt gt BU 5 RAI 37 AESOUTICS SHTS 3 67048 IC704C DOUTSRCSN 6 38 AESOUT2CS 9 DINT SHT5 9UTSRCSN 6 RB2 SHT5 SHT4 7 39 AESINCS N 6 8 rol a RATOCKI 31 sYNCCS N gt SHT4 5 10 SINT E702 RAS SS RB4 41 SYNCCS N gt SHTA m SHT4 RBS 42 6707 R706 SHT9 gt 12 288MHZ_14 OSC1 CLKIN 43 708 456192 0 RB7 E709 lt gt 49 9K 1 OSC2 CLKOUT 5 10 0K 13 DO2INT 196 2 90 SHT5 0 2222 74ACT32 R707 5V lt 2 e 3 49 9K 1 NA l R702 1 00K 1 IC409F CR700 N IO_RESET N 12 13 ISA RESET vL 5082 2800 74ACTO4D 701 77 IC701 74 541 ISA IORD N 2 18 HRD N S ISALIORD N 2 18 HRD N ISA IOWRN 3 P 9 Q1 17 AwWRN SHT6 SAJOWRN 3 5 02 17 HWR N gt ISA_A0 4 16 HA0 gt A0 4 03 16 HAO _ ISAAT 5 15 gt 15 gt sure 2 6 14 HA2 SAA 6 05 4 5 sure DACK1 N 18 ISA ORD N 8 p 12 IORD N gt JORDN 8 12 JORD N gt R704 g 27 11 100 0K Q J700 1 DREQ1 R705 79 2 100 0K fT E 9 82 1
153. IGITAL 1C410A NE Nc MMODE 2 28 081 1 28 PICSCK _ sig OUTPUT 1 TX 1 ic4t08 3 4 lt MCLK C 2 27 AESOUTICS N 2 27 5 1400 3400 P 2 1 NC SHT8 gt AESOUTICS N 2 aptcpin 22 PICSDO lt gt MALE 5 R400 T400 2 3 MMODE 26 3 AD2 txp 26 1 5 i 74ACTO4D 1100 1 3 FERRITE SHT9 POUTI DATA 4 spar 25 4 RXP 25 4151168 7 ICA10C E SC937 02 9 gt POUT BCLK 5 LRCLK_o 24 5_ His 24 Y 8 EM 77 FERRITE 3 4 iy POUTI FOLK 6 Roi spata 23 NO yp 23 74ACT32 3 33 F 74ACT04D VDD IO VDD CORE m TEST DGND LL s c400 8 penp 21 8 TEST 21___MCKOUT1 V 50 400 1C406 R401 g 74HCT374PW A v 9 Bypass 204 gt SRCRSTN 9 20 SHT8 E401 49 9K 1 00 3 po o ao 2 10 IN SMODE OUT 20 TEST INT DONT o o 1 4 015 5 8 SHT8 056 02 9 11 sMoDE IN 1 SMODE OUT 1 8 1 TEST test 18 04 13 12 7 5 MCKOUTi 05 14 24 04 45 gt 12 17 12 17 Ds 1405 5 i SMODE IN 2 WLNGTH OUT 0 4 ILRCK test 17 Dr 18 py 19 3 pi SRCRST N 13 16 13 16 2 7 231 SHT8 gt SRCRST N 13 RESET WLNGTH O
154. INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Click Yes 8300 PC 4 Use this connection as the current entry for this 8300 alias Edit your new Direct xl Connection properties tens NUES a Click Settings Password Leave password blank to be prompted upon connect Local Folder CAProgram Files Orban Optimod 830038300 Comment Ethernet Connection Serial Connection IP Address 127 0 0 1 Connection to 8300 Port Number 5201 Settings 0 the General tab Connection to 8300 General Options Security Networking Sharing c Select the device you set up in step i on Select a device page 2 49 Communications cable between two computers 1 This will usually be Canfigue Communications cable between two computers COM 1 d Click Configure Show icon in taskbar when connected OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL e Set Maximum 115200 speed bps to f Check Enable hardware flow con trol g Make sure that all other boxes are not checked h Click OK i Select the Networking tab j Make sure that PPP Windows 95 98 NT 4 2000 Internet appears in the Type of dial up server am calling field k Make sure that Internet Protocol TCP IP is checked You may leave File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks and Client for Microsoft
155. INT GPCSA 1 ROMCS1 N GPCS1 N 38 c MRIN GPCSSN 20 TMRINO GPCS5 1 PITGATEZIGPCSS N 55 PIOZ GPRDY SHT 3p FLASHSTATUS Plog gPDRO2 PIOZIGPRDY 2 em SIN2 5 pio10 PDACK2 PIOS GPAEN x SOUTZ 4 PIOZT GPCSO N gls ole sis gig SHT 5 51 pio27 GPcso Et _PIO27 GPCSO N 8 amp o 2 3 5 8 3 RTS2 N TMROUT1 GPCS6 N_AC23 Im SHT 5 50 119 IMROUTUSPCSE N 23 TMROUTI GPCSG 5 PIOZB CTSZ N IMROUTOIGPCST N AD23 tyROUTO GPCS7 EEgg8888 ISHE AD10 Ue 48 1 11 PIOSIGPDACKSN AES PIOSIGPOROS _ 706457 100 0 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 DSPENZN 47 1112 PIOS GPDACKS 9959522525 DSPENT N pa DSPENO N pe PIOZ7 GPCSO N GPD15 ee MHZ 87 Gone MISC OUT N HE SHT 5 j PIO26 GPMEMCS 167 2 GPD14 DisPLAY 57 DISPLAY gt 5 PIO2SIGPIOCST6 N fuus Bid ool ISA D O 7 SHT 5 89 ERN Lis ENCODERN SHT 5 1 A 0 9 lt 4 6612 5 TAALVC164245 SHT 5 GCLRn ENCODERN 48 ENCODER N sur 5 lt p GPD11 C13 GPD10 GPD7 47 46 9l 39 GPD10 615 GPD9 GPD6 46 1 1 4 88 FP_COL_A N 54 Fp COL RN 7 SHT 5 ISA A2 38 GPD9 12 CEDE 102 1B2 SHT 5 081 608 peor AN gt SHT 5 ISA A1 GPD8 C15 GPD7 GPD4 _ 43 143 153 FP ROW AN 777 Fp ROW B N gt SHT 5 AR e GPD7 510 GPD6 GPD3 4i 144 184
156. Internet time server to set your Optimod s SvNc PERIOD to 24 b Set Server to the desired timeserver C Click the Update Now button to synchronize your computer s clock to the selected timeserver If this is successful this means that you can connect to the selected timeserver over your network e The INTERNET TIME tab is not available in Windows 2000 If you are running Optimod PC Remote on Windows 2000 you must enter the timeserver from your Optimod s front panel as an IP address step 4 on page 2 40 e f the timeserver you selected in Windows is a named address instead of an IP address your Optimod will resolve it correctly but the IP address that ap pears in your Optimod s display will be 0 0 0 0 e To use PC Remote to turn off your Optimod s automatic synchronization uncheck Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server on your PC Then click the Update Now button on PC Remote E Navigate to Optimod PC Remote s SETUP UTILITY tab and click the SET 6300 CLOCK button e f you are running Windows XP PC Remote will download your computer s currently specified timeserver into your Optimod e PC Remote will adjust your Optimod s OFFSET setting to correspond to your computer s time zone setting e PC Remote will synchronize your Optimod s clock with your computer s clock 2 42 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 It is wise to disconnect from PC Remote and then to press the Now but ton on y
157. KT 5X2 LOPRO J1 27369 000 01 CONNECTOR 100 SCKT 8X2 LOPRO J2 J3 J4 25172 000 01 1 LED ARRAY ALL YELLOW CR8 CRY OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL Display Board Back PART 42007 100 DESCRIPTION FLAT CABLE 26P 10 TECHNICAL DATA 6 1 9 COMPONENT IDENTIFIER JP203 15065 355 01 LED MNT 1 POS 0 355 FOR CR1 USE2 20122 110 01 RESISTOR TF 1 8W 196 110 ohm R17 R18 R19 R20 R21 R22 R23 R24 OHM 20124 100 01 RESISTOR TF 1 8W 196 1206 10K R29 R30 20125 100 01 RESISTOR TF 1 8W 1 100K R25 R26 R27 R28 20226 000 01 RESISTOR NETWORK DIL 2 100 RP1 RP2 21131 410 01 CAPACITOR SURFACE MOUNT 1206 50V 20 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 21144 000 01 CAPACITOR 5 100V 47PF 1206 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 NO STUFF 21313 568 01_ CAPACITOR TANT 6 8UF 25V 10 C1 24635 000 01 IC 74HCT374 IC3 24636 000 01 IC 74ACT574 IC1 IC2 24900 000 01 IC HEX INVERTER SURFACE MOUNT IC7 24905 000 01 IC CMOS OCTAL D REG 3 ST IC4 IC5 IC6 IC9 24967 000 01 IC 74ACT245DW IC8 25112 001 01 LED RED GREEN BI COLOR POLAR 1 26085 000 01 SWITCH ROT VERTICAL MOUNT 2 12 BIT 27366 000 01 CONNECTOR 100 POSTS 5X2 MLE P1 27367 000 01 CONNECTOR 100 POSTS 8X2 P2 P3 P4 27404 000 01 CONNECTOR PLUG POLAR WHITE P5 6 NYL 27420 002 01 CONNECTOR 2 PIN RIGHT A
158. KT HCKR HCKT HCKR HCKT E39 HCKR Hckr 6 50 ESR 50 eo ESRI 50 59 7 ESRI 50 eo ESR 50 OUT FCLK SHT9 5002 48 1 FST 1 753 SHT9 pio 77487 SCKR 1 FST 1 753 SHT9 SD20 48 SCKR 1 FST_1 753 SD30 48 1 FST 1 53 OUT BCLK SHT9 SHT9 lt se 005 1 9000 1 1 135 SEXTA 55 3005 15001 Hiss sp1 SHTS EXTALA se 3005 1 9000 1 SCKT1 13g 5879 lt gt 48 5005 15000 1 SCKT 1 35 ME SHT9 E 55 EXTAL 5004 1311 438 es 55 5004 1501 4 SD1 55 EXTAL 6004 4 133 tay EXTAL 5004 1 SDM 1 58 gt SHT9 18V 33y 25 PINITINMI 32 agy E 33V 25 PINITINMI 32 8V 3 31 25 PINITINMI 19 4 8V issu 25 PINIT NMI 134 n 45 VCCP MODB IRQB 38 D ti 12 VCCP 136 toss 2 VCCP MODB IRQB 136 1 VCCP MODB RQB 36 46 PCAP MODC RQC 26 PCAP MODC RQC 135 l 46 PCAP MODC RQC 322 56 PCAP MODC RQC 135 MODD IRQD GNDP MODD IRQD GNDP MODD IROD GNDP MODD IROD 6800PF 6800PF 6800PF 6800PF C502 SEA C504 7 C506 C508 V 0474657 0 47uF 0 NZ 0 47 l 4 IRGEEN lt SHT9 cana 0 2 bays 7 25018 25028 IC503B IC504B DSP56367 150 DSP56367 150 DSP56367 150 DSP56367 150 HD7 34 31 HA HD7 34 31 HD7 34 31 HA HD7 34 31 35 6 3
159. Modems are installed and it is attached to the correct port then click Properties for that modem 9 Make sure the port speed is set at 115200 h Click OK C Create a new Windows XP modem connection a Launch 6300 PC Remote b Choose Connect New 6300 The Connection Proper ties window opens Give your 6300 a name e g KABC by entering this name in the 6300 Alias field 9 you wish to have 6300 PC Remote remember the password for this Optimod enter the pass word in the Password field You must enter a valid password to connect This means that at least one 6300 passcode must have been assigned via the 6300 s front panel See To Create a Passcode on page 2 32 Tools Connect Help New 8300 e Disconnect J Connection Properties General Settings 8300 Alias 8300 Password Leave password blank to prompted upon ct Local Folder FAPrearam Files Orban Optimod 8300 8300 1 Comment Ethemet Connection Serial Connection IPAddess 127 0 0 1 Connection to 8300 Port Number 5201 Settings Add Cancel OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL e Click Add The Windows New Connection Wizard starts up f Select Serial Connection 9 Click the Add button h Select Dial up to private network i Click Next j Enter the phone number of the modem connected to the 6300 you are sett
160. N CLASSICAL 2B AGC CLASSICAL 5 BAND CLASSICAL 5B AGC COUNTRY LIGHT COUNTRY MEDIUM CRISP DANCE ENERGY EDGE FOLK TRADITIONAL GOLD GREGG GREGG OPEN IMPACT INSTRUMENTAL JAZZ LOUD SLAM LOUD BIG LOUD FAT LOUD HOT LOUD HOT BASS LOUD PUNCHY NEWS TALK ROCK DENSE ROCK LIGHT ROCK MEDIUM ROCK MEDIUM LOW BASS ROCK MEDIUM MID BASS ROCK OPEN ROCK SOFT SMOOTH JAZZ SPORTS URBAN HEAVY URBAN LIGHT WMA MUSIC WMA NEWS TALK Source Preset CLASSICAL 2 BAND CLASSICAL 2B SFTKN CLASSICAL 2B AGC CLASSICAL 5 BAND CLASSICAL 5B AGC ROCK LIGHT ROCK SMOOTH CRISP DANCE ENERGY EDGE ROCK SOFT GOLD GREGG GREGG OPEN MPACT JAZZ JAZZ LOUD SLAM LOUD BIG LOUD FAT LOUD HOT LOUD HOT BASS LOUD PUNCHY NEWS TALK ROCK DENSE ROCK LIGHT ROCK MEDIUM ROCK MEDIUM LOW BASS ROCK MEDIUM MID BASS ROCK OPEN ROCK SOFT SMOOTH JAZZ SPORTS URBAN HEAVY URBAN LIGHT WMA MUSIC WMA NEWS TALK Normal Less More 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 7 0 7 0 9 5 9 0 10 0 7 0 9 5 9 5 9 5 9 5 7 0 7 0 9 0 9 0 7 0 8 5 9 5 9 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 8 5 9 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 9 5 7 0 Table 3 2 Radio Style Presets OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 2 1 Broadcasters using Orban s Optimod FM 8300 8400 or 8500 will ordinar ily use these processors HD FM digital outputs to feed the digital channel in an IBOC transmission This eliminates any potential comb filtering be cause both analog and digital out
161. NGLE J1 43008 501 01 ASSEMBLY WIRE BLK 12 43008 503 01 ASSEMBLY WIRE RED 12 Schematics and Parts Locator Drawings These drawings reflect the actual construction of your unit as accurately as possible Any differences between the drawings and your unit are probably due to product improvements or production changes since the publication of this manual If you intend to replace parts please read page 6 13 Please note that because sur face mount parts are used extensively in the 6300 few parts are field replaceable Servicing ordinarily occurs by swapping circuit board assemblies However the most vulnerable parts connected to the outside world are socketed and can be readily re placed in the field These include the analog input amplifiers the analog output amplifiers and the tee filters used for EMI suppression 6 20 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 Function Description Drawing Page Chassis Circuit Board Locator and Basic In Top view 6 21 terconnections not to scale Control board Control microprocessor Services Parts Locator 6 22 front panel serial port Ethernet Drawing and 5 board Contains General Purpose bus address de Schematic 1 of 5 6 23 coder DSP and I O interface Memory and clock generation Schematic 2 of 5 6 24 Ethernet Schematic 3 of 5 6 25 Miscellaneous input output Schematic 4 of 5 6 26 Powe
162. Operating Manual OPIIMOD 6300 Digital Multipurpose Audio Processor Version 1 1 Software orban IMPORTANT NOTE Refer to the unit s rear panel for your Model Number Model Number Description 6300 OPTIMOD 6300 audio processor for digital audio transmission channels Digital I O Protection Struc ture 2 band Structure with CBS Loudness Controller 5 band Structure 85 250V operation at 50 60 Hz via universal switching power supply Switchable to flat 50us 75us preemphasis MANUAL Part Number Description 96119 110 03 6300 Operating Manual CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE This symbol wherever it appears alerts you to This symbol wherever it appears alerts you to important the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage 2 operating and maintenance instructions in the accompa inside the enclosure voltage that may be MA nying literature Read the manual sufficient to constitute a risk of shock In accordance to the WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment direc tive of the European Parliament this product must not be discarded into the municipal waste stream in any of the Member
163. Orban Optimod FM for such applications 9 Set analog output and configuration level A Navigate to SETUP gt IO CALIB gt ANALOG CALIB gt ANLG gt AO SOURCE and set the analog output source to e AGC stereo enhancement equalization and AGC without peak limiting e AGC LIM stereo enhancement equalization AGC and look ahead peak limiting e MULTIBAND stereo enhancement equalization AGC and 2 Band or 5 Band compression without peak limiting e MB LIM stereo enhancement equalization AGC 2 Band or 5 Band com pression and look ahead peak limiting See step 10 on page 2 14 B Navigate to SETUP gt IO CALIB gt ANALOG CALIB gt ANLG OuT gt AO PRE E Set the analog output preemphasis to PRE E for preemphasis or FLAT When in doubt choose FLAT This is correct for a great majority of 6300 applications If you are sending the analog output of the 6300 through a digital link that uses a lossy codec like MPEG APT X or Dolby set the output FLAT Lossy codecs cannot handle pre emphasized signals If you intend to use the analog output for headphones set the output FLAT If you choose PRE E in this step you must configure the analog output to emit either the AGC LIM signal or the MB LIM signal monitoring see step A above If you emit the AGC LIM signal peak levels will only be controlled if you set the AGC preemphasis to 50uS 75uS in step 7 on page 2 23 This is the only way to make
164. P 6300 PC Remote permits you to adjust any 6300 preset by remote control or to do virtually anything else that you can do from the 6300 s front panel controls The program displays all of the 6300 s LCD meters on the computer screen to aid remote adjustment RS 232 Serial Port 6300 PC Remote can communicate at up to 115 kbps via modem or direct connection between the computer and the 6300 through their RS 232 serial ports RJ45 Ethernet Connector The 6300 can be connected to any Ethernet network that supports the TCP IP proto col See Networking and Remote Control on page 2 36 for more information OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 9 Location of OPTIMOD 6300 This section assumes that OPTIMOD 6300 will be used as a transmission processor See the Using OPTIMOD 6300 as a Studio Level Controller on page 1 10 if OPTIMOD 6300 is to be used as a studio AGC At the transmitter is best The best location for OPTIMOD 6300 is as close as possible to the transmitter or en coder so that OPTIMOD 6300 s AES3 output can be connected to the transmitter or encoder through a circuit path that introduces no change in OPTIMOD 6300 s output bitstream A high quality AES3 cable is ideal Where access to the transmitter is not possible Sometimes it is not possible to locate OPTIMOD 6300 at the transmitter Instead it must be located on the studio side of the link connecting the audio plant to the transmitter If the transmitter plant is n
165. PL 100 6 0 dB 6 0 dB 6 0 dB 6 0 dB 6 0 dB 4 gt 5 Coupling B1 Output Mix B2 Output Mix B3 Output Mix 84 Output B5 Output Mix B1 OUT B2 OUT B3 OUT B4 OUT B5 OUT Table 3 10 MB Band Mix Controls 3 50 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 primary danger is that the excessive drive will cause noise to be increased excessively when the program material becomes quiet You can minimize this effect by activat ing the single ended noise reduction and or by carefully setting the MULTIBAND GATE THRESHOLD control to freeze the gain when the input gets quiet When the release time of the 5 band compressor is set towards fast the setting of the MULTIBAND DRIVE control becomes much more critical to sound quality because density increases as the control is turned up Listen carefully as you adjust it With these fast release times there is a point beyond which increasing the 5 band com pressor drive will no longer yield more loudness and will simply degrade the punch and definition of the sound Instead let the AGC do most of the work Because excessive loudness is an irritant in sound for picture there is almost never any reason to push processing to the point where it degrades the audio We recom mend no more than 10dB gain reduction as shown on the meters for Band 3 More than 1088 particularly with the fast release time will often create a wall of sound effect tha
166. PORTANT The COM port you choose at this point must match the COM port to which you connected your modem g From the tabs at the top choose Port Settings and configure the settings to match your PC modem If you are using U S Robotics external modem the settings will be Bits per second 115200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow Control None h When you are finished click the OK button to close the Communications Port Comx Properties dialog box i Click the OK button in the Systems Properties dialog window j Close the Control Panel window If your modem is already installed skip to Launch an existing Windows XP modem connection on page 2 67 B Install the Windows XP modem a Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer 2 64 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 If you are using an external modem connect the modem to a serial port on your PC and make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line b On your PC click Start Settings Control Panel Phone and Modem Options C Click the Modems tab d Verify that your modem appears in the list available under The following Modems are installed e Verify that your modem is Attached to the correct port If your modem is unavailable or not attached to the correct port you must Add it See your Windows documentation f If your modem is available in the list available under The following
167. R MALE INSERT RT ANGL J201 J202 J400 27054 003 01 CONNECTOR FEM INSERT RT ANGLE J100 J103 J300 27147 008 01 IC SCKT DIP 8 PINS DUAL SIC100 SIC102 SIC213 SIC214 27174 044 01 IC SCKT 44 PIN LOW PROFIL SIC703 27408 003 01 CONNECTOR 3P SCKT STRIP SL100 SL102 SL104 SL106 SL200 SL201 SL202 SL203 27421 002 01 CONNECTOR HEADER DBL RW 2P 2 J700 6 18 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 5 BOARD PART DESCRIPTION COMONENT IDENTIFIER 27421 010 01 CONNECTOR HEADER DBL RW 23 J800 J903 27426 003 01 CONNECTOR HEADER 3 PIN SINGLE J801 27451 009 01 HEADER STR DBLRW 60P PCMT J701 27630 001 01 JUMPER PC MNT TEST POINT TP900 TP903 TP901 TP902 TP904 NO STUFF 28083 000 01 OSC XTAL CLOCK 27MHZ 3 VO 805 29015 000 01 XF SMT SCIENTI T300 T400 29506 001 01 BEAD FERRITE ON WIRE L300 L301 L400 L401 29508 210 01 FLTR EMI SUPPRESSION 50V L100 L102 L104 L106 L200 L201 L202 L203 29522 000 01 INDUCTOR 1200UH 5 1 M 10 22 L101 L103 L105 L107 L208 L209 L210 L211 29527 000 01 INDUCTOR FIT44 4 L900 44110 100 01 FIRMWARE PIC16C 1 703 1C703 24672 000 011 IC DIG INTERFACE TRANSMIT 6403 20128 499 01 1 0805 49 90 1 R253 R254 R255 R256 20129 301 01 1 R0805 3010 196 1 8W R100 R107 R115 R120 20129 475
168. R N 100 18 IOWREN ___ 8 GPA12 40 9 ATO ISA A25 1SA_D4 123 __ GPA 38 22 185 711 ISA AB 1 23 10 GPAB 37 187712 1 E 6849 GPAS 35 148 18813 a 62 Mei z ISA D7 5 M24 241 281 o NC 4 6848 GPAG 35 14 AS 5 DSP_BUSEN N 9147 GPA5 EE 2827 16 SA A5 Me T 6846 243 283 gt NC 5 2 GPAG 6544 32 12 AS 22 ISA RESET H24 6845 284 73 NC d GPA5 Hes CAR 6543 30 2e 285 ISA A3 Ay TDO Ci 24 9544 6542 28 20 A 7 GLAS 23 6843 29 2880 20 SAA 27 CABLE FLAT 60 PIN 24 2 7 287 NC GPA2 A 6540 25 247 287 23 AO ds Ne 49 GPA1 D CAU TMS lt gt 01 GPAO 4 1 48 Nel 83 gt TO VO amp DSP 24 25 5 GPWEMRD E24 MEMRDAN 33 20E 55 C18 GP MEMWR N NC m 2 GBIowg 16 IOWR N NC RET GRIOWR G4 GP_IORD N TAALVC164245 nc RN3 Te GPA23 47 2 ISA A23 1 10 P1024 GPDBUFOE 5 GPA22 48 1845 ISA A22 o990090000 2 E 21 142 UAI s ISA A21 58885288628 3 8 20 4571 13 5 ISA A20 Oe DACK1 N 25 UN ISA A25 olg 5 6 DACKO N GPA24 40 9 ISA A24 ES 1A6 186 Y 38 11 1 JOWR N ar Ar 187 12 ISA_IORD N SHT 5 PIO26 GPMEM
169. S STAT Bits gt AES USER BITS and set the field to PASS or BLOCK as desired Unless you are sure that downstream equipment will correctly format these bits set AES USER Bits to BLOCK User bits can only be passed if the 6300 s digital output is set to AES not SPDIF 2 20 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 23 Set the Processing Delay for a given signal path optional minimum 30 fps 29 97 fps 25 fps 24 fps 33 50 ms in 1 ms increments You can set the delay through the AGC LIMIT and MB LIMIT signal paths inde pendently This feature is usually used in sound for picture applications to add time delay so that the input output delay through a given processing path is ex actly one frame using a variety of different standards The selections are MINIMUM depends on processing structure in use typically between 20 and 23 ms 30 fps 29 97 fps NTSC color video 25 fps most PAL video and 24 fps film You can also set the delay in 1 millisecond increments Navigate to SETUP gt I O gt PROC DELAY and set the delay as required using the and MB LimIT buttons Note that this control does not affect the delay to a given output if that output is in AGC or MULTIBAND mode 24 Set the main display mode optional You can choose how the main display indicates active operating parameters by navigating to SETUP gt SHOW DATE Choose YES to make the display toggle auto matically once every two sec
170. SET FILE dialog box You can also click the leftmost button on the button bar B Click the desired preset within the dialog box to select it C Double click the desired preset or select it and click the RECALL PRESET button to make it active Continually clicking the RECALL PRESET button will toggle between the current and previous active presets D Click DONE to dismiss the OPEN PRESET FILE dialog box 3 60 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 The folder on your hard drive containing the preset files both Factory and User is automatically synchronized to the contents of its associated 6300 s non volatile memory each time 6300 PC Remote connects to that 6300 The 6300 s memory is the master This means that if you delete a user preset from the 6300 s memory whether locally via its front panel or via 6300 PC Remote 6300 PC Remote will automatically erase this preset from this folder on your computer To archive a preset permanently you must use the Backup function see page 3 60 To save a user preset you have created A Select SAvE PRESET AS from the FiLE menu to bring up the SAVE As Dialog Box The current preset name will appear in the File Name field B Click in the field and edit it C Click SAVE to save the preset to the 6300 s internal memory as a User Preset If you have made edits to a previously existing user preset you can select SAVE PRESET from the FILE menu to overwrite the pre existing user preset automatica
171. States This product may be sent back to your Orban dealer at end of life where it will be reused or recycled at no cost to you If this product is discarded into an approved municipal WEEE collection site or turned over to an approved WEEE recycler at end of life your Orban dealer must be notified and supplied with model serial number and the name and location of site facility Please contact your Orban dealer for further assistance www orban com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated Retain Instructions The safety and operation instructions should be retained for future reference Heed Warnings All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to Follow Instructions All operation and user instructions should be followed Water and Moisture The appliance should not be used near water e g near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink laundry tub in a wet base ment or near a swimming pool etc Ventilation The appliance should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation For example the appli ance should not be situated on a bed sofa rug or similar surface that may block the ventilation openings or placed in a built in installation such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings Heat The appliance should be situat
172. T post office 1 15 USING Lossy DATA REDUCTION IN THE AUDIO CHAIN BEFORE THE 6300 1 15 INTERFACING TO THE TRANSMITTER 1 16 Sync ID Utica deve ene a ed ceu at ate ee eee ed 1 16 AES USER mtt ced al ep eae ds ove 1 16 Sample Rate and Audio Bandwidth 1 16 S bfrarmie Delay et retinere 1 17 ABOUT TRANSMISSION LEVELS AND METERING 2 1 17 1 17 Figure 1 1 Absolute Peak Level VU and PPM 1 18 Studio Line up Levels and Headroom nnne 1 18 Transmission Levels 1 19 PINE UP FACILITIES E 1 19 Metering Of Levels tede ER o it rie DO diate des 1 19 Built in Calibrated Line up 1 0 65 1 19 Built in Calibrated Bypass Test 0 0 1 20 SETTING OUTPUT MODULATION 5 nennen enne nnn enne ases nnns nnn 1 20 MONITORING ON LOUDSPEAKERS AND 5 1 21 STREAMING AND NETCASTING
173. TECHNICAL DATA IC501C IC502C IC503C IC504C DSP56367 150 DSP56367 150 DSP56367 150 DSP56367 150 99 A47 023 133 99 A47 p23 133 99 A47 023 133 99 A47 023 133 98 132 98 132 98 132 98 132 A16 D22 A16 D22 A16 D22 A16 D22 97 131 97 131 97 131 97 131 15 021 A15 021 A15 021 A15 021 94 128 94 128 94 128 94 128 14 D20 14 D20 14 D20 A14 D20 93 125 93 125 93 125 98 125 A13 D19 A13 D19 A13 D19 A13 D19 92 124 92 124 92 124 92 124 12 018 A12 D18 A12 D18 A12 D18 89 123 89 123 89 123 89 123 11 D17 11 D17 11 D17 11 D17 88 122 88 122 88 122 88 122 A10 D16 A10 D16 A10 D16 A10 D16 85 121 85 121 85 121 85 121 9 D15 9 D15 9 D15 A9 D15 84 118 84 118 84 118 84 118 AB 014 AB 014 AB 014 AB 014 83 117 83 117 83 117 83 117 AT D13 AT D13 AT D13 AT D13 82 116 82 116 82 116 82 116 AG D12 AG D12 012 012 79 115 79 115 79 115 79 115 5 011 A5 011 A5 011 A5 D11 78 114 78 114 78 114 78 114 A4 D10 A4 D10 A4 D10 A4 D10 77 113 77 113 77 113 77 113 09 09 09 A3 D9 76 110 76 110 76 110 76 110 A2 D8 A2 08 A2 D8 A2 D8 73 109 73 109 73 109 73 109 72 D7 7108 72 D7 7108 72 D7 7108 72 1 07 108 0 D6 0 D6 0 D6 06 107 107 107 107 70 05 106 70 05
174. Test Mode can defeat the processing The BYPASS GAIN control sets a fixed gain through the 6300 See Test Modes on page 3 56 for more informa tion 2 Place the 6300 in Bypass mode locally A Navigate to SETUP MODE and set MODE to BYPASS OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 23 You can set the bypass gain with the ByPass GAIN control located to the right of the MODE control B Begin EAS broadcast After the EAS broadcast resume normal processing C Set the MODE to OPERATE This will restore the processing preset in use prior to the Test Mode 3 Place the 6300 in Bypass mode by remote control Then program any two Remote Interface inputs for Bypass and Exit Test respectively A Connect two outputs from your station remote control system to the REMOTE INTERFACE connector on the rear panel of the 6300 according to the wiring diagram in Figure 2 2 on page 2 3 B Program two ports for BYPASS and EXIT TEST according to the instructions in Remote Control Interface Programming starting on page 2 35 C Place the 6300 in bypass mode by remote control a Switch the 6300 into BYPASS mode by a momentary command from your station s remote control to the GPI port programmed as BYPASS b Begin EAS broadcast When the EAS broadcast is finished switch the 6300 from BvPASS mode by a momentary command from your station s remote control to the GPI port programmed as EXIT TEST You may also choose to insert EAS
175. Type of dial up server am Settings calling field Type of dial up server am calling PPP windows 95 98 4 2000 Internet m Make sure that Components checked are used by this connection Internet Protocol Y Internet Protocol TCP IP TCP IP is checked El File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks You may leave vl m Client for Microsoft Networks Client for Mi crosoft Neworks if you Install Uninstall Properties ike n Click OK Description o When the Connec Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default Ro wide area network protocol that provides communication tion properties win across diverse interconnected networks dow appears click OK 2 Launch a Windows 2000 Modem connection Once you have set up a connection specifying a modem connection in the 6300 PC Remote application see To set up a new connection on page 3 58 choosing this connection from 6300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows modem connection to your 6300 You can connect by selecting the desired connection from the drop down list in the CONNECT menu You can also connect by double clicking 42 the Connection List EE COUR GEE EE Help Ei 0 Bd New 8300 If the connection is successful a dialog bubble will appear on the bottom right y All Connections hand corner of the screen verifying your 8300 connection 8300 modem
176. UT 1 3 test 16 gt lt 9 4 c0 03 wpe 44 15 44 15 95 gap SHT8 24 D4 MUTE IN OUT SDIN 108 18 4 el 1 05 49 9K 1 06 8 2 07 AD1895AYRS CS8406 CZZ V 5V _DOUTSRCS N 74HC151 iah POUTSRCS N 155 voc 10 20 1 13 30 40E gt AESINLRCK Dla EN AESINSCLK 5 6 SHT4 2A 2 n SHT4 gt SYNCINERCK 972 L8 SHT4 SYNCINSCLK 25 11 UPC eee ae seeds See ee See ce Seen T 10 8 7 GND IC404 AES EBU 8 8 2402 t 316 4 125 i DISTAL lt zls L5 Mckoure 1 e 2 29 SHT8 SDA CDOUT SCL CCLK SHT8 gt 2401 12 288MHZ 4 MCLK C 2 27 SHT8 gt AESOUT2CS N 2 anges AD1 CDIN 22 PICSDO ae MALE SHT9 17 4 00 2 1 7 i SHT9 1 01 R403 1401 SHT4 AESINRMCK 2 02 3 26 3 402 26 5 3 18 432 2 iloa whe MCLK_OUT MMODE 0 dum i FERRITE i i 04 4 25 4143 8 SHT9 SUAE SHT9 2 DATA 4 SDATA 501 25 TAN 1403 SHT4 gt i 06 8 SC937 02 SHT9 36 85 2 1 12 0 gt DOUT2 BCLK 5 451 us 24 Y DOUT2
177. a modular switching supply to minimize heat buildup and power consumption It converts AC line voltage input to 15 15 and 5 volts All other supply voltages are derived from these three voltages via local regulation The supply accepts inputs from 95 to 264 VAC 50 60 Hz The only fuse in your Optimod is a 2 5A 20mm Quick Acting HBC fuse mounted on the power supply s circuit board Because the supply s outputs are automatically cur OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 1 1 rent limited the fuse will usually open only if the power supply fails Be sure to dis connect your Optimod from AC power before replacing the fuse Because of safety and EMI suppression requirements in the power supply there are no user serviceable parts in it In case of failure replace the entire supply with an Orban supplied replacement Orban part number 29270 000 01 1 which ensures that your Optimod will continue to meet all regulatory requirements for safety and emissions Abbreviations Some of the abbreviations used in this manual may not be familiar to all readers A D or A to D analog to digital converter AES Audio Engineering Society AGC automatic gain control A I analog input A O analog output BAL balanced refers to an audio connection with two active conductors and one shield sur rounding them BBC British Broadcasting Corporation BNC a type of RF connector CALIB calibrate CIT
178. a nature du courant utilis correspondent bien ceux indiqu s sur la plaque de l appareil N utiliser que des fusibles de m me intensit et du m me principe de mise hors circuit que les fusibles d origine Ne jamais shunter les fusibles Eviter tout ce qui risque d endommager le c ble seceur On ne devra ni le plier ni l aplatir Lorsqu on d branche l appareil tirer la fiche et non le c ble Si un c ble est endommag le remplacer imm diatement Ne jamais exposer l appareil ou le c ble une contrainte m canique excessive Pour viter tout contact averc une tension lectrique dangereuse on n oouvrira jamais l appareil En cas de dysfonctionnement l appareil ne peut tre r par que dans un atelier autoris Aucun l ment de cet appareil ne peut tre r par par l utilisateur Pour viter les risques de d charge lectrique et d incendie prot ger l appareil de l humidit Eviter toute p n tration d humidit ou fr liquide dans l appareil En cas de dysfonctionnement ou si un liquide ou tout autre objet a p n tr dans l appareil couper aussit t l appareil de son alimentation et s adresser un point de service apr svente autoris Safety Instructions Spanish Hacer funcionar el aparato s lo con la tensi n y clase de corriente senaladas en la placa indicadora de caracter sticas Reemplazar los fusibles s lo por otros de la misma intensidad de corriente y sistema de desconexi n No poner nunca los fusibles e
179. able A normal serial cable will not work B Connect the other end of the cable to your computer s COM port Connecting Using Windows 2000 Direct Serial Connection Ordinarily a direct serial connection through a null modem cable is used only when you are controlling one 6300 per available COM port on your computer If you wish to control multiple local 6300s it is better to use an Ethernet network connection However in principle you could control multiple 6300s serially from one COM port using a hardware serial switch to select the 6300 you wish to control In this case you should set up a separate 6300 connection for each 6300 to be controlled fol lowing the instructions below All connections should reference the same COM port This connection is used both for upgrading your 6300 and for connecting the 6300 PC Remote application to your 6300 Important The Direct Serial Connection must have exclusive access to the PC COM port that connects to your 6300 Make sure than any software that monitors this COM port such as HotSync manager etc is disabled before running Direct Serial Connection If you have already configured your direct serial cable connection skip to step 2 on page 2 52 2 48 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 If you cannot access the Internet after making a Direct or Modem connection you will have to reconfigure certain networking parameters in Windows Please see You Cannot Access the Internet After Making
180. ace specifications 6 3 troubleshooting connections 5 6 Windows 2000 5 7 Windows XP 5 9 computer interface RS 232 2 5 serial 2 5 computer interface 1 8 connecting through Win XP direct serial 2 52 connection to PC troubleshooting 5 5 connectors audio 2 5 input and output 2 6 contrast control 3 1 control knob 3 1 controls BASS CLIP 3 38 breakpoint 3 46 compression ratio 3 45 contrast 3 1 description 3 1 Final Limit 3 39 knee 3 46 LO PASS 3 31 MAX LPF 2 13 20 soft buttons 3 1 SYNC DELAY 2 20 corrosion 4 1 coupling controls 3 53 crossover allpass 3 37 linear phase 3 38 modes 3 37 crossover Ethernet cable 5 6 D D A converter circuit description 6 9 specification 6 2 delay setting processing 2 20 delay 3 10 Delay 6 2 delta release control 3 55 DHCP server 5 6 digital 1 6 digital input circuit description 6 8 digital links 1 13 digital output circuit description 6 10 display assembly removing 4 2 display board parts list 6 18 19 Display mode 2 20 distortion excessive 5 5 testing 4 9 troubleshooting 5 vs loudness 3 3 dither 2 26 DJ Bass control 3 30 downward expander 3 52 DSP block diagram 6 41 circuit description 6 10 DSP board replacing 4 4 dual mono 2 18 35 dual mono 6 2 dull sound t
181. adjust To change a parameter like an output level it is usually necessary to hold down the soft button while turning the knob However if there is only one parameter on a screen you can change this with the knob alone You do not have to hold down a button Let the text on the screen guide you through the process 1 Press the front panel Setup button 2 Press the Quick Setup soft button when its label appears on the display Quick Setup presents a guided sequence of screens into which you must insert in formation about your particular requirements In general the screens are self explanatory Use the NEXT and PREV buttons to navigate between screens These buttons will flash to indicate that they are active 3 Set the time A Press the NEXT button OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 25 13 The set time screen appears B Hold down the appropriate soft button while turning the knob to enter the hour minute and seconds Enter seconds slightly ahead of the correct time C Wait until the entered time agrees with the correct time Then press the ENTER TIME button to set the clock 4 Set the date Hold down the appropriate soft button while turning the knob to enter the day month and year 5 Set up Daylight Saving Time Summer Time A Turn the knob to specify the date at which Daylight Saving Time begins in your area B Press the NEXT button C Turn the knob to specify the date at which Daylight S
182. and punchy low end although not as exaggerated as the URBAN presets A midrange boost provides enough presence energy to ensure that vocals stand out A modest amount of high frequency coupling determined by the Band 3 gt 4 Coupling setting allows reasonable amounts of automatic HF equalization to correct dull program material while still preventing exaggerated frequency balances and excessive HF density Dense medium and open refer to the compression density which is deter mined by the release time settings in the AGC and multiband compressor sections ROCK LIGHT has an open sound with little audible compression and less brightness than the first three presets It is a compromise between ROCK OPEN and ROCK SOFT ROCK SOFT has a mellow easy to listen to high frequency quality that is designed for female skewing formats It is also a candidate for Quiet Storm and Love Songs light rock or light urban formats ROCK SMOOTH has the same mellow easy to listen to high frequency quality as ROCK SOFT but with more density Again it is a good choice for female skewing formats but where you need more compression and density than you get with ROCK SOFT For Contemporary Hit Radio CHR we recommend the ROCK DENSE or ROCK MEDIUM versions In competitive situations you may need to use LOUD HOT you can use LESS MORE to get it even louder or even LOUD HOT BASS or IMPACT However the rock presets are somewhat cleaner and are therefore m
183. and production applications Compressor attack time knee ratio and threshold controls are available These con trols can be dangerous in inexperienced hands leading you to create presets that sound great on some program material but overdrive the look ahead peak limiter on other material causing objectionable pumping or distortion We therefore rec ommend that you create custom presets at the Advanced Modify level only if you are experienced with transmission processor sound design and if you are willing to take the time to double check your work on many different types of program mate rial In production and mastering applications you will usually be working with one piece of program material at a time Here you can use all of Advanced Modify s power to get the sound you want without being concerned about how your settings will sound with other material The PC Remote software organizes its controls in tabbed screens The first three tabs EQUALIZATION STEREO ENHANCER and LESS MORE access the Basic Modify controls The remaining tabs combine the Full Modify and Advanced Modify controls logi cally organized by functionality Important Note Once you have edited a preset s dynamics parameters in Full or Advanced Modify LESS MORE control is no longer available in Basic Modify As noted above we strongly recommend using the LESS MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possible to your desired sound before you make further modifi
184. and with these words in red DELICATE INSTRUMENT FRAGILE Insure the package properly Ship prepaid not collect Do not ship parcel post Your Return Authorization Number must be shown on the label or the package will not be accepted OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 1 Section 6 Technical Data Specifications It is impossible to characterize the listening quality of even the simplest limiter or compressor based on specifications because such specifications cannot adequately describe the crucial dynamic processes that occur under program conditions There fore the only way to evaluate the sound of an audio processor meaningfully is by subjective listening tests Certain specifications are presented here to assure the engineer that they are rea sonable to help plan the installation and make certain comparisons with other processing equipment Performance Specifications apply for measurements from analog left right input to analog left right output Frequency Response Bypass Mode Depending on settings is flat or follows standard 50us or 75us preemphasis curve 0 10 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz At 32 kHz input sample rate the passband is reduced to approximately 14 7 kHz Analog left right output and digital output can be user configured for flat or pre emphasized output Noise Output noise floor will depend upon how much gain the processor is set for Limit Drive AGC Drive 2 band Drive and or Multiband Drive
185. annels Use one of Orban s Optimod FM processors for this application For analog television with FM aural carrier s use Optimod TV 8382 Studio Transmitter Link The following information is mainly relevant to digital radio and TV broadcasters who have their transmitters and studios at different locations Most netcasters will not find the information in this section relevant because if netcasters need to ship audio beyond their LAN they ordinarily ship it from one location to another in the form of encoded audio through low capacity Telco supplied digital links like ISDN or E 1 T 1 Transmission from Studio to Transmitter There are five types of studio transmitter links STLs in common use in broadcast service uncompressed digital digital with lossy compression like MPEG Dolby or microwave analog landline telephone post line and audio subcarrier on video microwave STL At this writing we believe that the Internet is insufficiently reliable to serve as a carrier for a real time STL because of the risk that network in terruptions might randomly disturb the audio feed STLs are used in two fundamentally different ways Either they can pass unprocessed audio for application to OPTIMOD 6300 s input or they can pass OPTIMOD 6300 s peak controlled output The two applications have fundamentally different per formance requirements e that passes unprocessed audio should have very low noise and low
186. ant program material less ob trusively than the loudness controller will The 5 band compressor will typically con trol loudness within a 2 dB window even with the loudness controller defeated Al though the loudness controller is available in 5 band mode you may find that you prefer the more open sound of the 5 band compressor without additional loudness control The loudness controller sidechain receives the output of the MB Limiter Hence the loudness controller responds accurately to all 6300 audio processing except look ahead limiting which is a peak limiting process whose gain reduction does not sig nificantly affect subject loudness If you feel that the Loudness Controller is not controlling the loudness of commer cials or other subjectively loud program material sufficiently well you may wish to set the threshold lower forcing the Loudness Controller to do more work Con versely if the loudness controller is doing more gain reduction that you would like you can set the LOUDNESS THRESHOLD control higher Note that the Loudness Controller operates with reference to an absolute subjective loudness threshold that does not adapt to program context This means that if there is a transition between very quiet program material like footfalls through rustling leaves and a commercial the commercial may still seem offensively loud even though the Loudness Controller is controlling its loudness correctly with reference to other sounds t
187. application that runs under Windows 2000 and XP It communicates with a given 6300 via TCP IP over modem direct serial and Ethernet connections You can configure PC Remote to switch be tween many 6300s via a convenient organizer that supports giving any 6300 an OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 5 alias and supports grouping multiple 6300s into folders Clicking a 6300 s icon causes PC Remote to connect to that 6300 through an Ethernet network or initi ates a Windows Dial Up or Direct Cable Connection if appropriate The PC Re mote software allows the user to access all 6300 features including advanced controls not available from the 6300 s front panel and allows the user to archive and restore presets automation lists and system setups containing levels digital word lengths GPI functional assignments etc e The 6300 contains a versatile real time clock which allows automation of vari ous events including recalling presets at pre programmed times To ensure ac curacy the clock can be synchronized to an Internet timeserver e Silence alarm and digital audio fault tally outputs are available e A Bypass Test Mode can be invoked locally by remote control from either the 6300 s GPI port or the 6300 PC Remote application or by automation to permit broadcast system test and alignment or proof of performance tests e The 6300 contains a built in line up tone generator facilitating quick and ac curate level setti
188. ard or click the X on the upper right corner with the mouse About Aliases created by Optimod 6300 PC Remote Software When you ADD A NEW 6300 using Optimod 6300 PC Remote your 6300 automatically receives a 6300 Alias name to differentiate it from other 6300s You can change the name anytime in the 6300 Properties window inside 6300 PC Remote When you add a new 6300 or change the name of an existing 6300 Alias an Alias folder is created in the same location as the executable for Optimod 6300 PC Re mote usually Program Files Orban Optimod 6300 The folder has the same name as the Alias name Once you establish the initial connection to the 6300 all presets for that 6300 are automatically copied to the Alias folder thus the folder contains all the preset files for that 6300 both Factory and User If you have backed up the 6300 using 6300 PC Remote these will appear in a backup subfolder located within the Alias folder Archived user preset files are text files and can be opened in a text editor like Notepad if you want to examine their contents Of course you will only see a meaningful display if the files were archived in plaintext i e not encrypted Alias folders and their associated backup subfolders are registered in your PC s Reg istry This prevents folders from being accidentally deleted or moved If you move or delete Alias folders from the PC the Alias folders recreate themselves in the previ ous location and restor
189. as the release time is shortened With fast and medium fast release times density also increases when you increase the drive level into the 5 band com pressor because these faster release times produce more limiting action Increasing density can make loud sounds seem louder but can also result in an unattractive busier flatter or denser sound It is very important to be aware of the many nega tive subjective side effects of excessive density when setting controls that affect the density of the processed sound Because the 6300 s AGC algorithm uses sophisticated window gating it is preferable to make the AGC do most of the gain riding instead of the multiband compressor because the AGC can ride gain quickly without adding excessive density to program material that is already well controlled Use the multiband compressor lightly so it can achieve automatic re equalization of material that the AGC has already con trolled without adding excessive density to the audio or re equalizing to an unnatu ral extent The MULTIBAND DRIVE interacts with the MULTIBAND RELEASE With slower release time settings increasing the MULTIBAND DRIVE control scarcely affects density Instead the Band Mix Full Name Advanced Name Range 2 gt 1 CPL B2 gt B1 Coupling 100 96 2 gt 3 CPL 2 gt 3 Coupling 100 96 B3 gt B2 CPL B3 gt B2 Coupling 100 96 3 gt 4 CPL 3 gt 4 Coupling 100 96 4 gt 5 C
190. at as the bandwidth of OPTIMOD 6300 as used in your plant usually 20 kHz Ideally you should use a 20 bit or better uncompressed digital link with at least 44 1 kHz sample frequency Because the audio processor controls peaks it is not important that the audio link feeding OPTIMOD 6300 s input terminals be phase linear However the link should have low noise the flattest possible frequency response from 20 20 000Hz and low non linear distortion If the audio link between the studio and the transmitter is noisy or is limited to 16 bits or less if digital performing the AGC function at the studio site can minimize the audibility of this noise AGC applied before the audio link improves the signal to noise ratio because the average level on the link will be greater Further many STLs require level control to prevent the STL from being overloaded To apply such level control and compression we recommend an Orban AGC Limiter HF Limiter Clipper before the STL transmitter This performs the func tion of OPTIMOD 6300 s internal broadband automatic gain control AGC while si multaneously protecting the STL When using a studio AGC defeat OPTIMOD 6300 s broadband AGC Using OPTIMOD 6300 as a Studio Level Controller See page 6 41 for a block diagram of the 63005 signal processing and routing Because of its versatile signal routing OPTIMOD 6300 can be used as a combined studio AGC digital radio netcast processor and low delay tal
191. at least of contribution qual ity the higher the better If any part of the studio chain is analog we recommend using at least 20 bit A D conversion before encoding Because OPTIMOD 6300 uses multiband limiting it can dynamically change the fre quency response of the channel This can violate the psychoacoustic masking as sumptions made in designing the lossy data reduction algorithm Therefore you need to leave headroom in the algorithm so that OPTIMOD 6300 s multiband processing will not unmask quantization noise This is also true of any lossy data re duction applied in the studio such as hard disk digital delivery systems For MPEG Layer 2 encoding we recommend 384kb second or higher Some links may use straightforward PCM pulse code modulation without lossy data reduction If you connect to these through an AES3 digital interface these can be very transparent if they do not truncate the digital words produced by the de vices driving their inputs and they do not require downward sample rate conversion Downward sample rate conversion can cause overshoot due to spectral truncation and asynchronous re sampling of the 48 kHz peak controlled samples If the link does not have an AES3 input you must drive its analog input from OPTIMOD 6300 s analog output This is not recommended because OPTIMOD 6300 s monitor output will overshoot in the analog domain because of the physics of the system The use of external digital to analo
192. automatically becomes faster as more gain reduction occurs This makes the program progressively denser creating a sense of increasing loudness although peaks are not actually increasing At the gain reduction values set by the 2B MASTER BREAKPOINT and 2B BASS BREAKPOINT controls the release rate for these bands becomes constant and density does not increase with additional amounts of gain reduction 2B REL SHAPE 2B Release Shape selects a LINear or EXPonential release shape Linear causes the 2 band compressor to release at a constant number of dB per sec ond above the 2B BREAKPOINT setting and proportionally to the amount of gain re duction otherwise Despite its name EXPONENTIAL actually offers a reverse exponential characteristic It causes the release to commence slowly and then speed up as it progresses The EXPONENTIAL shape allows you to create the open sound of a slow release time with program material that is well controlled in level while permitting the processing to quickly correct excessively low input levels We recommend using Exponential for general purpose sound for picture programming For program material dominated by music LINEAR may be a better choice because Exponential may create unnatural side effects If the 2B Release control is set between about 0 5 and 2 dB second an Exponential release shape should cause no problems even with music Note The BREAKPOINT controls do nothing when EXPONENTIAL release is chos
193. av ing a source impedance of 6000 or less The input is EMI suppressed e Input connections are the same whether the driving source is balanced or unbal anced e Connect the red or white wire to the pin on the XLR type connector 2 or 3 that is considered HiGH by the standards of your organization Connect the black wire to the pin on the XLR type connector 3 or 2 that is considered Low by the standards of your organization e In low RF fields like a studio site not co located with an RF transmitter connect the cable shield at 6300 input only it should not be connected at the source end In high RF fields like a transmitter site also connect the shield to pin 1 of the male XLR type connector at the 6300 input e f the output of the driving unit is unbalanced and does not have separate CHASSIS GROUND and or Low output terminals connect both the shield and the black wire to the common or ground terminal of the driving unit Analog Audio Output e Electronically balanced and floating outputs simulate a true transformer output The source impedance is 500 The output is capable of driving loads of 6000 or higher the 100 modulation level is adjustable with the AO 100 control over to 24dBu range The outputs EMI suppressed OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 7 e f an unbalanced output is required to drive unbalanced inputs of other equip ment it should be taken between pin 2 and pin
194. aving Time ends in your area 6 Set the MAX LPF frequency as appropriate to your application 10 0 kHz to 20 0 kHz The 6300 s audio bandwidth can be set in three places 1 in Setup 2 in the EQ page of the Modify screen and 3 by remote control The 6300 s bandwidth is always the lowest of these three settings The frequency in Setup is a technical parameter that determines the highest bandwidth available The installing engineer should set it to be congruent with the sample rate of the digital system being driven by the 6300 For example if the 6300 is driving a system with a 32kHz sample rate set the MAX LPF to 15 0 KHz That way a setting of 20 kHz elsewhere will not cause exces sive bandwidth and aliasing because the 6300 will automatically override it with the MAXLPF setting 7 Set external AGC mode Most of the processing structures in the 6300 control level with a preliminary AGC Automatic Gain Control If you are using a suitable Automatic Gain Con trol at the studio such as an Orban 8200ST OPTIMOD Studio or 464A Co Operator the AGC in the 6300 should be defeated This is so that the two AGCs do not fight each other and so they do not simultaneously increase gain re sulting in increased noise A Press the NEXT button B Set external AGC mode by turning the knob a Set the field to YES if you have an external AGC such as an Orban 1100 1101 6300 8200ST OPTIMOD Studio Orban 464A Co Operator or sim
195. ban s traditional exacting standards ensuring trouble free installation e The 6300 is designed and certified to meet all applicable international safety and emissions standards Adaptability through Multiple Audio Processing Structures e A processing structure is a program that operates as a complete audio proc essing system Only one processing structure can be active at a time OPTIMOD 6300 realizes its processing structures as a series of high speed mathematical computations made by Digital Signal Processing DSP chips 1 4 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 e The 6300 features two processing structures 5 band for a spectrally consistent sound with good loudness control and 2 band for a transparent sound that preserves the frequency balance of the original program material while also ef fectively controlling subjective loudness e Orban s PreCode technology manipulates several aspects of the audio to minimize artifacts caused by low bitrate codecs ensuring consistent loudness and texture from one source to the next PreCode includes special audio band detection algorithms that are energy and spectrum aware This can improve co dec performance on some codecs by reducing audio processing induced codec artifacts even with program material that has been preprocessed or mastered by other processing than Optimod There are several factory presets tuned spe cifically for low bitrate codecs These presets have LBR in their names e
196. band 5 compression threshold control if you are using the 5 band Structure or by exces sively high settings of the BAND 4 MIX and BAND 5 Mix controls located in Full and Advanced Modify In applications where you are protecting a pre emphasized link you must set the 6300 s output to FLAT in the SYSTEM SETUP gt OUTPUT screen to prevent double pre emphasis which will cause very shrill sound and very poor peak modulation con trol Note however that it is always preferable to defeat the preemphasis filter in the link and to set the 6300 s output to PRE EMPH This will optimize peak control Dull Sound If you are using the 2 band structure dull sounding source material will sound dull on the air The 5 band Structure will automatically re equalize such dull sounding program material to make its spectral balance more consistent with other program material In applications where you are protecting a pre emphasized link if the 6300 s output is set to FLAT in SYSTEM SETUP OurPur there will be no preemphasis unless it is supplied somewhere else in the system This will cause very dull sound 5 4 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 6300 Excessive Sibilance ess sounds If ess sounds in speech particularly with women s voices seem too pronounced set the B5 THRESHOLD control more negative Note that this will also reduce the brightness of music so a careful compromise is usually required Commercials Too Loud in Sound for Pi
197. below 64 kbps URBAN There are two URBAN Rap presets HEAVY and LIGHT These are similar to ROCK MEDIUM and ROCK OPEN but with a different bass sound They use the 3 pole 18 dB octave shape on the bass equalizer URBAN HEAVY is appropriate for Urban Rap Hip Hop Black R amp B Dance and other similar formats URBAN LIGHT is appropriate for light R amp B formats Highly competitive Urban broadcasters might also use LOUD HOT BASS or LOUD SLAM modified versions of LOUD HOT that maximize bass punch Sound for Picture Presets FACTORY PROGRAMMING PRESETS TV 50 ond Table 3 3 Factory Programming Presets Sound for picture TV 2B GEN PURPOSE TV 2 band General Purpose This preset accommodates most dramatic programming providing gentle gain control that limits dynamic range to a level that provides the general audience with consistently intelligible dialog It sounds very similar to Orban s analog OPTIMOD TV Model 8182A when that unit is adjusted for General programming according to the instructions in its operating manual This preset retains the spectral balance of its input as much as possible TV 2B GEN PURPOSE is not the best choice for live news sports or films with optical soundtracks The 5 band presets see below can automatically equalize such pro gram material when its spectral balance is inappropriate and can also apply single ended dynamic noise reduction The TV 2B GEN PURP LC preset is identical to the TV 2
198. bility The subjective adjustments available to the user have enough range to cause audi ble distortion at their extreme settings Advancing the FINAL LiMT control too far will invariably cause distortion Setting the LESS MORE control beyond 9 can cause au dible distortion of some program material with all but the Classical and Protect pre sets If you are using analog inputs the peak input level must not exceed 27 dBu or the 6300 s A D converter will clip and distort Unlike earlier digital Optimods there is no input peak clipping level ad justment for the A D converter Instead we have provided adequate headroom for virtually any facility This is possible because the A D con verter in the 6300 has higher dynamic range than older designs Without compromising the 6300 s noise level we could thus eliminate a control that was frequently misadjusted If you are using an external processor ahead of the 6300 be sure it is not clipping or otherwise causing problems Audible Noise See also RFI Hums Clicks or Buzzes on page 5 1 Excessive compression will always exaggerate noise in the source material The 6300 has two systems that fight this problem The silence gate freezes the gain of the AGC and compressor systems whenever the input noise drops below a level set by the threshold control for the processing section in question preventing noise below this level from being further increased There are two independent si
199. by selecting the desired connection from the drop down list in the CONNECT marit File Edit View Tools Connect Help You can also connect by dou IP New 8300 ble clicking the connection in n NP Disconnect the Connection List window 8 All Connections A dialog bubble will appear 8300 on the bottom right hand cor W 8300 modem ner of the screen verifying 8300 modem your connection if the connec tion is successful If you have trouble making a connection refer to OS Specific Troubleshooting Advice Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect on page 5 7 If you have trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instructions above try restarting your computer to clear its serial port 3 To change the properties of an existing connection Right click the connection in the connection List window and choose Proper ties The Connection properties window opens see page 2 48 Connecting Using Windows XP Direct Serial Connection If you have already configured your direct serial cable connection skip to step 2 on page 2 56 If you cannot access the Internet after making a Direct or Modem con nection you will have to reconfigure certain networking parameters in Windows Please see You Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Di rect or Modem Connection of the 6300 on page 5 6 1 Add and configure a Direct Connection for Windows XP Tools Connec
200. cations at the Full or Advanced Modify levels Gain Reduction Metering Unlike the metering on some processors when any OPTIMOD 6300 gain reduction meter indicates full scale at its bottom it means that its associated compressor has run out of gain reduction range that the circuitry is being overloaded and that various nastinesses are likely to commence OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 13 Because the various compressors have 25 dB of gain reduction range the meter should never come close to 25 dB gain reduction if OPTIMOD 6300 has been set up for a sane amount of gain reduction under ordinary program conditions Further be aware of the different peak factors on voice and music if voice and mu sic are peaked identically on a VU meter voice may cause up to 10 dB more peak gain reduction than does music A PPM will indicate relative peak levels much more accurately The AGC meter can be switched within the Full Control screens so that it either reads the gain reduction of the Master above 200 Hz band or the difference be tween the gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands The latter reading is useful for assessing the dynamic bass equalization that the AGC produces and it helps you set the AGC BASS COUPLING control To Create or Save a User Preset Once you have edited a preset you can save it as a user preset The 6300 can store more than 100 user presets limited only by available memory The 6300 will offe
201. cessing voice because voice will activate the gate frequently Each time it does so it will reset the gain of the lowest frequency band so that the gains of the two bottom bands are equal and the response in this frequency range is flat The result is natural sounding bass on male voice This is particularly desirable for most sound for picture programming If you like a larger than life chesty sound on male voice set this control away from OFF When so set gating causes the gain reduction of the lowest frequency band to move to the same gain reduction minus a gain offset equal to the numeri cal setting of the control as its nearest neighbor when gated You can therefore set the maximum gain difference between the two low frequency bands producing considerable dynamic bass boost on voice This setting might be appropriate for news and sports The difference will never exceed the difference that would have other wise occurred if the lowest frequency band were gated independently If you are familiar with older Orban processors like the 8282 this is the maximum amount of boost that would have occurred if you had set their DJ Bass Boosr controls to ON The amount of bass boost will be highly dependent on the fundamental frequency of a given voice If the fundamental frequency is far above 100Hz there will be little voice energy in the bottom band and little or no audio bass boost can occur even if the gain of the bottom band is higher than
202. ciently boosted turn the BAND 2 gt 1 COUPLING closer to 0 L Adjust the LiMITER ATTACK TIME controls to taste These controls allow you to set the limiter attack anywhere from 0 to 10096 of normal in the 5 band compressors each of whose gain reduc tion has a fast release limiter and slow release compressor component Because the limiter and compressor characteristics interact you will usu ally get best audible results when you set these controls in the range of 50 to 10096 Below 50 you will usually hear pumping because the compressor function is trying to create some of the gain reduction that the faster limiting function would have otherwise achieved If you hear pumping in a band and you still wish to adjust the limiter attack to a low setting you can sometimes ameliorate or eliminate the pumping by slow ing down the compressor attack time in that band Of course sometimes pumping is desired for certain styles of music and or recording The LIMITER ATTACK TIME controls can help achieve this sound M Adjust the TRANSIENT ENHANCE control to taste This control allows you to insert an audio delay of up to 10 ms in the sidechain of the five band compressor Delaying the gain control signal OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 60 allows attack transients to pass through the multiband compressor un compressed which can increase punch There is a tradeoff between this control and the amount of gain reduction in the look ahead
203. composite isolation transformer CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor COFDM Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex a robust type of digital modulation using many narrow bandwidth low data rate mutually non interfering carriers to achieve an ag gregate high data rate with excellent multipath rejection COM serial data communications port D A or D to A digital to analog converter dBm decibel power measurement 0 dBm 1mW applied to a specified load In audio the load is usually 6000 In this case only 0 dBm 0 775V rms dBu decibel voltage measurement 0 dBu 0 775V RMS For this application the dBm into 600 scale on voltmeters can be read as if it were calibrated in dBu DI digital input DJ disk jockey an announcer who plays records in a club or on the air DO digital output DOS Microsoft disk operating system for IBM compatible PC DSP digital signal processor or processing May also refer to a special type of microprocessor optimized for efficiently executing arithmetic EBU European Broadcasting Union EBS Emergency Broadcasting System U S A EMI electromagnetic interference ESC escape FCC Federal Communications Commission USA regulatory agency FDNR frequency dependent negative resistor an element used in RC active filters FET field effect transistor FFT fast Fourier transform FIFO first in first out 6 12 TECHNICAL DATA
204. cond fast The increase in density caused by setting the RELEASE control to fast settings sounds different from the increase in density caused by setting the Multiband s MULTIBAND RELEASE control to FAST You can trade the two off to produce different effects Unless it is purposely speeded up with the AGC RELEASE control the automatic gain control AGC that occurs in the AGC prior to the multiband compressor makes audio levels more consistent without significantly altering texture Then the multi band compression and associated bass clipper audibly change the density of the sound and dynamically re equalize it as necessary booming bass is tightened weak thin bass is brought up highs are always present and consistent in level The various combinations of AGC and compression offer great flexibility e Light AGC light compression yields a wide sense of dynamics with a small amount of automatic re equalization e Moderate AGC light compression produces an open natural quality with automatic re equalization and increased consistency of frequency balance e Moderate AGC moderate compression gives a more dense sound particularly as the release time of the multiband compressor is sped up e Moderate AGC heavy compression particularly with a FAST multiband release time results in a wall of sound effect which may cause listener fatigue e Adjust the AGC with the AGC Drive control to produce the desired amount of AG
205. connected together and then connected to ground at pin 1 to create a Remote Common A current limited 12 0 source is available on pin 25 If you use 48V connect a 2kO 10 2 watt carbon composition resistor in series with the Remote Common or the terminal to provide current limiting In a high RF environment these wires should be short and should be run through foil shielded cable with the shield connected to CHASSIS GROUND at both ends 2 4 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 6 Connect tally outputs optional See the schematic on page 6 26 The 6300 supports two hardware tally outputs which are NPN open collector and operate with respect to pin 1 common Therefore the voltage applied to the load such as a relay or opto isolator must be positive You can use the 12 VDC source on pin 25 to drive the high side of the load taking into account the fact that the voltage on pin 25 is current limited by a 310 O resistor The tally outputs are protected against reverse polarity To avoid damaging the 6300 limit the current into a tally output to 30 mA DO NOT connect a tally output directly to a low impedance voltage source The tally outputs are not protected against this abuse and the output transistors are likely to burn out When driving a relay or other inductive load connect a diode in re verse polarity across the relay coil to protect the driver transistors from reverse voltage caused by inductive kickback Note that t
206. convenient if you don t expect to use it in the future See step 2 on page 2 21 D The purpose of the MB gate is to prevent background noise from being sucked up when the program material is very quiet See page 3 50 Unless you will be using more than approximately 6dB of compression for special ap plications set the MB GATE THRESHOLD to OFF In the SOFT KNEE and LOOK AHEAD LIMITER presets this is already done The multiband gate only works appropriately when the KNEE and RATIO controls of all bands are set identically which is typically true in broad cast applications We recommend turning off the multiband gate if the individual KNEE and RATIO settings are unequal E If you are using the 5 band structure choose the crossover frequency between bands 1 and 2 via the B1 B2 CROSSOVER control The available settings are 100 Hz and 200 Hz The crossover frequency significantly affects the bass texture and the best way to understand the differences between the two crossover frequen cies is to listen We prefer 100 Hz for most mastering applications be cause it puts most of low instrumental bass energy typically kick drum and bass in band 1 and most vocal fundamentals in band 2 allowing these crucial mix elements to be adjusted more independently F Adjust the 2B DRIVE control 2 band or MB DRIVE control 5 band to achieve the desired amount of multiband gain reduction G Adjust the release time control 2B RELEASE or MB REL
207. crease overshoots that the look ahead limit must eliminate The results are strongly program dependent and must be verified with listening tests to a wide variety of program material Because there are separate controls for music and speech page 3 5 you can set at tack times faster for speech to minimize look ahead limiter artifacts and slower for music to maximize punch and transient definition The ATTACK time controls are calibrated in arbitrary units that very approximately correspond to milliseconds Higher numbers correspond to slower attacks Limiter Attack controls allow you to set the limiter attack anywhere from 0 to 10096 of normal in the 5 band compressor limiters Because the limiter and com pressor characteristics interact you will usually get best audible results when you set these controls in the range of 70 to 100 Below 70 you will usually hear pumping because the compressor function is trying to create some of the gain re duction that the faster limiting function would have otherwise achieved If you hear pumping in a band and you still wish to adjust the limiter attack to a low setting you can sometimes ameliorate or eliminate the pumping by slowing down the com pressor attack time in that band Delta Release controls are differential controls They allow you to vary the release time in any band of the 5 band compressor limiter by setting an offset between the MULTIBAND RELEASE setting and the actual r
208. ctical to drive it with the AGC alone allowing additional headroom for the overshoots that the 6300 s peak limiter would have otherwise removed If you use the low delay output to drive your studio monitor speakers as well as talent headphones which may be necessary if your facility has only one monitor input for both then we recommend connecting a loss of carrier alarm to one of the 6300 s GPI inputs Program this input to mute the monitor output in the event that carrier is lost This simulates normal off air monitor functionality and immediately alerts the staff if the transmitter goes off the air unexpectedly You can program any input for Monitor Mute functionality See Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2 35 for instructions on how to program a GPI input De 1 6 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 11 Set the digital output 1 source A Press the NEXT button B Skip this step if you will not be using digital output 1 Turn the knob to choose one of the following e AGC stereo enhancement equalization and AGC without peak limiting e AGC LIM stereo enhancement equalization AGC and look ahead peak limiting e MULTIBAND stereo enhancement equalization AGC and 2 Band or 5 Band compression without peak limiting e MB LIM stereo enhancement equalization AGC 2 Band or 5 Band com pression and look ahead peak limiting See the notes for step 10 above 12 Set the digital output 2 source A Pres
209. cting 2 3 specifications 6 wiring 2 3 remote control 2 5 remote interface functions controllable by 2 35 1 8 programming GPI 2 35 testing 4 11 wiring 2 3 remote interface connector 2 5 resolution specification 6 1 5 1 right channel balance setup 2 22 RJ45 jack 2 37 Rock format 3 24 routine maintenance 4 1 5232 testing 4 11 RS 232 connector 2 5 RS 232 interface circuit description 6 6 Rumble Filter 3 31 S sample rate at digital output 6 3 internal specification 6 1 setting output 2 16 sample rate 1 16 sample rate converter testing 4 10 saving user presets 3 6 13 screen display 3 1 Screens System Setup 2 12 Security lock immediately 2 33 security 1 23 security 2 31 Serial Communications setting up 2 47 serial connection setting up direct 2 38 serial connector 2 5 service 5 12 setup 2 20 quick 2 12 setup button 3 1 shelving equalizer bass slope of 3 8 shipping instructions 5 12 Show date 2 20 shrill sound troubleshooting 5 3 Sibilance 5 4 signal flow diagram 6 41 smooth jazz 3 24 soft buttons 3 1 Software updating 8500 2 68 software updates 1 5 Sound Technology 4 6 sound for picture processing 3 6 spare parts obtaining 6 13 specifications 6 1 speech music detector 3 5 Sports format 3 23 sta
210. cting the power supply to the control board There are two connectors unplug both Note the lead dress so you can reassemble the unit correctly G Remove the twelve 1 Phillips screws and their washers that connect the l O DSP board to the chassis H Carefully pull the l O DSP board toward the front panel to clear the XLRs from their housings Then lift the board out of the chassis 5 Removing the Power Supply IMPORTANT The power supply has no user serviceable components because re placing components with other than exact replacements could cause the supply to become unsafe and or to generate unacceptable EMI If the power supply fails please contact Orban Customer Service custservGorban com to obtain an exact replacement A Verify that the 6300 is disconnected from the AC line B If you have not done so yet remove the top cover step 1 above C Remove the screw holding the power supply s insulating cover and remove the cover For safety this cover must always be in place when the 6300 is con nected to the AC line 4 4 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 6300 D Remove the plug that connects the power supply to the AC line socket E Unplug the cable connecting the output of the power supply to the 0 05 board F Using a hex nutdriver remove the threaded standoff that supports the power supply s insulating cover G Remove the three Phillips screws holding the power supply to the main chas sis H Carefully
211. cture Applications If you are using a 2 band structure make sure that the Loudness Controller is acti vated on the preset that you are using the LOUD CNTR THRESH control must not be set see page 3 43 If the Loudness Controller is active but you do not believe it is working hard enough set its threshold lower using the LOUD CNTR THRESH control Note that the Loudness Controller controls subjective loudness to an absolute threshold and does not understand the context of the program Therefore if a commercial follows a piece of very quiet program material the commercial may still seem loud even though the Loudness Controller is working properly The 5 band structure does not have a Loudness Controller because its 5 band proc essing intrinsically makes loudness from source to source much more uniform than does the 2 band structure when its Loudness Controller is defeated For some pro gram material the 2 band structure with Loudness Controller enabled will control loudness slightly more effectively than will the 5 band structure For such material you may wish to use a preset that employs the 2 band structure with loudness con trol System Will Not Pass Line Up Tones at 100 Modulation This is normal Sine waves have a very low peak to average ratio by comparison to program material The processing thus automatically reduces their peak level to bring their average level closer to program material promoting a more consistent
212. current operating mode set MODE gt OUT to ON If this parameter is set to OFF then the 6300 will output 0000 mode not indicated This is probably the safest available mode if you are un certain whether downstream equipment can respond appropriately to these bits 22 Set up response to AES3 user bits optional The 6300 can pass AES user bits from its input to digital output 1 The default behavior is to block these bits because they may cause downstream equipment to respond in unexpected ways Because the vast majority of audio applications make no use of User Bits we recommend keeping the 6300 s USER BITS control set to BLOCK default setting which configures the User Bit channels of both Digital Out 1 and Digital Out 2 to contain all zeros Setting the 6300 s USER BITS control to 55 DO1 will cause the User Bit channel of Digital Out 1 to be filled with the bits received from the User Bit channel of the signal feeding the 6300 s Digital In We recommend such setting only if your facility requires it and all three of the following conditions are met e The sample rate of your digital source feeding 6300 s Digital In is no higher than 48kHz e 6300 DO1 SYNC setting INPUT 6300 IN gt MODE setting OFF Unless all of the above conditions are met the user bit passthrough may lose data To enable the 6300 to pass user bits from its digital input to its digital output navigate to SETUP gt NETWORK amp REMOTE gt AE
213. d 1 2 3 and 4 to create a passcode Passcodes can be up to eight characters long but can only contain the characters 1 2 3 and 4 This limitation makes it easy to enter passcode using the four available soft buttons C When you have finished entering your new passcode write it down so you do not forget it Then press the NEXT button If you wish to discard the passcode you just entered press the Esc button instead Then return to step B D The PERMISSIONS screen appears Turn the knob to choose the permission level for the passcode you just created If you wish to discard the passcode you just entered press the PREV but ton to return to the Enter Passcode screen or Esc to return to the Secu rity screen E Press the NEXT button to save your new passcode To Edit a Passcode A Navigate to SETUP SECURITY VIEW EDIT PASSCODES If the front panel is already password protected you can only access this screen by entering a passcode with ALL ACCESS privileges OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 33 B Turn the knob until you see the passcode you want to edit C Press the NExT button The Permissions screen appears D Turn the knob to set the desired permission level for the passcode you are ed iting E Press the NEXT button to confirm your choice Your new permission level is stored and the Security menu appears To Delete a Passcode A Navigate to SETUP SECURITY DELETE P
214. d then store those changes You can store more than 100 User Presets limited only by available memory in your 6300 which will vary depending on the version of your 6300 s software You can give your preset a name up to 18 characters long User Presets cannot be created from scratch You must always start by recalling a Factory Preset Make the changes and then store your modified preset as a User Preset You can also recall a previously created user preset modify it and save it again either overwriting the old version or saving under a new name In all cases the original Factory Preset remains for you to return to if you wish User Presets inherit the structure of their parent Factory Presets b band or 2 band The only way you can choose the structure of a factory preset is to edit it from a Fac tory preset having that structure or to edit it from an older User Preset having the desired structure You cannot change the structure that an existing User Preset uses User Presets are stored in non volatile memory that does not require battery backup To Create or Save a User Preset on page 3 13 has more about User Presets Input Output Configuration OPTIMOD 6300 simultaneously accommodates e Digital AES3 left right inputs and dual outputs e Analog left right inputs and outputs OPTIMOD 6300 can be operated in either stereo or dual mono mode In dual mono mode processing parameters that determine the sound of the proces
215. d and automatically reboots the SC520 The DSP chips will continue to process audio until the time comes to reload DSP program code into them At this point the audio will mute for about a second until the DSP code download has finished If you hear a short audio mute this may be because the 6300 has rebooted for some reason Of course it could also be caused by the 6300 s audio feed s being interrupted Be prepared to convey this fact to Orban customer service if you call for technical assistance 6 6 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 The control board contains interface circuitry the CPU the Ethernet interface chip the flash memory the DRAM the RS 232 serial interface circuitry the GPI O interface circuitry and the real time clock which keeps time for the 6300 s automation func tions The real time clock is backed up by a DL2032 battery so that it keeps accurate time even when the 6300 is powered down The battery is socketed and can be readily accessed by removing the 6300 s top cover the battery is located on the con trol board User Control Interface and LCD Display Circuits The user control interface enables the user to control the 6300 s functionality A rear panel GPI connector allows optically isolated remote control of certain functions such as recalling presets via contact closure An RS 232 serial port and an Ethernet port allow you to connect a modem or computer to the 6300 Front panel pushbut ton switches select b
216. d otherwise have been masked to become unmasked because the psychoacoustic masking conditions under which the masking thresholds were originally computed have changed Accordingly if you use lossy data reduction in the studio you should use the highest data rate possible This maximizes the headroom between the added noise and the threshold where it will be heard In addition you should minimize the number of encode and decode cycles because each cycle moves the added noise closer to the threshold where the added noise is heard Interfacing to the Transmitter Sync Input In the Eureka 147 system several programs are combined into one ensemble mul tiplex This requires synchronization of the sample rates applied to the transmitter DTV and HD Radio also require synchronization The 6300 provides connector that accepts house sync in AES11id 750 un balanced or wordclock square wave at the sample frequency format A setup menu selection determines whether the 6300 s output will be synchronized to word clock AES11 the 6300 s internal clock or the signal applied to its AES3 audio input Because the 6300 s digital input is equipped with a sample rate converter an asyn chronous digital input can be applied to the 6300 while its output is synchronized to a master sync generator AES User Bits In Setup you can configure the 6300 to either block or pass AES User Bits from its digital input to its digital output Sample
217. d output does not e 63005 outputs can be independently configured to emit the output of the AGC or the output of the multiband compressor limiter all configurable to use or bypass look ahead limiting So a 6300 can be configured to drive an STL with a peak limited output from the AGC while also providing a fully processed digital radio netcast feed and a low delay multiband com pressed talent headphone feed e OPTIMOD 6300 controls the audio bandwidth as necessary to accommodate the transmitted sample frequency OPTIMOD 6300 s high frequency bandwidth can be switched instantly typically in 1 kHz increments between 10 kHz and 20 kHz 20 kHz is used for highest quality systems 15 kHz meets the requirements of any system that uses 32 kHz sample frequency while 10 kHz is appropriate for 24 kHz sample frequency e The 6300 s dual mono mode allows entirely separate mono programs to be processed facilitating dual language operation In this mode both processing channels operate using the same process ing parameters like release time you cannot adjust the two channels to provide different processing textures e The analog inputs are transformerless balanced 10kQ instrumentation amplifier circuits and the analog outputs are transformerless balanced and floating with 500 impedance to ensure highest transparency and accurate pulse response e All input output and power connections are rigorously RFl suppressed to Or
218. d packing if you choose to use the factory service facility Returned units will be returned C O D if the unit is not under warranty Orban will pay return shipping if the unit is still under warranty In all cases the customer pays transportation charges to the factory which are usually quite nominal Shipping Instructions Use the original packing material if it is available If it is not use a sturdy double walled carton no smaller than 7 H x 15 5 D x 22 W 18 cm H x 40 cm D x 56 cm W with a minimum bursting test rating of 200 pounds 91 kg Place the chassis in a plastic bag or wrap it in plastic to protect the finish then pack it in the carton with at least 1 5 inches 4 cm of cushioning on all sides of the unit Bubble packing sheets thick fiber blankets and the like are acceptable cushioning materi als foam popcorn and crumpled newspaper are not Wrap cushioning materials tightly around the unit and tape them in place to prevent the unit from shifting out of its packing OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5 1 3j Close the carton without sealing it and shake it vigorously If you can hear or feel the unit move use more packing Seal the carton with 3 inch 8 cm reinforced fi berglass or polyester sealing tape top and bottom in an H pattern Narrower or parcel post type tapes will not withstand the stresses applied to commercial ship ments Mark the package with the name of the shipper
219. d to complement FLAT preemphasis As explained above you must turn down the FINAL DRIVE control when using preemphasis The 2 band Structure The 2 band structure consists of a stereo enhancer a slow 2 band gated AGC for gain riding an equalization section a gated 2 band compressor and a low IM look ahead limiter A CBS Loudness Controller which is primarily useful for sound for picture applications can be activated to control subjectively perceived loudness The 6300 s 2 band Structure can be made phase linear throughout to maximize sonic transparency However you can also choose an allpass crossover structure see AGC CROSSOVER on page 3 37 The 2 band structure has an open easy to listen to sound that is similar to the source material if the source material is of good quality We recommend using it when you want to preserve the spectral balance of the source material while not significantly increasing program density Hence it is mainly useful for unobtrusive gain riding in sound for picture applications where its loudness controller can be useful and in fine arts programming If you need processing for loudness and or processing that automatically corrects spectral balance inconsistency in the source material we recom mend using the 5 band structure instead There are several 2 band presets These are listed in Table 3 2 Radio Style Presets on page 3 20 The Protection presets have the same Intermediate and A
220. ddress Screen appears OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 37 a Use the NExT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the IP address Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value Repeat until you have selected all the numbers in the IP address assigned by your network administrator b Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting C Set the Subnet Mask assigned by your network administrator if necessary a Press the SET SUBNET Mask soft button b Use the Next and Prev keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the subnet mask Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value Repeat until you have selected all the numbers in the subnet mask assigned by your network administrator C Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting D Set the Gateway assigned by your network administrator if necessary a Press the GATEWAY soft button b Use the Next and Prev keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the gateway Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value Repeat until you have selected all the numbers in the gateway assigned by your network administrator C Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting E Set the IP Port assigned by your network administrator if necessary a Press the IP soft button b Use the Next and Prev keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the IP port Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value Repeat unti
221. des analog input digital input Filtering RFI filtered Tally Outputs Circuit Configuration Two NPN open collector outputs 6 4 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 Voltage 15 volts maximum Do not apply negative voltage When driving a relay or other inductive load connect a diode in reverse polarity across the relay coil to protect the driver transistors from reverse voltage caused by inductive kickback Current 30 mA maximum Indications Tally outputs can be programmed to indicate a number of different operational and fault conditions including Input Analog Input Digital Analog Input Silent AES In put Silent and AES Input Error Power Voltage 85 264 VAC 50 60 Hz 30 VA Connector IEC EMI suppressed Detachable 3 wire power cord supplied Fuse 2 5A 20mm Quick Acting HBC mounted on the power supply circuit board Grounding Circuit ground is independent of chassis ground and can be isolated or con nected with a rear panel switch Safety Standards ETL listed to UL standards CE marked Environmental Operating Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C for all operating voltage ranges Humidity 0 95 RH non condensing Dimensions W x H x D 19 x 1 75 x 14 25 48 3 cm x 4 5 cm x 36 2 cm One rack unit high Humidity 0 95 RH non condensing RFI EMI Tested according to Cenelec procedures FCC Part 15 Class A device Shipping Weight 10 16 4 6 kg Warranty Two Years Parts and Servic
222. direct trade off between loudness and distortion You can improve one only at the expense of one or both of the other two Thanks to Orban s psychoacoustically optimized designs this is less true of Orban processors than of any others Nevertheless all intelligent processor designers must acknowledge and work within the laws of physics as they apply to this trade off In AM and FM processing we have long said that there is a direct trade off between loudness brightness and distortion However because DAB and netcasting systems don t use preemphasis there is no problem get ting the audio to sound bright and the trade off is only between loud ness and distortion 3 4 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Perhaps the most difficult part of adjusting a processor is determining the best trade off for a given situation We feel that it is usually wiser to give up ultimate loudness to achieve low distortion A listener can compensate for loudness by simply adjusting the volume control However a listener cannot make an excessively com pressed or peak limited signal sound clean again If processing for high quality is done carefully the sound will also be excellent on small radios Although such a signal might fall slightly short of ultimate loudness it will tend to compensate with an openness depth and punch even on small speak ers that cannot be obtained when the signal is excessively squashed If women form a significant portion of the stat
223. dvanced Modify controls available as the 2 band structure and use the same DSP configuration but with the stereo enhancer AGC and equalizer defeated Customizing the Settings Each 2 band Factory Preset has a LEss MORE control located in the Basic Modify screen that adjusts loudness LEss MORE simultaneously adjusts all of the processing controls to optimize the trade offs between unwanted side effects as processing levels are decreased or increased OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL If you wish you may adjust the Modify parameters to your own taste Always start with LESS MORE to get as close to your desired sound as possible Then edit the Mod ify parameters using the Basic Intermediate or Advanced Modify screen and save those edits to a User Preset The 2 band Structure s Full and Advanced Setup Controls The tables below show a summary of the 2 band controls in the dynamics section AGC Equalizer Stereo Enhancer and look ahead limiter controls are common to both 2 band and 5 band structures and are described in the pages above Some of the 2 band controls are common to the Full Modify and Advanced Modify screens with additional 2 band controls available in the Advanced Modify screen Note that advanced controls are accessible only from 6300 PC Remote software 2B DRIVE control adjusts signal level going into the 2 band compressor determin ing the amount of gain reduction in the 2 band compressor Regardless of the release ti
224. e 2 32 To Delete a Passcode s ict cerca gie dera rrr i Gd ra a 2 33 To Lock the Front Panel 0 2 33 To Program local lOCKOUt aae iste dit eee e a 2 33 To Unlock the Front Panel 2 34 Dial up Networking and the 55 0 2 34 If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode sss tnnt 2 34 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING 1 1 11 4 2 35 NETWORKING AND REMOTE CONTROL 2 36 SYNCHRONIZING OPTIMOD TO A NETWORK TIME 2 38 Table 2 1 NIST referenced timeservers 2 39 INSTALLING 6300 PC REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE 2 42 Installing the Necessary Windows 5 5 2 42 Check Hardware 5 essi sienne either nhan nennen nnn 2 43 Running the Orban Installer 00 1 2 43 Setting Up Ethernet LAN and VPN Connections
225. e Subject to the limitations set forth in Orban s Standard Warranty Agreement Because engineering improvements are ongoing specifications are subject to change with out notice Circuit Description This section provides a detailed description of user serviceable circuits used in the 6300 We do not provide detailed descriptions of the digital circuitry because most of this is built with surface mount components that cannot be removed or replaced with typical tools available in the field Field repair ordinarily consists of swapping entire PC boards The section starts with an overview of the 6300 system identifying circuit sections and describing their purpose Then each user repairable section is treated in detail by first giving an overview of the circuits followed by a component by component description The drawing on page 6 21 shows circuit board locations OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 5 Overview e The Control Circuits control the DSP display and input output sections of the 6300 system e The Input Circuits include the connectors and RF filtering for the analog and digital audio inputs the digital sync input and the circuitry to interface these inputs to the digital processing e The Output Circuits include the connectors and RF filtering for the analog and digital audio outputs and the circuitry to interface the digital processing to these outputs e The DSP Circuits implement the bypass test tone
226. e FINAL DRIVE control drives the look ahead limiter harder reduc ing the peak to average ratio and increasing loudness When the amount of limit ing is increased the audible intermodulation distortion caused by limiting increases even though special algorithms minimize the increase compared to less sophisticated designs Lower settings reduce loudness of course but result in a cleaner sound When you use OPTIMOD PC in a preemphasized mode step 7 on page 2 23 and step 8 on page 2 23 this inserts a frequency dependent high frequency boost before the look ahead limiter This boost can be as large as 20 dB at 20 kHz When using pre emphasis you must turn down the FINAL LIMIT DRIVE control to prevent the look ahead limiter from causing audible gain pumping Distortion Control Adjustments Nam Range 1 i AGC Final Limit Drive 20 0 12 0 dB Bass Clip Shape 0 0 10 0 Bass Clip Threshold 10 0 10 00 dB OFF Multiband Final Limit Drive 20 0 12 0 dB Speech Bass Clip Threshold 10 0 10 00 dB OFF Table 3 7 Distortion Control Adjustments 3 40 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 You may find it illuminating to recall several Factory Presets adjust LESS MORE to several points in its range and then open the Full Control screen to examine the trade offs between the release time and FINAL Limit drive made by the factory programmers However note that all Factory Presets were create
227. e dynamic range of a significant portion of video source material must be compressed to best serve the audience The challenge which Optimod 6300 effectively meets is to compress dy namic range unobtrusively OPTIMOD 6300 can be adjusted so that the output sounds as close as possible to the input at all times using the 2 band Protection Limiter preset or so that it sounds open but more uniform in frequency balance than the input using the 2 band struc ture or running the 5 band Structure with slow release time or so that it sounds dense quite squashed and very loud using the 5 band Structure with faster release times The dense loud setup is almost always inappropriate for sound for picture unless the station has unusual programming and goals Most stations will want to use sim ple protection processing when broadcasting material that has been carefully pro duced by people cognizant of the dynamic range limitations of sound for picture For most other program material the 2 band or Slow 5 band structures are appro priate The subjective setup controls on the 6300 give you the flexibility to adapt the proc essing to individual program segments In most cases your goal should be to choose the type of processing that best optimizes dynamic range while controlling the loudness of the loudest sounds so that they are not irritating and are consistent with the loudness of other stations or sources About the 6300 s Signal Processing
228. e from Orban The exact process will vary depending on how you wish to set up the communications That is e f you want to communicate through a local PC you have two choices e Establish a connection between a serial COM port of the PC and the COM port of your 9300 through a null modem cable and use Windows Direct Se rial Connect to make the basic connection e Use a crossover Ethernet cable to communicate to your PC through its Ethernet port e f you want to communicate through a pair of modems you will use the Win dows Dial Up networking service to make the connection You must install the appropriate communications services in Windows if they are not already installed before you can run 6300 Remote software You may therefore need to have access to the Windows install disk s or have their im age copied onto your computer s hard drive before you attempt to use the 6300 PC Remote application OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 43 In all cases regardless of whether your PC communicates to the 6300 through its serial port or Ethernet connector it uses the ppp and the TCP IP protocols to communicate with the 6300 Check Hardware Requirements To connect your PC to your 6300 regardless of the method you choose you will need the following e Orban 6300 OPTIMOD 6300 e f connecting by serial cable a null modem cable also called a reverse cable This cable has DB9 female connectors at both ends for co
229. e internal 48 kHz sample rate so slight overshoot can occur If your mastered audio is intended for transmission via a lossy codec like AAC MP3 or WMA be aware that the codec s decoder may overshoot and cause audible clipping distortion See Setting Output Modulation Levels on page 1 20 If the 6300 s output is applied directly to a lossy co dec decrease the setting of the 6300 s output level control to allow the necessary headroom If the 6300 s output is applied to a linear PCM stor age medium like a CD it is better to use the entire dynamic range of the linear medium by setting the 6300 s output level close to 0 dBfs Then compensate for codec overshoots by reducing gain when you transcode from the linear PCM recording to the codec OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4 1 Section 4 Maintenance Routine Maintenance The Optimod 6300 Audio Processor uses highly stable analog and digital circuitry throughout Recommended routine maintenance is minimal 1 Periodically check audio level and gain reduction meter readings Become familiar with normal audio level meter readings and with the normal performance of the G R metering If any meter reading is abnormal see Section 5 for troubleshooting information 2 Listen to the 6300 s output A good ear will pick up many faults Familiarize yourself with the sound of the 6300 as you have set it up and be sensitive to changes or deterioration How ever if problems arise
230. e several presets with different settings of the MB DOWN EXPANDER control and to recall the preset that complements the program ma terial of the moment Note also that it is virtually impossible to achieve undetectable dynamic noise reduc tion of program material that is extremely noisy to begin with because the program never masks the noise It is probably wiser to defeat the dynamic noise reduction with this sort of material traffic reports from helicopters and the like to avoid ob jectionable side effects You must let your ears guide you Band 5 is particularly critical for noise reduction because much of the Downward Ex pander s utility lies in hiss reduction Hiss has most of its energy in band 5 while program material typically has less energy in this band so the B5 DOWN EXPANDER DELTA THRESHOLD control s setting is critical to removing hiss while minimizing re moval of desired program energy Starting in V1 1 the Downward Expander s dynamic frequency response is no longer constrained to being strictly lowpass Band 5 is now uncoupled from the lower bands so the band 5 downward expander can produce less gain reduction than other bands This can help prevent loss of desired high frequency material in the program gt 4 CPL Band 3 gt 4 Coupling control determines the extent to which the gains of bands 4 centered at 3 7 kHz and 5 above 6 2 kHz are determined by and fol lows the gain of band 3 centered at 1 kHz Set
231. e stereo mono detector s threshold Mono music with a speech like envelope may be incorrectly detected as speech Music incorrectly detected as speech will exhibit a slight loss of loudness and punch but misdetection will never cause objectionable distortion on music Speech that is not located in the center of the stereo sound field will always be de tected as music because the detector always identifies stereo material as music Optimod 6300 in Radio Oriented Applications From Bach to Rock The 6300 can be adjusted so that the output sounds e asclose as possible to the input at all times using the 2 band Protection Limiter preset e open but more uniform in frequency balance and often more dramatic than the input using the 2 band structure or running the 5 band Structure with slow release time e dense quite squashed and very loud using the 5 band Structure with faster re lease times The dense loud setup will make the audio seem to jump out of car and table radios but may be fatiguing and invite tune outs on higher quality home receivers The loudness distortion trade off explained above applies to any of these setups In professional broadcasting environments you will achieve best results if Engineer ing Programming and Management go out of their way to communicate and co operate with each other It is important that Engineering understand the sound that Programming desires and that Management fully unde
232. e sure they are set up correctly A Click Start Programs Accessories Communications Network Connections to bring up the Network Connections screen B In the Network Connections window right click Optimod 6300 Modem and choose Properties The Properties window opens for Optimod 6300 Modem OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5 1 1 C Click the Networking tab D Set Type of dial up server am calling to PPP Windows 95 98 2000 Internet E Select the Settings button Make sure all PPP settings are unchecked and then click OK F In This connection uses the following items uncheck all except for Internet Protocol TCP IP You can also leave QoS Packet Scheduler checked if you like G In This connection uses the following items select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click the Properties button The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens H Choose Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically 1 Click the Advanced button on the Internet Protocol TCP IP Window J In the Advanced TCP IP Settings select the General Tab make sure that no check boxes are checked K Click OK to dismiss the Advanced TCP IP Settings window L Click OK to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection M Restart your computer This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood that you wil
233. e the new controls with the default values unless you edit any of these values before you re archive the preset A Select RESTORE FROM PC from the FiLE menu A standard Windows dialog box will open B Select the type of files you want to restore using the FILES OF TYPE field at the bottom of the dialog box You can select to restore all user presets orb63user 6300 user presets orb63user system files orb63setup and automation files orb63autom If you want to restore files from a different directory i e that might have been created on a different 6300 navigate to that directory from within the dialog box C To restore a single user preset a Set the FiLES field to a user preset file type orb63user b Select the desired preset in the dialog box c Click the RESTORE button D To restore all the user presets from a specific location a Set the FiLES OF TYPE field to a user preset file type orb63user 3 62 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 b Highlight all the user presets in the dialog window C Click the RESTORE button E To restore a system file a Set the FILES OF TYPE field to the System Setup file type orb63setup b Select the desired system file in the dialog box C Click the RESTORE button F To restore an automation file Set the FiLES TYPE field to the Automation file type orb63autom b Select the desired automation file in the dialog box C C
234. e their contents by copying it from their associated 6300s when 6300 PC Remote connects to such a 6300 Multiple Installations of Optimod 6300 PC Remote Rarely you may want to have more than one installation of 6300 PC Remote on your computer There are a few extra things to know if you have multiple installations If you install a new version of the Optimod 6300 PC Remote software on your PC any Alias folders and backup subfolders created in an earlier software version still remain in their original location on your PC and in its registry 3 64 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 The version of 6300 PC Remote must match the version of the software in the 6300 controlled by it Therefore you will only need multiple installations of PC Remote having separate version numbers if e you are controlling multiple 6300s and e not all of your 6300s are running the same version of 6300 software and e you do not want to upgrade at least one controlled 6300 to the latest version of 6300 PC Remote software Each version of 6300 PC Remote has its own top level folder normally under Program Files Orban The default folder is Program Files Orban Optimod 6300 When you install a new version of 6300 PC Remote the default behavior is to over write the old version which is usually the desired behavior To prevent the installer from overwriting the old version you must specify a different installation folder when you install the new version for e
235. ech eoe ie 0 0 DB b Navigate to SETUP lO CALIB ANALOG CALIB ANLG OUT Set controls as follows S 10 0 DBU ee FLAT AQ FEEDS E S MB LIMIT Navigate to SETUP gt lO CALIB gt DIGITAL CALIB Set controls as follows EE 15 0 DBFS aW hut 0 0 DB d Navigate to SETUP gt IO CALIB gt DIGITAL CALIB gt DO1 Set controls as follows Use the NEXT button as necessary to scroll the screen horizontally 001 100 c ete ee ne eee 2 8 dBFS AeA ae ERE FLAT DOT RATE tuner ie iv cie ie etl 48 kHz Lim aie ER REDEEM INTERNAL DO1 WORD cise ee cee 20 AAR E T eae Out DO31 ERMT iv sac aerate cen a ai wae eden ae AES DOTSOURGE iere ne RE rep RH RETE Rer eee MB LIMIT e Repeat step d for Digital Output 2 DO2 f Navigate to SETUP gt TEST Set controls as follows using the NEXT button to access controls as necessary MODE REINES Bypass NOTE Bypass defeats all compression limiting and program equaliza tion but retains the selected preemphasis either flat 50us or 754 BYPASS GAIN aiii 0 dB TONE FREQ itinere 400 Hz 100 4 8 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 6300 g Navigate to SETUP and set controls as follows Scroll the display by using the NEXT and PREv bu
236. ed In the Advanced TCP IP Settings select the DNS Tab M In the Advanced TCP IP Settings select the WINS Tab N Click OK to dismiss the Advanced TCP IP Settings window O Click OK to dismiss the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window P Click OK to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection Q Click Cancel to dismiss the Connect nnnn dialog box R Restart your computer This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood 5 T that you will encounter problems connecting to the 6300 If you see Error 777 The connection failed because the modem or other connecting device on the remote computer is out of order The remote computer is actually the 6300 and it is not out of order you just need to set the Maximum Speed Bits per second to 115200 If you already set this speed when you configured your PC ports you shouldn t have this problem The 6300 communicates at 115200 bps COM ports on some older PCs are incapable of communications at this rate and may not work reliably Most newer PCs use 16550 compatible UARTS which support the 115200 bps rate If you do see this warning message you can reset the Maximum BPS Speed by accessing PROPERTIES for the connection a Click START PROGRAMS ACCESSORIES COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND DIAL UP CONNECTIONS b Right click the name of your connection and access Properties Go to the Generals tab and selec
237. ed away from heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other appliances including amplifiers that produce heat Power Sources The appliance should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the appliance Grounding or Polarization Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization means of an appliance is not defeated Power Cord Protection Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them paying particular attention to cords at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the appliance Cleaning The appliance should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer Non Use Periods The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time Object and Liquid Entry Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings Damage Requiring Service The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or Objects have fallen or liquid has been spilled into the appliance or The appliance has been exposed to rain or The appliance does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance or The appliance has been dropped or the enclosure damaged Servicing T
238. ed resistors and capacitors There are solder pads available the PC board to accept an optional 6000 termination load R106 on the input signal if the user wishes to install one A conven tional three opamp instrumentation amplifier 100 and associated circuitry receives the input signal R110 114 and quad analog switch IC101 make up the circuit that sets the gain of IC100 The switches in IC101 set the gain of the in strumentation amplifier by switching resistors in parallel with R104 Smaller total resistances produce larger gains IC100 feeds IC104 and associated components This stage balances DC biases and scales the signal to the proper level for the analog to digital A D con verter 107 IC105A and associated components comprise a servo amp to cor rectly DC bias the signal feeding the A D converter R137 139 C109 C110 make an attenuator RC filter necessary to filter high frequency energy that would otherwise cause aliasing distortion in the A D converter The corresponding right channel circuitry is functionally identical to that just described IC100 102 are socketed for easy field replacement other circuitry is sur face mounted and is not field replaceable 2 Stereo Analog to Digital A D Converter Located on input output DSP board The A D converter 107 is a stereo 24 bit sigma delta converter This is a sur face mount part and is not field replaceable The A D oversamples the audio
239. ed them from the 6300 s front panel The PC Remote application also allows you to archive pre sets to your computer s hard drive or other storage device and to re store them However archiving a preset is not the same as saving it Ar chived presets reside on a storage medium supported by your computer while saved presets reside in the 6300 s local non volatile memory You cannot archive a preset until you have saved it See To back up user pre sets system files and automation files onto your computer s hard drive on page 3 60 Note that if for some reason you wish to save an unmodified preset ei ther Factory or user under a new name you must temporarily make an arbitrary edit to that preset in order to make the SAvE PRESET button ap pear After you have saved the preset reverse the edit and save the pre set again About the Processing Structures If you want to create your own User Presets the following detailed discussion of the processing structures is important to understand If you only use Factory Presets or if you only modify them with LEss MORE you may still find the material interesting but you do not need to understand it to get excellent sound from the 6300 We have carefully designed the 6300 s factory presets and most users will not need to go beyond these In the 6300 a processing structure is a program that operates as a complete audio processing system Only one processing structure can be active at a ti
240. ef fectively 2B REL 2B Release control determines how fast the 2 band compressor releases and therefore how quickly loudness increases when the level of the program mate rial decreases This release time only applies when the silence gate does not gate the 2 band Compressor The control can be adjusted from 0 5 dB second slow to 20 dB second fast Set tings toward 20 dB second result in a more consistently loud output while settings toward 0 5 dB second allow a wider variation of dynamic range Both the setting of the 2B REL control and the dynamics and level of the program material determine the actual release time of the compressor With faster 2B REL control settings above 8 dB second the sound will change sub stantially with the amount of gain reduction in the 2 band compressor This means that you should activate the gain riding AGC to ensure that the 2 band compressor is always being driven at the level that produces the amount of gain reduction de sired Decide based on listening tests how much gain reduction gives you the density that you want without creating a feeling of over compression and fatigue For most applications we recommend using slower release rates because applications that could use faster 2 band release rates are usually better suited to 5 band processing 5 band processing minimizes the undesirable artifacts that fast release rates can produce The release rate in dB second in the 2 band compressor
241. elease time you achieve in a given band For example if you set the MULTIBAND RELEASE control to medium fast and the BAND 3 DELTA GR control to 2 then the band 3 release time will be the same as if you had set the MULTIBAND RELEASE control to medium and set the BAND 3 DELTA GR control to 0 Thus your settings automatically track any changes you make in the MULTIBAND RELEASE control In our example the release time in band 3 will always be two click stops slower than the setting of the MULTIBAND RELEASE control If your setting of a given DELTA RELEASE control would otherwise create a release slower than slow or faster than fast the two end stops of the MULTIBAND RELEASE control the band in question will instead set its release time at the appro priate end stop Bx Compression Ratio See page 3 45 3 56 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Note that the multiband gate only works appropriately when the KNEE and RATIO controls of all bands are set identically which is typically the case in broadcast appli cations We recommend turning off the multiband gate if the individual KNEE and RATIO settings are unequal Bx Knee See page 3 46 Bx Breakpoint See page 3 46 B1 B2 Crossover Band 1 to Band 2 Crossover Frequency sets the crossover fre quency between bands 1 and 2 to either 100 Hz or 200 Hz It significantly affects the bass texture and the best way to understand the differences between the two cross over frequencies i
242. ements cost 35 00 2 3 4 5 Avoid scratching the paint or plating Set the unit on soft clean surfaces Do not cut the grounding pin from the line cord Use care and proper tools in removing and tightening screws to avoid burring the heads gt YH Use the nylon washered rack screws supplied if possible to avoid damaging the panel Support the unit when tighten ing the screws so that the threads do not scrape the paint inside the slotted holes Packin When you pack the unit for shipping 1 Tighten all screws on any barrier strip s so the screws do not fall out from vibration 2 Wrap the unit in its original plastic bag to avoid abrading the paint 3 Seal the inner and outer cartons with tape If you are returning the unit permanently for credit be sure to enclose The Manual s The Registration Warranty Card The Line Cord All Miscellaneous Hardware including the Rack Screws and Keys The Extender Card if applicable The Monitor Rolloff Filter s OPTIMOD AM only The COAX Connecting Cable OPTIMOD 6300 and OPTIMOD 6300 only Your dealer may charge you for any missing items If you are returning a unit for repair do not enclose any of the above items Further advice on proper packing and shipping is included in the Manual see Table of Contents Trouble If you have problems with installation or operation 1 Check everything you have done so far against the instructions in the Manual T
243. en OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 43 2B GATE 2B Gate Threshold threshold control determines the lowest input level that will be recognized as program material by OPTIMOD 6300 lower levels are con sidered to be noise or background sounds and will cause the AGC or 2 band com pressor to gate effectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing There are two independent gating circuits in the 6300 2 band structure The first af fects the AGC and the second affects the 2 band compressor Each has its own threshold control The 2 band gain reduction will eventually recover to 0 dB when the RELEASE SHAPE is set to LINEAR or to the setting of the 2B DRIVE control when the RELEASE SHAPE is set to Exp However recovery is slow enough to be imperceptible This avoids OPTIMOD 6300 s getting stuck with a large amount of gain reduction on a long low level musical passage immediately following a loud passage In ExP release mode the 2 band gate s gated gain reduction is the same as the setting of the 2B DRIvE CONTROL which is similar to the behavior of the AGC gate This is because ExP release is mainly useful in sound for picture processing and is used in the TV 2B GEN PuRPOSE and TV 2B GEN PuRP LC presets In these presets the AGC is defeated so that all gain riding can occur in the 2 band compressor See AGC dle Gain on page 3 36 for a more complete discussion It is common to set the 2B GATE control between approximately 35
244. ent headphone proces sor Any output can emit any of the following signals e Stereo enhancement equalization and AGC without look ahead peak limiting e Stereo enhancement equalization and AGC with peak limiting e Stereo enhancement equalization and multiband processing 2 band or 5 band including AGC without peak limiting e Stereo enhancement equalization and multiband processing 2 band or 5 band including AGC with peak limiting In a typical application OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 e 6300 substitutes for the AGC an Optimod at the transmitter and provides protection limiting for the STL Digital output 1 emits the peak limited output of the AGC to drive the STL The AGC is turned off in the transmitter side Optimod See Studio Transmitter Link on page 1 12 for more about STLs If the STL has at least 16 bits of dynamic range it is often practical to drive it with the AGC alone allowing additional headroom for the over shoots that the 6300 s peak limiter would have otherwise removed De feating the peak limiter by setting the output to AGC or Multiband will remove about 16 milliseconds of delay from the signal path Note that when the limiter is bypassed the delay is minimum regardless of the set ting of the Proc DELAY controls The 6300 s AGC uses the same dual band window gated matrix technol ogy as the AGCs in Orban s 2300 5300 8300 8382 8400 8500 9300 and 9400 Optim
245. ent sample rate conver sion will not add overshoot caused by spectral truncation Wordclock AES11id Sync Input The sync input accepts a standard 5V p p squarewave wordclock signal or an AES11id 750 signal selected in software A menu item allows you to synchronize the output sample frequency to the frequency present at the sync The connector is a female BNC with the shell grounded to chassis To permit daisy chaining sync signals the input impedance is greater than 1 KO If the 6300 is the last device driven by the sync coaxial cable you should terminate it by using BNC Tee connector and a 750 BNC terminator This will prevent perform ance degrading reflections in the cable This is required for both wordclock and AES11id operation Grounding Very often grounding is approached in a hit or miss manner However with care it is possible to wire an audio studio so that it provides maximum protection from power faults and is free from ground loops which induce hum and can cause oscilla tion In an ideal system e All units in the system should have balanced inputs In a modern system with low output impedances and high input impedances a balanced input will pro vide common mode rejection and prevent ground loops regardless of whether it is driven from a balanced or unbalanced source The 6300 has balanced inputs e All equipment circuit grounds must be connected to each other all equipment chassis grounds must be c
246. er to Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect on page 5 9 If you have trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instructions above try restarting your computer to clear its serial port OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 57 3 To change the properties of an existing connection Right click the connection in the connection List window and choose Proper ties The Connection properties window opens see page 2 48 Preparing for Communication through Modems 1 Prepare your 6300 for a modem connection through the serial port See step 2 on page 2 37 2 If you have not already done so create a 6300 passcode See To Create a Passcode on page 2 32 3 Modem setup You will need two modems and two available phone lines one of each for your PC and your 6300 Reminder Orban supports only the 3Com U S Robotics 56kbps fax modem EXT on the 6300 side although other 56kbps modems will often work OK Connect the modem to the 6300 s serial port with a standard not null modem ca ble You can use either an internal or an external modem with your PC A Connect the telephone line from the wall phone jack to the wall connection icon on the back of the modem modem in B Connect the modem cable from the modem to the serial port of the 6300 C Set the modem to AUTO ANSWER and turn it on For 3Com U S Robotics 56kbps fax modem EXT set dipswitches 3 5 and 8 in the down position t
247. et port it already has the correct TCP IP network ing set up to communicate with the 6300 In most cases all you need is your 6300 s IP address Port and Gateway number as set in step 1 on page 2 36 You will enter these when you create a connection to your 6300 from the 6300 PC Remote appli cation see step E on page 3 58 If your computer does not have a working Ethernet port you must add one and then following the instructions provided by Microsoft to set it up to enable TCP IP networking If you are using a crossover Ethernet cable to connect your Optimod directly to your computer you must set your Windows networking to provide a static IP address for your computer because your Optimod does not contain a DHCP server If you wish to connect to your 6300 through your LAN or VPN through a WAN or the Internet consult your network administrator Note that to cross subnets you must specify a gateway If the PC and 6300 are on the same subnet then it is unnec essary to specify a gateway although you will still need to specify one if you want your Optimod to synchronize to an Internet timeserver see Synchronizing Opti mod to a Network Time Server on page 2 38 If you are behind a firewall you must open the port you specified in step 1 E on page 2 37 If the gateway and firewall if used are configured correctly it is possible to connect 6300 PC Remote to a 6300 via a VPN OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 45 Conc
248. eter to the Left Analog Output D Adjust output trim VR200 to make the meter read 10 0 dBu 0 dBu 0 775V rms Verify a frequency reading of 400 Hz E Verify THD N reading of 0 0596 0 02 typical using a 22 kHz low pass filter in the distortion analyzer F Set the MODE to BYPASS Bypass defeats all compression limiting and program equalization but retains preemphasis Verify a reading noise of lt 80 dBu at the output of the unit OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4 9 H Using VR201 repeat steps C through G for the Right Analog Output 4 Check frequency response of Analog I O A Verify 6300 software controls are set to their default settings Refer to step 1 A on page 4 7 B Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode see step 3 F C Connect the oscillator to the Left Analog Input XLR connector D Inject the Analog Input XLR connector with a level of 0 dBu with the oscillator set to 100 Hz E Connect the audio analyzer to the 6300 s Left Analog Output XLR connector F Verify a level of 0 dBu 1 dB Use this level as the reference level G Verify that frequency response at 50 Hz 100 Hz 400 Hz 5 kHz and 20 kHz is within 0 1 dB of the reference level This procedure tests the analog input circuitry the A D converter the DSP the DAC and the analog output circuitry H Repeat steps C through G for the right channel 5 Check distortion performance of Analog I O A Verify 6
249. etween various operational modes and functions A rotary en coder allows the user to adjust parameters and enter data 1 Remote Interface and RS 232 Interfaces Located on control board A remote interface connector and circuitry implements remote control of certain operating modes Optimod 6300 has eight remote contact closure inputs A valid remote signal is a momentary pulse of current flowing through remote signal pins Current must flow consistently for 50msec for the signal to be inter preted as valid Generally the 6300 will respond to the most recent control op eration regardless of whether it came from the front panel remote interface or RS 232 Component Level Description After being current limited by resistors the GPI control signals are applied to two quad optoisolators U17 19 and then to the control circuitry U12 is the RS323 port interface chip It is socketed for easy field replacement in the event of overload lightning damage etc All other circuitry is surface mount and is not field repairable 2 Switch Matrix and LED Indicators Located on display board Eleven front panel pushbutton switches are arranged in a matrix configured as three columns and four rows These switches are the primary element of the physical user interface to the 6300 control software The host microprocessor controls the system setup and function of the DSP according to the switch ro tary encoder entered commands the AES
250. ext search function The OPTIMOD 6300 Digital Audio Processor Orban s all digital Optimod 6300 Audio Processor can help you achieve the highest possible quality digital audio broadcast digital television and netcast audio process ing Thanks to versatile signal routing the 6300 can also serve as a studio AGC with an all digital signal path and simultaneously as a talent headphone processor Because all processing is performed by high speed mathematical calculations within Motorola DSP56367 Digital Signal Processing chips the processing has cleanliness quality and stability over time and temperature that is unmatched by analog proc essors OPTIMOD 6300 is descended from the industry standard OPTIMOD audio processors for radio and television Thousands of these broadcast specific processors are at tracting and holding audiences all over the world They have proven that the OPTIMOD sound can attract and keep an audience even in the most competitive commercial environment Because OPTIMOD 6300 incorporates several audio processing innovations exclusive to Orban products you should not assume that it can be operated in the same way as less sophisticated processors If you do you may get disappointing results Take a little time now to familiarize yourself with OPTIMOD 6300 A small invest ment of your time now will yield large dividends in audio quality 1 2 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 The rest of Chapter 1 explains how
251. f processing for both analog and digital inputs This will allow you to switch between analog and digital inputs without sudden level changes A Press the NEXT button B Feed normal program material to the 6300 C Play program material from your studio peaking at normal program levels typically OVU if your console uses VU meters D Skip this step if you are not using the analog input Hold down the ANALOG soft button and adjust the knob so that the AGC meter indicates an average of 10 dB gain reduction E Skip this step if you are not using the digital input Hold down the DiGiTAL soft button and adjust the knob so that the AGC meter indicates an average of 10 dB gain reduction 10 Set the analog output source Because of its versatile signal routing see page 6 41 OPTIMOD 6300 can be used as a combined studio AGC digital radio netcast processor and low delay talent headphone processor Its analog output is most commonly used for moni toring If this output drives headphones for talent speaking live it is best to by pass the look ahead limiter for the chain you are using AGC or Multiband This reduces signal delay by about 16 ms When you do this input output delay is ap OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 25 1 5 proximately ms you choose the AGC output and 5 ms if you choose the mul tiband compression output Even though normal 6300 presets have a delay of about 20 ms which most talent can learn t
252. for Picture 7 5 3 25 Table 3 3 Factory Programming Presets 3 25 EQUALIZER CONTROLS o gece e d A A 3 26 Table 3 4 5 band Equalization 0 0 5 3 27 STEREO ENHANCER CONTROLS 3 31 Table 3 5 Stereo Enhancer Controls 3 32 PA GCC ONTROUS AE Sie Lue eh dcm ala eS 3 32 Table 3 6 AGC Controls 3 33 Advanced CONO S irisse ae a i TAN Eaa I 3 36 DISTORTION CONTRO E 3 38 Figure 3 1 Bass Clipper Input Output Transfer Curves as Bass Clip Shape Control is Varied from 0 0 Hard to 10 0 Soft 3 38 Table 3 7 Distortion Control Adjustments 3 39 2 2 25 EI eed euadere use E ERR ed ena ceca 3 40 Customizing the Set ings sante Hc gea tappe 3 40 Table 3 8 2 band
253. for mass appeal music formats It has the same bass texture as the IMPACT presets DANCE ENERGY This preset is designed to preserve the punch and slam in dance music percussion such as the beater click in kick drums It is loud and has a bright high frequency texture As LEss MORE is turned down this preset get quieter yet punchier EDGE This preset is designed for hit music broadcasters who prefer extremely punchy bass to fastidious distortion control It is loud and has a bright high fre quency texture FOLK TRADITIONAL FOLK TRADITIONAL is an alias for the ROCK SOFT preset It assumes that the recordings are of relatively recent vintage and require relatively subtle processing If the recordings you play are inconsistent in texture and equalization you may pre fer the ROCK SMOOTH or ROCK LIGHT presets GOLD GOLD is loud and hi fi sounding while still respecting the limitations and basic flavor of the recordings from the era of the 1950s through 1970s For example we do not attempt to exaggerate high frequency energy in the GOLD preset The highs in recordings of this era are often noisy dis torted or have other technical problems that make them unpleasant sounding when the processor over equalizes them in an attempt to emu late the high frequency balance of recently recorded material GREGG GREGG and GREGG OPEN all use a 200 Hz band1 band2 crossover fre quency to achieve a bass sound similar to the classic 5 band G
254. formation about installa tion audio input and audio output connections to the 8200ST 3 Set 8200ST Output Level with tone A Press the TONE button on the 8200ST The TONE lamp should light and the modulation meters should indicate 0 If they do not re strap jumpers JB and JC to peak Refer to Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 The 8200ST is now producing a 400Hz sine wave at each output The peak level of this tone corresponds to 10096 modulation B Adjust the 8200ST s L Our and R Our controls so that the STL transmitter is be ing driven to 100 modulation The L Our and R Our controls are now correctly calibrated to the transmit ter If no significant overshoot occurs in the transmitter the MODULATION meter will now give an accurate indication of peak modulation of the STL C Turn off the tone by pressing the TONE button If the STL transmitter suffers from bounce or overshoot you may have to reduce the L Our and Out control settings to avoid peak over modulation caused by overshoots on certain audio signals 4 Set controls for normal operation with program material The following assumes that a VU meter is used to determine 8200ST line drive levels with program material A Set the controls as follows HF LIMITER Set to match the preemphasis of the transmission system LAR OUD iiie ee eto el rd RAE do not change GATE ene Be het ce 12 00 RELEASE een rege ie IEEE ve os 12 00 2 1
255. frequency interference RMS root mean square ROM read only memory SC subcarrier SCA subsidiary communications authorization a non program related subcarrier in the TV baseband above 23 kHz monophonic or 57 kHz stereophonic PDIF Sony Philips digital interface TRS tip ring sleeve 2 circuit phone jack THD total harmonic distortion TX transmitter us Microseconds For TV preemphasis the 3 dB frequency is 1 2 x where is the pre emphasis time constant measured in seconds VCA voltage controlled amplifier VU volume unit meter XLR a common style of 3 conductor audio connector XTAL crystal OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 13 Parts List Many parts used in the 6300 are surface mount devices SMT and are not in tended for field replacement because specialized equipment and skills are necessary to remove and replace them The list below includes substantially all of the parts used in the 6300 including surface mount devices and inclusion of a part in this list does not imply that the part is field replaceable The input amplifiers output amplifiers and tee filters used for EMI suppression are socketed and easily replaceable These are the components most vulnerable to dam age caused by severe EM surges such as those caused by lightning strikes at a broadcast transmitter site See the parts locator drawings for locations of components Obtaining Spare Parts Specia
256. ft buttons provide access to all 6300 functions and controls The func tions of the soft buttons change with each screen according to the labels at the bottom of each screen e Next and Prev lt and buttons scroll the screen horizontally to accommo date menus that cannot fit in the available space They also allow you to move from one character to the next when you enter data into your 6300 These buttons flash when a scrolling menu is in use Otherwise they are dark e Control Knob changes the setting that is selected by the soft buttons To change a value you usually have to hold down a soft button while you are turn ing the control knob e Recall button allows you to recall a Factory or User Preset Selecting the RECALL button does not immediately recall a preset See step C on page 2 17 for instructions on recalling a preset e Modify button brings you to list of controls that you can use to edit a Factory or User Preset If you edit a Factory Preset you must save it as a new User Preset to re tain your edit e Setup button accesses the technical parameters necessary to match the 6300 to your transmission system 3 2 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 e Escape button provides an escape from current screen and returns user to the next higher level screen Repeatedly pressing Escape will always return you to the Idle screen which is at the top level of the screen hierarchy e Input meters show the peak input level app
257. g converters should also be avoided for many of the same reasons Peak control in OPTIMOD 6300 occurs at a 48 kHz sample frequency This is sufficient to prevent any samples from exceeding the threshold of lim iting However after reconstruction the analog output may overshoot the nominal 10096 level because these overshoots fall between the samples so the processing cannot be aware of them If you use this output to feed the analog input of a digital STL the new samples in the STL will not be synchronous with the samples inside OPTIMOD 6300 Therefore they may well fall on the overshoots causing loss of peak modulation control It is thus very important to use a link with an AES3 input to ensure correct peak control 1 14 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 The same sort of thing can happen if you use the output sample rate converter because the output samples are no longer synchronous with the peak controlled samples in the processing Always use 48 kHz output sample rate with internal sync to achieve best peak control If you must use an analog input you may bypass any anti aliasing filters in digital links driven by OPTIMOD 6300 because OPTIMOD 6300 s output spectrum is tightly controlled This ensures the most accurate possible transient response given the limitations of asynchronous sampling de scribed above is a sort of hybrid between PCM and lossy data reduction systems It uses a block companded floating point re
258. g front panel 2 34 look ahead limiter XE presets AGC 3 XE presets protection 3 using 6300 as 3 17 look ahead limiter 3 9 look ahead limiting 3 3 lossy data reduction in studio 1 15 loudness insufficient 5 5 insufficient due to poor peak control 5 1 vs distortion 3 3 Loudness increase expected 1 21 Loudness Controller and 5 48 threshold control 3 43 Loudness Controller 1 4 Loudness Controller 3 8 16 loudness controller 5 4 Loudness Controller 5 48 M main board reattaching 4 4 mastering setting output level 3 70 mastering applications 3 65 mastering presets 3 66 Matrix 3 37 Max Delta GR 3 37 measuring performance 4 6 meter circuit description 6 6 gain reduction 3 12 meters AGC 3 2 circuit description 6 6 gain reduction 3 2 input 3 2 studio 1 17 Mod Reduction control 2 35 Mode gt Out 2 19 modem preparing for connection 2 57 recommended baud rate 2 58 setting up 2 37 specification for 2 43 Windows 2000 configuration 2 57 Windows XP configuration 2 63 modify button 3 1 modulation switching 1 20 modulation control troubleshooting poor 5 1 monitoring 1 21 MP3 1 22 multiband drive 3 49 multimeters 2 2 music speech detector 3 5 N NAB Broadcast and Audio System Test CD 4 6 netcasting applications encoder 1 22 applicati
259. gain reduction with program material having strong high frequency content Band 5 operates without stereo coupling This way HF limiting triggered by high frequency energy in one audio channel will not modulate high frequencies in the opposite channel The FLar preset is tuned so that it does not normally trigger gain reduction in the 6300 s 5 band compressor the Optimod at the transmitter should be the processor that performs this multiband compression presets use the look ahead limiter to prevent overloading the STL on peaks Compared to FLAT the 50 us and 75 us presets progressively reduce the drive level to the look ahead limiter to prevent strong high frequency energy from triggering au dible gain pumping or ducking The high frequency limiting action in the 5 band compressor also helps prevent this artifact PROTECT This is a 2 band preset designed to produce no gain reduction unless it encounters unusually high input levels caused by operator error It uses the 2B com pressor to control excessive levels so it more forgiving than the LOOKAHEAD presets which offer only peak limiting FACTORY PROGRAMMING PRESETS PROTECTION AGC Normal Less More 50 LIMITER AGC 50us LIMITER 50 AGC 75us LIMITER AGC 75us LIMITER Table 3 1 Protection and AGC Presets OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 1 9 SOFT KNEE 5B SOFT KNEE 2B These presets are zeroed out starting points for mastering applications
260. ge 2 42 See the readme6300 x x x x htm file where x x x x is the version number for de tails about the upgrade not given in this manual The PC Remote installer will in stall this file on your computer s hard drive 3 If you have not previously done so start 6300 PC Remote and set up a connection to the 6300 you will be updating See To set up a new connection on page 3 58 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 69 4 Update your 6300 A Attempt to initiate communication to your 6300 via your connection See To initiate communication on page 3 58 6300 PC Remote will automatically detect that the 6300 software version on your 6300 is not the same as the version of 6300 PC Remote PC Re mote will then offer to update your 6300 automatically This procedure will only work for a connection using an all screens administrator passcode B Choose YES and wait for the update to complete Note that this will cause an interruption in the audio of approximately 3 seconds when your 6300 auto matically reboots after the update is complete If you cannot tolerate such an interruption choose NO or CANCEL to abort the update Please be patient this will take several minutes The exact time will de pend on whether the 6300 has to do any housekeeping to its flash memory as part of the update Completion will be indicated by the updater s command line window s closing automatically and your 6300 s rebooting Your 6300 w
261. ge between chassis and earth ground Severe injury or death can then result if the chassis and earth ground are touched simultaneously Conductor WIRE COLOR LIVE NEUTRAL BLUE EARTH GND GREEN YELLOW GREEN AC Power Cord Color Coding Safety Instructions German Ger t nur an der am Leistungsschild vermerkten Spannung und Stromart betreiben Sicherungen nur durch solche gleicher Stromst rke und gleichen Abschaltverhaltens ersetzen Sicherungen nie berbr cken Jedwede Besch digung des Netzkabels vermeiden Netzkabel nicht knicken oder quetschen Beim Abziehen des Netzkabels den Stecker und nicht das Kabel enfassen Besch digte Netzkabel sofort auswechseln Ger t und Netzkabel keinen bertriebenen mechanischen Beaspruchungen aussetzen Um Ber hrung gef hrlicher elektrischer Spannungen zu vermeiden darf das Ger t nicht ge ffnet werden Im Fall von Betriebsst run gen darf das Ger t nur Von befugten Servicestellen instandgesetzt werden Im Ger t befinden sich keine durch den Benutzer reparierbare Teile Zur Vermeidung von elektrischen Schl gen und Feuer ist das Ger t vor N sse zu sch tzen Eindringen von Feuchtigkeit und Fl ssigkeiten in das Ger t vermeiden Bei Betriebsst rungen bzw nach Eindringen von Fl ssigkeiten oder anderen Gegenst nden das Ger t sofort vom Netz trennen und eine qualifizierte Servicestelle kontaktieren Safety Instructions French On s assurera toujours que la tension et l
262. hannels independently e bypass mode OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 3 1 e exit test restores the operating preset that was active before a test mode was invoked F When you have programmed an event to your satisfaction press the SAVE EVENT button You will return to the automation menu 4 To edit an existing event A Press the VIEW EDIT EVENT button B Turn the knob until you see the event you wish to edit C Press the EDIT EVENT button D Edit the event as desired Use the same technique as adding an event See step 3 on page 2 30 E Press the SAVE EVENT button to store your edits 5 To delete an event A Press the DELETE EVENT button B Choose the event to delete with the knob You can search by date or by event i e recalling a given preset Use the NEXT button to navigate from one type of search to the other type C When you have located the event you want to remove press the DELETE EVENT button This action will immediately delete the event There is no are you sure warning message To abort the deletion press the Esc button not the DELETE EVENT button Security and Passcode Programming Skip this step if you do not plan to use PC Remote software or do not plan to lock out the front panel locally Your Optimod has several levels of security to prevent unauthorized people from changing its programming or operating state Security controls access to the front panel and to anyone c
263. hat reach full scale loudness Philosophically this is inevitable the Loudness Controller cannot reduce the level of the commercial to the level of rus tling leaves without destroying the effectiveness of the commercial and angering the sponsor FINAL LIMIT Final Limit Drive See page 3 39 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 45 PARENT PRESET and Less More INDEX are read only fields The 6300 s front panel LCD display does not show all of the parameters in a given User Preset only the PC Remote software can display the Advanced Controls that set all the parameters PARENT PRESET shows the preset that was edited to produce the current User Preset The LESS MORE INDEX shows the Parent Preset s Less More set ting when it was edited This information is needed because two different User Pre sets can appear to be the same when you view only the parameters that the 6300 s front panel exposes Please note that if a User Preset was created by in the PC Remote software by edit ing Advanced controls an asterisk will appear in front of the displayed parent pre set This asterisk means that you cannot duplicate a given user preset by starting with its parent preset and then setting a target 6300 s front panel controls to corre spond to the user preset you want to duplicate The only way to duplicate such a user preset accurately is via the PC Remote software s backup and restore features or by opening the preset in the PC Remote software
264. he id refers to the fact that the connection is unbalanced and is de signed to be interfaced with 75O coaxial cable terminated in a male BNC connector This input is not internally terminated and requires external 750 termination if it is the last device on the cable Input and Output Connections Cable We recommend using two conductor foil shielded cable such as Belden 8451 or equivalent for the audio input and output connections because signal current flows through the two conductors only The shield does not carry signal and is used only for shielding 2 6 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Connectors e Input and output connectors are XLR type connectors In the XLR type connectors pin 1 is CHASSIS GROUND while pin 2 and pin 3 are a balanced floating pair This wiring scheme is compatible with any studio wiring standard If pin 2 or 3 is considered LOW the other pin is automatically HIGH Analog Audio Input e Nominal input level between 144 and 8dBu will result in normal operation of the 6300 OdBu 0 775Vrms this application the dBm 96000 scale on voltme ters can be read as if it were calibrated in dBu e The peak input level that causes overload is 27 0dBu e The electronically balanced input uses ultra low noise and distortion differen tial amplifier for best common mode rejection and is compatible with most pro fessional and semi professional audio equipment balanced or unbalanced h
265. he program material changes It can therefore create a bright present sound with out over equalizing material that is already bright 2 band and 5 band compressor limiters with phase linear crossovers and power ful controls including attack time release time threshold knee and ratio for each band These compressor limiters also offer user adjustable inter band cou pling allowing the user to operate them anywhere from quasi wideband to fully independent e A look ahead peak limiter with advanced proprietary distortion reduction algo rithms You cannot create a user preset from scratch you must create it by modifying an existing preset factory or user Each preset has an easy adjustment facility called LEss MORE which is a one knob provision for turning the amount of processing up or down The following step by step procedure is a good method for creating mastering pre sets It assumes that you have already set the processor mixer controls to achieve normal drive levels A Connect to the 6300 via 6300 PC Remote software This gives you access to ad vanced controls that are not available from the 6300 s front panel These con trols are crucial to fine tuning the 6300 for mastering Note that by selecting groups of controls with your computer s mouse you can temporarily couple them so you can adjust several bands con trols simultaneously You can either CTRL click the controls you wish to couple or create a selectio
266. he information contained therein is based on our years of experience with OPTIMOD and broadcast stations 2 Check the other sections of the Manual consult the Table of Contents and Index to see if there might be some sug gestions regarding your problem 3 After reading the section on Factory Assistance you may call Orban Customer Service for advice during normal Cali fornia business hours The number is 1 510 351 3500 WARNING This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If it is not installed and used as directed by this manual it may cause interference to radio communication This equipment complies with the limits for a Class A computing device as specified by FCC Rules Part 15 subject J which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when this type of equipment is operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference If it does the user will be required to eliminate the interference at the user s expense WARNING This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digi tal apparatus set out in the radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le present appareil numerique n emet pas de bruits radioelectriques de passant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de las class A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le br
267. he mid bass frequency range where the ear is more sensitive than it is to very low bass the 6 dB octave slope can create more apparent bass level at the cost of bass punch There are no easy choices here you must choose the characteristic you want by identifying your target audience and the receivers they are most likely to be using Often you will not want to use any boost at all for general purpose sound for picture programming because this can exaggerate rumble and other low frequency noise Additionally large amounts of boost will increase the gain reduction in the lowest band of the multiband compressor which may have the effect of reducing some frequencies below 100 or 200 Hz depending on the setting of the B1 B2 XOVER control So be aware the large fixed bass boosts may have a different effect than you expect because of the way that they interact with the multiband compres Sor On the other hand stations specializing in pop music programming will usually want to employ some bass boost to maintain the punch of this programming particularly if urban or rap music is a significant part of the music mix Low Frequency Parametric Equalizer is a specially designed equalizer whose boost and cut curves closely emulate those of a classic Orban analog parametric equalizer with conventional bell shaped curves within 0 15 dB worst case This provides warm smooth analog sounding equalization LF FREQ determines the center frequency
268. he tally outputs have no special RFI protection Therefore it is wise to use shielded cable to make connections to them See step 17 on page 2 28 for instructions on programming the tally outputs 7 Connect to a computer You can connect to a computer via the 6300 s serial connector or via an Ethernet network See Networking on page 2 36 Because procedures and instructions for connecting to a PC are subject to devel opment and change we have placed these instructions in a file called 6300 Vxxx installation pdf where xxx represents the version number of the software You can access this file from the Orban Optimod 6300 folder in your computer s Start Menu after you have run Orban s PC Remote installer software You must have the 6300 PC Remote application installed on your com puter before you upgrade your 6300 s firmware because 6300 PC Remote manages the upgrade You can use Adobe s pdf reader application to open and read this file If you do not have the pdf reader it is available for free download from www adobe com See Installing 6300 PC Remote Control Software on page 2 42 for more detail This file is also available from the 6300 Documentation Vxxx folder at Orban s ftp site ftp orban com OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 5 6300 Rear Panel Note The 63005 front panel is described starting on page 3 1 The Power Cord is detachable and is terminated in a U ground plug USA stan dard
269. he timeserver Double check the IP address If you are behind a firewall make sure that port 123 is open e f your connection failed the gateway might not be set correctly on your Optimod The gateway for the timeserver connection is the same gateway that you set in step 1 D on page 2 37 If you do not know the correct gateway you can often discover it by connecting a Windows computer to the same Ethernet cable that is ordinarily plugged into your Optimod As certain that the computer can connect to the Internet At the command prompt type ipconfig The computer will return the Default Gateway OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 4 1 5 Specify the time sync from the Optimod PC Remote software Skip this step if you wish to specify the timeserver and time sync parameters from your Optimod s front panel Optimod PC Remote software can automatically set your Optimod s local time OFFSET and TIME SERVER to reflect the Windows settings in the machine running PC Remote software If you are running Windows 2000 you cannot specify the timeserver from your computer However you can still set your Optimod s clock and off set A In Windows navigate to the CONTROL PANEL gt DATE AND TIME gt TIME ZONE tab B Set time zone to correspond to your local time zone C In Windows navigate to the CONTROL PANEL DATE AND TIME INTERNET TIME tab D If you are running Windows XP a Check Automatically synchronize with an
270. he user should not attempt to service the appliance beyond that described in the operating instructions All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel The Appliance should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer Safety Instructions European Notice For U K Customers If Your Unit Is Equipped With A Power Cord WARNING THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED The cores in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code GREEN and YELLOW Earth BLUE Neutral BROWN Live As colours of the cores in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug pro ceed as follows The core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug marked with the letter E or with the earth symbol or col oured green or green and yellow The core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal marked N or coloured black The core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal marked L or coloured red The power cord is terminated in a CEE7 7 plug Continental Europe The green yellow wire is connected directly to the unit s chassis If you need to change the plug and if you are qualified to do so refer to the table below WARNING If the ground is defeated certain fault conditions in the unit or in the system to which it is connected can result in full line volta
271. his means that the internal threshold automati cally decreases with softer knee settings higher settings of the KNEE con trol However the indicated threshold the 6300 s user interface does not change This behavior ensures that the THRESHOLD control alone deter mines the maximum output level of the compressor regardless the KNEE control s setting K Adjust equalization as necessary As discussed above there is a versatile program equalizer available be tween the AGC and multiband compressor In 5 band mode there is also a 5 band mix control functioning as a phase linear graphic equalizer af ter the 5 band compressor In 5 band mode any fixed equalization will be partially undone by the dynamic re equalization effect of the 5 band compression so 2 band mode is most useful when you are relying on the 6300 s fixed EQ or on external EQ earlier in the signal path Note also that you can use the Bass COUPLING control the HF COUPLING control and the individual band compression threshold controls to affect the amount of automatic re equalization performed by the 5 band com pression As you set these controls closer to 10096 they permit progres sively less dynamic LF and HF program adaptive boost If you feel that the dynamic re equalization is not producing enough brightness when the program material lacks high frequencies you should turn the BAND 3 gt 4 and BAND 4 gt 5 COUPLING closer to 0 Similarly if weak bass is not suffi
272. hold 3 45 release control 3 42 two band processing structure 3 25 two band structure 3 40 U unlock front panel 2 34 unpacking 2 1 Updating software 2 68 Urban format 3 25 user presets archiving 3 14 creating 3 6 11 13 user presets 1 6 V VPN setting up 2 44 58 W warranty 1 24 Warranty 1 24 warranty 6 4 window release control 3 36 window size control 3 36 Windows installing services 2 42 Windows 2000 adding direct serial connection 2 48 52 58 64 Direct Connect 5 7 direct serial connection 2 47 modem connect 5 8 modem connection 2 57 Windows direct connect 5 9 modem configuration 2 63 modem connect 5 10 women processing for 3 4 word length at output specification 6 3 setting output 2 26 wordclock 2 8 25 X XLR connector wiring standard 2 7 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 1 Section 1 Introduction About this Manual The Adobe pdf form of this manual contains numerous hyperlinks and bookmarks A reference to a numbered step or a page number except in the Index is a live hyper link click on it to go immediately to that reference If the bookmarks are not visible click the Bookmarks tab on the left side of the Acrobat Reader window This manual has a table of contents and index To search for a specific word or phrase you can also use the Adobe Acrobat Reader s t
273. hookup and grounding information on the following pages OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 3 TOPIC PAGE Audio Input and Audio Output 60 5 2 5 AES3 Digital Input and Output 2 7 Wordclock AES11id Sync Input 2 8 2 8 PIN ASSIGNMENT 1 DIGITAL GOUND 2 REMOTE 1 3 REMOTE 2 4 REMOTE 3 5 REMOTE 4 6 REMOTE 5 7 6 8 7 REMOTE INTERFACE 9 REMOTE 8 10 TALLY 1 oo 11 TALLY 2 G G G 9 9 3 3 3 12 06690 09026305626202 13 ANALOG GROUND 14 REMOTE 1 15 REMOTE 2 16 REMOTE 3 17 REMOTE 4 18 REMOTE 5 19 REMOTE 6 20 REMOTE 7 21 REMOTE 8 22 24 N C 25 12 VOLTS DC Figure 2 2 Wiring the 25 pin Remote Interface Connector 5 Connect remote control interface optional For a full listing of 6300 s extensive remote control provisions refer to Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2 35 Optically isolated remote control connections are terminated in a type DB 25 male connector located on the rear panel It is wired according to Figure 2 2 To select the desired function apply a 5 12V AC or DC pulse between the appropri ate REMOTE INTERFACE terminals The terminals be
274. hrough System Setup see step 4 on page 2 21 and step 7 on page 2 23 or through PC Remote 1 8 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Remote Control Interface The Remote Control Interface is a set of eight optically isolated inputs on DB 25 connector which can be activated by 5 12V DC They can control various func tions of the 6300 Recall any Factory Preset User Preset Test Mode state Bypass or Tone or exit from a Test Mode to the previous processing preset e Switch the 6300 to use either the analog input or the digital input e Switch the 6300 between stereo and dual mono modes e Reset the 6300 s internal clock to the nearest hour or to midnight You can reconfigure the functions of the GPI inputs System Setup For example if you are not switching between stereo and mono the inputs ordinarily dedicated to controlling the stereo mono status can instead be re configured to call additional presets See page 2 35 for information on programming the remote control interface Computer Interface On the rear panel of the 6300 are an RS 232 serial port and an Ethernet port for in terfacing to IBM compatible PCs either locally or through a TCP IP network These computer interfaces support remote control and metering and allow downloading software upgrades Each 6300 package ships with 6300 PC Remote software an application for any IBM compatible PC running Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 or higher or X
275. ick OK L In Components checked are used by this connection uncheck all except for Internet Protocol TCP IP M Select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click the Properties button The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens N Choose Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically O Click the Advanced button on the Internet Protocol TCP IP Window P In the Advanced TCP IP Settings select the General Tab make sure that no check boxes are checked Q Click OK to dismiss the Advanced TCP IP Settings window R Click OK to dismiss the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window S Click OK to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection T Click Cancel to dismiss the Connect nnnn dialog box U Restart your computer Although not strictly necessary this resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood that you will encounter problems connecting to the 6300 Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect If you are having trouble establishing a connection check your New Connection s properties to make sure they are set up correctly 5 1 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 6300 A Click Start Programs Accessories Communications Network Connections to bring up the Network Connections screen B In the Network Connections window right click Optimod 6300 Direct and choose Properties C The Properties window
276. id erably reduces added noise in the midrange by comparison to white PDF dither However unlike extreme noise shaping it adds a maximum of 3 dB of excess total noise power when compared to white PDF dither Thus it is a good compromise between white PDF dither and extreme noise shaping To ensure maximum system linearity it is wise to set this control to IN H Set DO1 to AES or SPDIF Using the DO1 SOURCE button set the digital 1 output source to e AGC stereo enhancement equalization and AGC without peak limiting e AGC LIM stereo enhancement equalization AGC and look ahead peak limiting OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2227 e MULTIBAND stereo enhancement equalization AGC and 2 Band or 5 Band compression without peak limiting e MB LIM stereo enhancement equalization AGC 2 Band or 5 Band com pression and look ahead peak limiting See step 10 on page 2 14 J Press NEXT Then set the DO1 Emits parameter to STEREO DUAL or MONO L STEREO DUAL is the normal setting L is for convenience if you are using the 6300 to process two independent mono programs and you wish assign each program to a separate digital output In this case both chan nels of DO1 emit the mono material processed in the 6300 s left channel and both channels of DO2 emit the right channel material Press NEXT Then adjust DO1 100 set the desired digital output level corre sponding to 10096 modulation in units of d
277. ient for Microsoft Networks checked if you like n Click OK o When the Connection window ap pears click OK properties INSTALLATION 2 67 B Conexant HCF V90 56K Data Fax PCI Modem COM3 Maximum speed bps 115200 gt Modem protocol 71 Hardware features Enable hardware flow control Enable modem eror control Enable modem compression Show terminal window Enable modem speaker General Options Securty Networking Advanced a ssi 4 v JB QoS Packet Scheduler r File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Client for Microsoft Networks Install Uninstall Properties Descripti Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks 2 Launch an existing Windows XP modem connection Once you have set up a connection specifying a modem connection in the 6300 PC Remote application see To set up a new connection on page 3 58 choosing this connection from 6300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows modem connection to your 6300 2 68 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 You can connect by selecting the de sired connection from the drop down nn File Edit View Tools Connect Hel list in the CONNECT menu pj E ro Ed New 8300 You can also connect by double clickin x
278. ies a Click Settings OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL b Click the General tab In the Connect using field select the modem you will be using to make the connection on the PC side d Click Configure Set Maximum speed bps to 115200 f Check Enable hardware flow control 9 Check Enable modem error control h Check Enable mcdem compression i Make sure that all other boxes are not checked j Click OK INSTALLATION 2 6 1 Connection to 8300 modem x General Options Security Networking Sharing Connect using Modem Windows Modem PCI ADI COM3 Phone number Area code Phone number 555 5555 Altemates Country region code 1 Use dialing rules Rules Show icon in taskbar when connected OK Cancel Modem Configuration 3Com Windows Modem PCI ADI COM3 Maximum speed bps z Modem protocol Hardware features Enable hardware flow control Enable modem error control Enable modem compression Initialization Show terminal window script Edit Browse Enable modem speaker Cancel 2 62 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 k Select the Networkin EE I Make sure that PPP General Options Security Networking Sharing Windows 95 98 NT 4 2000 Internet appears in the
279. ilar AGC installed at your studio feeding the studio to transmitter link This setting appropriately defeats the 6300 s AGC for all presets 2 14 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 b Set the field to No If you do not have a external AGC installed this setting enables the 6300 AGC status to be determined by the selected preset If you are using an Orban 4000 Transmission Limiter set field to No so that the AGC function in the 6300 continues to work The Orban 4000 is intended for transmission system overload protection it is normally op erated below threshold It is not designed to perform an AGC or gain riding function and it cannot substitute for the AGC function in the 6300 8 Select your primary input analog or digital A Press the NEXT button B If your main input source is digital turn the knob to select DIGITAL or DIGITAL J17 Otherwise select ANALOG The only digital encoding that typically uses J 17 preemphasis of which we are aware is NICAM DiGiTAL not DiGITAL J17 is appropriate for al most anyone using the digital input 9 Set operating levels You will set the operating levels of the 6300 to match the input levels it is receiv ing so the 6300 s AGC can operate in the range for which it was designed There are separate settings for the analog and digital inputs If you provide both ana log and digital inputs to the 6300 optimum adjustment is achieved when the gain reduction meters show the same amount o
280. ill continue to pass audio normally while the update is occur ring However the audio will be interrupted for approximately 3 seconds when your 6300 reboots Do not interrupt power to your 6300 or your computer close PC Remote or the update application s command line window or reboot your com puter during this time While doing any of these things is unlikely to damage your 6300 because of extensive backup and error checking pro visions in your 6300 they will certainly cause the update to fail C When the 6300 screen display returns after its automatic reboot the 6300 will be running with the updated software If the update fails for some reason try repeating the procedure in steps A through C again D If the 6300 screen remains blank for more than one minute after the update has completed manually reboot the 6300 by removing AC power from the 6300 for at least ten seconds and then powering the 6300 back up E The 6300 software update is now complete You should now be able to con nect to your 6300 via PC Remote NOTE If you cannot make a connection after a software upgrade manu ally reboot the 6300 with a normal power off power on sequence OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 1 Section 3 Operation 6300 Front Panel e Screen Display labels the four soft buttons and provides control setting infor mation e Screen Contrast button adjusts the optimum viewing angle of the screen dis play e Four So
281. ime b nist gov 129 6 15 29 NIST Gaithersburg Maryland time a timefreq bldrdoc gov 132 163 4 101 NIST Boulder Colorado time b timefreq bldrdoc gov 132 163 4 102 NIST Boulder Colorado time c timefreq bldrdoc gov 132 163 4 103 NIST Boulder Colorado utcnist colorado edu 128 138 140 44 University of Colorado Boulder time nist gov 192 43 244 18 NCAR Boulder Colorado time nw nist gov 131 107 1 10 Microsoft Redmond Washington nist1 symmetricom com 69 25 96 13 Symmetricom San Jose California nist1 dc glassey com 216 200 93 8 Abovenet Virginia nist1 ny glassey com 208 184 49 9 Abovenet New York City nist1 sj glassey com 207 126 98 204 Abovenet San Jose California nist1 aol ca truetime com 207 200 81 113 TrueTime AOL facility Sunnyvale Cali fornia nist1 aol va truetime com 205 188 185 33 TrueTime AOL facility Virginia nist1 columbiacountyga gov 68 216 79 113 Columbia County Georgia Table 2 1 NIST referenced timeservers 2 40 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 2 Choose a timeserver http www boulder nist gov timefreg service time servers html provides a cur rent list of timeservers available on the Internet You network may also have a local timeserver ask your network administrator As of April 2006 NIST s list was as shown in Table 2 1 3 Press the NEXT button to set up timeserver parameters The TIME SERVER button is located on the second page of the Sync func tions You can access this f
282. ing up k Click Next Type in a name for your Connection such as Connection to 6300 Modem m Click the Finish button INSTALLATION 2 65 New Connection Wizard of Connection Select the type of the connection B or ISDN Connect to a private network through the Intemet Create a Virtual Private Network VPN connection or tunnel through the intemet Connect directly to another computer Connect using my serial parallel or infrared C Connect to the network via broadband Connect through my broadband connection Ce New Connection Wizard Phone Number to Dial What is the phone number you will use to make this connection a Type the phone number below Phone number 555 5555 You might need to include a 1 orthe area code or both If you are not sure you need the extra numbers dial the phone number on your telephone you hear a modem sound the number dialed is correct New Connection Wizard x Finished The wizard is ready to create your connection a Type a name you want for this connection y ction to modem Click Finish to save it in the Network Connections folder To edit this connection later select it click the File menu and then click Properties ORBAN MODEL 6300 2 66 INSTALLATION n Click Yes 8300 PC x Use this connection as the current entry for this 8300 a
283. ing that the func tion executes when you activate the input To program a GPI input see Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2 35 B You can test the RS 232 Port for functionality by verifying that you can con nect to a PC through a null modem cable See Networking and Remote Con trol starting on page 2 36 in particular step 4 on page 2 38 10 Return OPTIMOD 6300 to service A Remove the 6200 resistors connected across the outputs B Restore your normal operating parameters using the notes you made in step 1 on page 4 7 C Navigate to SETUP TEST MODE and choose OPERATE D Recall your normal operating preset OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5 1 Section 5 Troubleshooting Problems and Potential Solutions Always verify that the problem is not the source material being fed to the 6300 or in other parts of the system RFI Hum Clicks or Buzzes For good RFI resistance always use balanced inputs and outputs Review the information on grounding on page 2 8 The 6300 has been designed with very substantial RFI suppression on its analog and digital input and output ports and on the AC line input It will usually operate adjacent to high powered transmitters without difficulty In the most unusual circumstances it may be neces sary to reposition the unit to reduce RF interference and or to reposition its input and output cables to reduce RF pickup on their shields The AES EBU inputs a
284. ing the 6300 more vulnerable to unexpected audible distortion with certain program mate rial Therefore you should make large changes in EQ with the bass and parametric equalizers and the HF enhancer because these are located before the compressors The compressors will thus protect the system from unusual overloads caused the chosen equalization Use the multiband mix controls only for fine tuning You can also get a similar effect by adjusting the compression threshold of the indi vidual bands This is comparably risky with reference to look ahead limiter overload but unlike the MB BAND controls the threshold adjustments do not affect the frequency response when a given band is below threshold and is thus producing no gain reduction OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 55 Advanced 5 band Controls The following Advanced Multiband controls are available only from 6300 PC Remote software B1 B5 Attack Time Speech B1 B5 Attack controls set the speed with which the gain reduction in each band responds to level changes at the input to a given band s compressor for music and speech respectively following the 6300 s automatic speech music detector These controls are risky and difficult to adjust appropriately They affect the sound of the processor in many subtle ways The main trade off is punch achieved with slower attack times versus distortion and or pumping pro duced in the look ahead limiter because slower attack times in
285. interfaces the analog and digital inputs to the DSP The analog input stages scale and buffer the input audio level to match it to the analog to digital A D converter The A D converts the analog input audio to digital audio The digi tal input receiver accepts AES3 format digital audio signals from the digital input connector and sample rate converts them as necessary The digital audio from the A D and SRC is transmitted to the DSP 1 Analog Input Stages Located on input output DSP board The RF filtered left and right analog input signals are each applied to a floating balanced amplifier that has an adjustable digitally controlled gain Analog switches set the gain The outputs of a latch set the state of the switches By writ ing data to the latch the control circuits preset the gain This circuit feeds an RC low pass filter that applies the balanced signal to the analog to digital A D converter The digitally controlled gain circuitry was included on the circuit board for possible use in future products In the 6300 its gain is preset so that the A D will clip at 27 dBu with respect to the 6300 s analog inputs 6 8 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6300 Note that the small RFI tee filter assemblies connected to the input and output connectors are socketed and user replaceable Component Level Description The left channel balanced audio input signal is applied to the filter load net work made up of L100 103 and associat
286. ion s audience bear in mind that women are more sensitive to distortion and listening fatigue than men are In any format requiring long term listening to achieve market share great care should be taken not to alienate women by excessive stridency harshness or distortion Processing for Low Bit Rate Codecs 6300 s 5 band processing includes PreCode technology to minimize codec artifacts To exploit PreCode technology fully minimizing phasey and underwater arti facts in low bit rate codecs do not set up OPTIMOD 6300 for very bright sound with large amounts of high frequency energy because this is likely to exacerbate artifacts Some appropriate presets include JAZZ SMOOTH JAZZ GOLD ROCK SOFT and the CLASSICAL presets Avoid presets like CRISP and EDGE these are very bright sounding presets and are more appropriate for uncompressed channels or com pressed channels with relatively high bit rates 64 kbps or higher for the aacPlus V2 codec used in Opticodec PC for example The 6300 has several controls whose settings determine brightness To minimize brightness when using the 5 band structure e Uselittle or no high frequency boost in the equalization section e Set Band 4 gt 5 coupling to 100 Set the band 5 compression threshold to match the codec Adjust the threshold until you find a good compromise between presence and high frequency codec artifacts We find the range from 6 0 to 6 0 dB to be useful e Use a
287. ired enhancement on slightly unbalanced mono material 2 band Gated AGC The AGC is a 2 band device using Orban s patented master bass band coupling It has an additional important feature target zone gating If 3j 8 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 the input program material s level falls within a user settable window typically 3dB then the release time slows to a user determined level It can be slow enough 0 5 dB second to effectively freeze the operation of the AGC This prevents the AGC from applying additional audible gain control to material that is already well controlled It also lets you run the AGC with fast release times without adding exces sive density to material that is already dense The AGC contains a compression ratio control that allows you to vary to ratio be tween 2 1 and essentially 0 1 Lower ratios can make gain riding subtler on critical formats like classical and jazz The AGC has its own silence gating detector whose threshold can be set independ ently of the silence gating applied to the multiband compressor Equalization The 6300 has steep slope bass shelving equalizer and three bands of fully parametric bell shaped EQ You can set the slope of the bass shelving EQ to 6 12 or 18 dB octave and adjust the shelving frequency The 6300 s bass midrange and high frequency parametric equalizers have curves that were modeled on the curves of Orban s classic analog parametrics like the 622B using a
288. istics will alter the peak to average ratio and will thus reduce the effectiveness of any peak limiting performed prior to their inputs Using Lossy Data Reduction in the Audio Chain Before the 6300 Many broadcasters are now using lossy data reduction algorithms like MPEG 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 or Dolby AC2 to increase the storage time of digital playback media In addition source material is often supplied through a lossy data reduction algorithm whether from satellite or over landlines Sometimes several encode decode cycles will be cascaded before the material is finally presented to OPTIMOD 6300 s input such algorithms operate by increasing the quantization noise in discrete fre quency bands If not psychoacoustically masked by the program material this noise may be perceived as distortion gurgling swishing or other interference Psycho acoustic calculations are used to ensure that the added noise is masked by the de sired program material and not heard Cascading several stages of such processing can raise the added quantization noise above the threshold of masking making it audible In addition at least one other mechanism can cause the noise to become audible at the radio OPTIMOD 6300 s multiband limiter performs an automatic equalization 1 1 6 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 function that can radically change the frequency balance of the program some times by more than 10 dB This can cause noise that woul
289. ith the values you set in step 1 on page 2 36 See also Setting Up Ethernet LAN and VPN Connections on page 2 44 F If you are communicating via a direct serial cable connection or a modem connection follow the appropriate procedure described in Appendix Setting up Serial Communications starting on page 2 47 G Click OK after entering all required information To initiate communication Initiate communication by double clicking on gay Tene the desired 6300 alias the Connections List P 9 New 8300 by selecting the desired 6300 alias from the 77777 Disconnect CONNECT drop down menu All Connections 8300 If the connection is successful a dialog bubble UB 3300 modem 8300 modem UO CNN will appear on the bottom right hand corner of the screen verifying your connection e f a warning message appears stating No password is set at the 6300 go to your 6300 unit and create a passcode OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 59 e f an Enter Passcode dialog box appears enter a valid passcode and the 6300 PC Remote software will initiate a connection to the 6300 unit A window will appear saying Connecting to the 6300 please wait A few mo ments later a new message will appear Loading system files please wait When run the Orban PC Remote software installer makes copies of all 6300 fac tory preset files on your
290. k level by 8 to 14dB The Peak Program Meter PPM in dicates a level between RMS and the actual peak The PPM has an attack time of 10ms slow enough to cause the meter to ignore narrow peaks and under indicate the true peak level by 5 dB or more The absolute peak sensing meter or LED indica tor shows the true peak level It has an instantaneous attack time and a release time slow enough to allow the engineer to read the peak level easily Figure 1 1 shows the relative difference between the absolute peak level and the indications of a VU meter and a PPM for a few seconds of music program 1 1 8 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Figure 1 1 Absolute Peak Level VU and PPM Reading Studio Line up Levels and Headroom The studio engineer is primarily concerned with calibrating the equipment to pro vide the required input level for proper operation of each device and so that all de vices operate with the same input and output levels This facilitates patching devices in and out without recalibration For line up the studio engineer uses a calibration tone at a studio standard level commonly called line up level reference level or operating level Metering at the studio is by a VU meter or PPM Peak Program Meter As discussed above the VU or PPM indication under indicates the true peak level Most modern studio audio de vices have a clipping level of no less than 21dBu and often 24dBu or more So the studio standardizes on
291. l encounter problems connecting to the 6300 Troubleshooting IC Opamps IC opamps are operated such that the characteristics of their associated circuits are essentially independent of IC characteristics and dependent only on external feed back components The feedback forces the voltage at the input terminal to be extremely close to the voltage at the input terminal Therefore if you measure more than a few millivolts difference between these two terminals the IC is proba bly bad Exceptions are opamps used without feedback as comparators and opamps with outputs that have been saturated due to excessive input voltage because of a defect in an earlier stage However an opamp s input is more positive than its in put yet the output of the IC is sitting at 14 volts the is almost certainly bad The same holds true if the above polarities are reversed Because the characteristics of the 6300 s circuitry are essentially independent of IC opamp characteristics an opamp can usually be replaced without recalibration A defective opamp may appear to work yet have extreme temperature sensitivity If parameters appear to drift excessively freeze spray may aid in diagnosing the prob lem Freeze spray is also invaluable in tracking down intermittent problems But use 5 12 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 6300 it sparingly because it can cause resistive short circuits due to moisture condensation on cold surfaces
292. l or subtle characteristics of certain components are exploited to produce an elegant design at a reasonable cost It is therefore unwise to make substitutions for listed parts Consult the factory if the listing of a part includes the note selected or realignment required Orban normally maintains an inventory of tested exact replacement parts that can be supplied quickly at nominal cost Standardized spare parts kits are also available When ordering parts from the factory please have available the following informa tion about the parts you want Orban part number Reference designator R78 IC14 Brief description of part Model serial and M if any number of unit see rear panel label To facilitate future maintenance parts for this unit have been chosen from the cata logs of well known manufacturers whenever possible Most of these manufacturers have extensive worldwide distribution and may be contacted through their web sites Control Board Control Board PART DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER 20128 000 01 RESISTOR 0 O 0805 R21 R46 20128 010 01 RESISTOR 10 0805 R31 R34 R86 R89 20128 022 01 RESISTOR 22 O 1 0805 R5 R6 20128 332 01 RESISTOR 33 2 O 0805 R10 R11 20128 499 01 RESISTOR 49 9 O 1 0805 R19 R20 R22 R23 20129 301 01 RESISTOR 3010 0805 R24 R25 R47 R66 20130 100 01 RESISTOR 1 00K 1 0805 R17 R35 20130 200 01 RESISTOR 2 00K 0805 R71 R79 R84 R8
293. l you have selected all the numbers in the IP port assigned by your network administrator C Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting F Connect your Ethernet network to the RJA5 jack on the rear panel of your 6300 e f you are connecting to a hub or router use a standard Ethernet cable e f you are connecting directly to the Ethernet jack on a computer use a crossover or reverse Ethernet cable G Press the NEXT button 2 Prepare the 6300 for modem connection through the serial port Skip this step if you will not be using a modem connection A Navigate to SETUP NETWORK amp REMOTE B Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see MODEM on the display 2 38 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 C Press the MODEM INIT soft button D the string that appears in the display is 50 4 this is correct Press the ESCAPE button and skip steps E and F below S0 4 is the 6300 default setting This activates auto answer functionality in the modem E Set the STRING to S024 Use the NEXT and PREV KEYs to move the cursor in turn to each character in the modem initialization string Use the knob to set the character to the desired value Repeat until you have set all the characters in the initialization string F Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting 3 Modem setup You will need two modems and two available phone lines one of each for your PC and
294. lation Levels In a perfect world one could set the peak level at OPTIMOD 63005 output 0 dBfs However there are at several potential problems that may make it desirable to set the modulation level slightly lower First is asynchronous re sampling which we have discussed at length earlier in this chapter See page 1 13 for example If any digital processing that causes its output samples to be asynchronous to its input samples is used after OPTIMOD 63005 out put this can cause the peak levels of individual samples to increase above the nomi nal threshold of limiting This increase is typically less than 0 508 Second is additional processing such as equalization Equalization that applies boosts at certain frequencies is very likely to add peak level and thus cause clipping However equalization that attenuates certain frequencies can also cause overshoots because of added phase shifts So be wary of any equalization and allow headroom to accommodate it Third is headroom in lossy data compression systems A well designed perceptual en coder will accept samples up to OdBfs and will have enough internal headroom to avoid clipping However there is no guarantee that receiver manufacturers or de coder providers will implement perceptual decoders with sufficient headroom to avoid clipping overshoots Such overshoots are the inevitable side effect of increas ing the quantization noise in the channel and can be as large as 3 4dB Mo
295. le the bass gain re duction could be 25 dB The normal setting of the AGC BASS COUPLING control is 0 dB which allows the AGC bass band to correct excessive bass as necessary but does not permit it to provide a dynamic bass boost Note that the operation of this control was changed in 6300 V1 1 software to work as explained above You may have to tweak this control to achieve the same bass balance that you had previously with V1 0 software METR Meter Display determines what signal the front panel AGC meter displays MASTER displays the gain reduction of the Master above 200 Hz band DELTA displays the difference between the gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands Full scale is 25 dB gain reduction Although it is located in the Full Modify screen to make it easy for a preset devel oper to switch meter modes this control is not part of the active preset and its set 3 36 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 ting is not saved in User Presets unlike the other controls in the Full Modify screens The meter mode always reverts to MASTER when the user leaves Full Modify Advanced AGC Controls The following AGC controls are available only in the 6300 PC Remote software AGC Window Size determines the size of the target zone window in the AGC If the input level falls within this target zone the AGC release time is set to the num ber specified by the AGC WiNDOW RELEASE control This is usually much slower than
296. lence gate circuits in the 6300 The first affects the AGC and the second affects the Multiband Compressor Each has its own threshold con trol See MB on page 3 50 In sound for picture the setting of the GATE THRESHOLD control is quite critical if you want the processing to be undetectable to the audience If this control is set too low then the 6300 will pump up quiet sounds such as ambiance and underscoring to unnaturally high levels Refer to Section 3 of this manual for a further discussion In the 5 band Structure dynamic single ended noise reduction see DWNEXP THR on page 3 52 can be used to reduce the level of the noise below the level at which it appears at the input If you are using the 6300 s analog input the overall noise performance of the sys tem is usually limited by the overload to noise ratio of the analog to digital con verter used by the 6300 to digitize the input This ratio is better than 108 dB It is important to drive the 6300 with professional levels more than 0 dBu reference level to achieve adequately low noise Clipping occurs at 27 dBu OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5 3 The 6300 s AES3 input is capable of receiving words of up to 24 bits 24 bit word has a dynamic range of approximately 144 dB The 6300 s digital input will thus never limit the unit s noise performance even with very high amounts of compres sion If an analog studio to transmitter link STL is used to pass
297. lias Connection Properties D Edit your new Direct Con nection properties ied Sung 8300 Alias 8300 modem a Click Settings Password Leave password blank to be prompted upon connect Local Folder FAPrearam Files Orban Optimod 83008300 1 Comment Serial Connection Ethernet Connection IPAddress 127 0 0 1 Connection to 8300 modem Port Number 5201 f OK Cancel Connection to 8300 modem Properties General Options Security Networking Advanced b Click the General tab 2 x c Select the modem you will be using to make T the connection on the Connect using PC side Modem Conexant HCF V30 56K Data Fax PCI Modem COM3 d Click Configure Phone number Area code Phone number 555 5555 Altemates Country region code Use dialing rules Dialing Rules Show icon in notification area when connected OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL e Set Maximum 115200 speed bps to f Check Enable hardware flow control 9 Check Enable modem error control h Check Enable mcdem compression i Make sure that no other box is checked j Click OK k Select the Networking tab Make sure that PPP Windows 95 98 NT4 2000 Internet ap pears in the Type of dial up server am calling field m Make sure that Internet Protocol TCP IP is checked You may leave Cl
298. lick the RESTORE button G Click DONE to dismiss the RESTORE dialog box To modify INPUT OUTPUT and SYSTEM SETUP Choose SETUP from the TOOLS menu or click the third from the left button on the button bar To set a control click it it will become highlighted and then use the wheel on the mouse to adjust it You can also use the and keys on the numeric keypad to adjust any control To modify AUTOMATION A Choose AUTOMATION from the TOOLS menu An Automation Dialog box will open B Click the NEW EVENT to create a new event Controls to set the event type and time are available on the right hand side of the dialog box C Check the ENABLE AUTOMATION check box at the top of the dialog box to en able automation To group multiple 6300s Right click ALL CONNECTIONS in the Connections List and select NEW GROUP You can add multiple 6300 to a single group to help organize a network of 6300 However only one 6300 from within a group can be connected to 6300 PC Re mote at any one time OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 63 Navigation Using the Keyboard In general PC Remote uses standard Windows conventions for navigation Navigate around the screens using the TAB key Use CTRL TAB to move to the next tabbed screen in PC Remote Use the and keys or the left and right arrow keys the numeric keypad to ad just control settings To Quit the Program Use standard Windows conventions Press ALT F4 on the keybo
299. lied to the 6300 s analog or digital inputs with reference to 0 digital full scale If the input meter s red segment lights up you are overdriving the 6300 s analog to digital converter which is a very common cause of audible distortion e meter shows the gain reduction of the slow 2 band AGC processing that precedes the multiband compressor Full scale is 25 dB gain reduction You can switch the meter within the Full Modify screen so that it either reads the gain reduction of the Master above 200 Hz band the gain reduction of the Bass band or the difference between the gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands This control is located in gt FULL The meter mode always reverts to MASTER when the user leaves Full Modify The latter reading is useful for assessing the dynamic bass equalization that the AGC produces and it helps you set the AGC BASS COUPLING control e Gate LED indicates gate activity lighting when the input audio falls below the threshold set by the multiband gate threshold When this happens the multi band compressor s recovery time is slowed drastically to prevent noise rush up during low level passages e Gain Reduction meters show the gain reduction in the multiband compressor Full scale is 25 dB gain reduction When the 5 band structure is operating all five meters indicate gain re duction When the 2 band structure is operating the B1 meter indicates gain re duction in
300. ll probably accept audio at 48 kHz sample rate regardless of the final sample rate of the transmission Any sample rate conversion may cause the transmitted sample to become asynchronous to the peak controlled samples emerging from OPTIMOD 6300 and may therefore introduce overshoot Fortunately as the audio bandwidth becomes lower this becomes less of the problem because the 48 kHz sample rate within OPTIMOD 6300 oversamples the audio It is therefore less likely that peaks will slip between the samples Subframe Delay OPTIMOD 6300 provides an adjustable time delay of up to 96 milliseconds This al lows the installer to force the total delay through the processing to equal one frame in sound for picture applications The definition of frame depends on the system in which OPTIMOD 6300 is installed The selections are MINIMUM approximately 24 ms delay 30 fps NTSC monochrome video 29 97 fps NTSC color video 25 fps most PAL video and 24 fps film You can also adjust the delay in one millisecond increments from 15 to 96 ms About Transmission Levels and Metering Meters Studio engineers and transmission engineers consider audio levels and their meas urements differently so they typically use different methods of metering to monitor these levels The VU meter is an average responding meter measuring the approxi mate RMS level with a 300ms rise time and decay time the VU indication usually under indicates the true pea
301. lly To back up User Presets system files and automation files onto your computer s hard drive A Select BACKUP To PC from the FILE Menu B Click OK PC Remote will offer three options e Save User Presets system files and automation in plain text This allows the presets and files to be read with any text editor program and to be readily exchanged between Optimod users e Save User Presets system files and automation files using the session pass code to encrypt them e Save User Presets system files and automation files using the password of your choice to encrypt them The encryption options prevent archived presets system files and auto mation files from being restored if the user does not have the password used for the encryption There is no back door Orban cannot help you to decrypt a preset whose password is unknown All User Preset system and automation files are copied from your Opti mod s internal memory to a folder called backup on your PC This folder is a subfolder of the folder named the same as the alias of the Op timod that you are backing up This folder name backup and location are hard coded into the soft ware If you wish to move the backup files somewhere else later use a file manager like Explorer on your computer OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 6 1 To make more than one backup archive rename the current backup folder for example to Backup1 6300 PC Remote will crea
302. local hard drive The PC Remote software reads these files to speed up its initialization If any of these files have been deleted or dam aged the PC Remote software will refresh them by downloading them from the 6300 If the PC Remote software needs to do this it can substantially increase the time required for the software to initialize particularly through a slow modem connection When this download is finished the main meters will appear e A wheel mouse is the quickest and easiest interface to use you will rarely if ever have to use the keyboard e The help box at the bottom of the screen always presents a short help mes sage for the function you have selected To modify a control setting A Choose PROCESSING PARAMETERS from the EDIT menu or click the second to the left button on the button bar B Select menu tabs for LEss MoRE STEREO ENHANCER and EQ to access Basic Modify controls All other menu tabs contain Full or Advanced Modify con trols You can reset any Basic Modify Control without losing LEss MoRE func tionality Full and Advanced modify control adjustments will cause LESS MORE to be grayed out To set a control click it it will become highlighted and then adjust it by dragging it with the mouse or moving the wheel on the mouse You can also use the and keys the numeric keypad to adjust any control To recall a preset A Choose RECALL PRESET from the FiLE menu to bring up the OPEN PRE
303. look ahead peak limiters which is where the major ity of the delay occurs The AGC and multiband pre limiter signals can be routed to any output The input output delay of the pre limiter signal is approximately 3 ms for the AGC or 5 ms at the multiband compressor This delay can still be uncomfort able to some but most DJ presenters find it acceptable and almost anyone can get used to it See page 6 41 for a diagram of the signal routing Streaming and Netcasting Applications This section was written in mid 2006 As the state of the art in netcasting is changing with ferocious rapidity we expect it to become outdated quickly Please check Orban s web site www orban com for newer information Using OPTIMOD 6300 in Streaming Applications You need an audio source connection either analog AES3 digital or SPDIF digital The digital input can accept any sample rate from 20 to 96 kHz You can also use any stream available within the computer s internal WAVE audio system such as a digital playout system If you use the computer s WAVE audio system you will need a sound card with full duplex capability and digital inputs and outputs Connect the digital output of the sound card to the 6300 s digital input and connect the 6300 s digital output to the input of the sound card You will ordinarily connect the signal that the sound card receives to the input of an encoder application like Orban s Opticodec PC Microsoft Windows Media Encode
304. lusion By carefully following the instructions in the Appendix you should have successfully installed the necessary Windows services and connected to your 6300 However if you experience any problems with this process or have any other 6300 questions please contact Orban Customer Service phone 1 510 351 3500 email custserv orban com For details on your new 6300 software from new features to operational sugges tions refer to our FTP site tp orban com 6300 2 46 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 47 Appendix Setting Up Serial Communications This appendix provides instructions for setting up both direct serial and modem connections from your 6300 to your PC You must do this when you define a new connection from the 6300 PC Remote application The appendix provides procedures for both the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems Note that the screen shots were prepared for Orban s Optimod FM 8300 and refer to that product They are directly applicable to the 6300 as well Preparing for Communication through Null Modem Cable 1 Configure your 6300 A On your 6300 s front panel navigate to SETUP NETWORK amp REMOTE B Hold down the PC CoNNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see DIRECT on the display 2 Connect the cable A Connect one end of a null modem cable to the DB9 serial connector on the 6300 s rear panel Be sure to use a null modem c
305. manual is part number 96119 110 03 Published April 2009 Copyright Orban orban 8350 East Evans Suite C4 Scottsdale AZ 85260 USA Phone 1 480 403 8300 Fax 1 480 403 8301 E Mail support orban com Site www orban com Operating Manual OPIIMOD 6300 Digital Multipurpose Audio Processor Version 1 1 Software orban Table of Contents In dex b ER ee c e fe ee Eee PER Ro 0 7 Section 1 Introduction E 1 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL sn 1 1 THE OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL AUDIO 8806 550 1 1 User Friendly Interface i ii Ld Rb eden Eana aiai eae 1 2 Absolute Control of Peak Modulation 1 2 Flexible Configuration 1 2 Adaptability through Multiple Audio Processing 51 1 3 Controllable cp 1 4 PRESETS IN OPTIMOD 6300 1 5 Factory ed e od ir e ESPERE 1 5 User Presets LLLA ES 1 6 INPUT OUTPUT CONFIGURATION 1 6 Digital AES3 Left Right
306. me Just as there are many possible ways of configuring a processing system using analog com ponents like equalizers compressors limiters and clippers the 6300 s DSP hard ware could realize several possible processing structures that Unlike an analog sys tem where creating a complete processing system involves physically wiring its vari ous components together the 6300 realizes its processing structures as a series of high speed mathematical computations made by Digital Signal Processing DSP in tegrated circuit chips There are two basic structures 2 band and 5 band To select a structure choose a factory preset having the desired structure and if you wish edit it to create a user preset To put a given structure on the air recall a factory or user preset associated with that structure 5 band The 5 band structure is very flexible enabling you to fine tune your sound There are several basic Factory Presets for the 5 band structure Each of these presets can be edited with the 1 55 control This control affects the sound for picture oriented presets differently than it does the music presets When a sound for picture oriented preset is on the air the 1 55 MORE control adjusts the average amount of gain reduction by adjusting the drive level to the 5 band structure s input This also adjusts the idle gain the amount of OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 1 5 gain reduction in the AGC section when the structu
307. me setting we feel that the optimal amount of gain re duction in the 2 band compressor for sound for picture applications is 10 15dB For fine arts formats operating with 0 10 dB of gain reduction with the gain riding 2 band Controls Full Modify Name 2B BASS CLIP 2B BASS CPL Advanced Name 2B Bass Clip Threshold 2B Bass Coupling Range 6 0 0 0 dB 0 100 96 2B DRIVE 2B Drive 10 25 dB 2 2B Gate Threshold Off 44 15 dB 2B REL 2B Release 0 5 20 dB 2B REL SHAPE LOUD THR 2B Release Shape Loudness Controller Threshold Linear Exponential Off 0 0 12 0 dB PARENT PRESET read only Less More Less More Index read only 1 0 10 0 2B Master Knee 90 dB 2B Bass Knee 50 dB 1 infinity 1 A 0 0 2B Master Ratio 1 1 1 1 2B Bass Ratio infinity 1 2B Master Break point 90 dB 2B Bass Break point 50 dB 2B Master Compression Threshold 15 0 Off 2B Bass Compression Threshold 10 0 5 0 dB Off 2B Master Attack 4 50 Off 2B Bass Attack 4 50 Off 2B Master Comp Ratio 1 1 0 1 2B Bass Comp Ratio 1 1 96 1 2B Master Knee 0 30 2B Bass Knee 0 30 2B Crossover Allpass Linear Table 3 8 2 band Controls OPERATION 3 4 1 3 42 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 set to OFF maintains a sense of dynamic range while still controlling levels
308. microwave STLs can introduce non constant group delay in the audio spectrum distorting peak levels when used to pass processed au dio Nevertheless in a system using a microwave STL OPTIMOD 6300 is sometimes located at the studio and any overshoots induced by the link are tolerated or re moved by the transmitter s protection limiter if any OPTIMOD 6300 can only be located at the transmitter if the signal to noise ratio of the STL is good enough to pass unprocessed audio The signal to noise ratio of the STL can be used optimally if an Orban Optimod PC 1101 8200ST Compressor Limiter HF Limiter Clipper an 4000 Transmission Limiter or another 6300 protects the link from overload Of these the 1101 and 6300 are currently manufactured as of this writing and are the pre ferred choices because their AGCs are identical to the AGC in the 6300 If OPTIMOD 6300 is located at the transmitter and receives unprocessed audio from a microwave STL it may be useful to use a companding type noise reduction system like dbx Type 2 or Dolby SR around the link This will minimize any audible noise buildup caused by compression within OPTIMOD 6300 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 1 5 Some microwave links may be modified such that the deviation from linear phase is less than 10 20 20 kHz and frequency response is less than 3dB down at 0 15Hz and less than 0 1dB down at 20 kHz This specification results in less than 196 over shoot with proce
309. mpressor You can see the effect of this extra gain reduction on the gain reduction meters Ordinarily the gating on the AGC and multiband limiter will prevent objectionable build up of noise and you will want to use the single ended noise reduction only on unusually noisy program material Modern commercial recordings will almost never need it We expect that its main use will be in talk oriented programming including sports OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 53 Please note that it is impossible to design such a system to handle all program mate rial without audible side effects You will get best results if you set the MB DOWN EXPANDER control of the noise reduction system to complement the program mate rial you are processing The MB DOWN EXPANDER should be set higher when the input is noisy and lower when the input is relatively quiet The best way to adjust the MB DOWN EXPANDER control is to start with the control set very high Reduce the control setting while watching the gain reduction meters Eventually you will see the gain increase in sync with the program Go further until you begin to hear noise modula tion a puffing or breathing sound the input noise in sync with the input program material Set the MB DOWN EXPANDER control higher until you can no longer hear the noise modulation This is the best setting Obviously the correct setting will be different for a sporting event than for classical music It may be wise to defin
310. n puente Proteger el cable de alimentaci n contra toda clase de dafios No doblar o apretar el cable Al desenchufar asir el enchufe y no el cable Sustituir inmediatamente cables dafiados No someter el aparato y el cable de alimentaci n a esfuerzo mec nico excesivo Para evitar el contacto con tensiones el ctricas peligrosas el aparato no debe abrirse En caso de producirse fallos de funcionamiento debe ser reparado s lo por talleres de servicio autorizados En el aparato no se encuentra ninguna pieza que pudiera ser reparada por el usuario Para evitar descargas el ctricas e incendios el aparato debe protegerse contra la humedad impidiendo que penetren sta o l quidos en el mismo En caso de producirse fallas de funcionamiento como consecuencia de la penetraci n de l quidos u otros objetos en el aparato hay que desconectarlo inmediatamente de la red y ponerse en contacto con un taller de servicio autorizado Safety Instructions Italian Far funzionare l apparecchio solo con la tensione e il tipo di corrente indicati sulla targa riportante i dati sulle prestazioni Sostituire i dispositivi di protezione valvole fusibili ecc solo con dispositivi aventi lo stesso amperaggio e lo stesso comportamento di interruzione Non cavallottare mai i dispositivi di protezione Evitare qualsiasi danno al cavo di collegamento alla rete Non piegare o schiacciare il cavo Per staccare il cavo tirare la presa e mai il cavo Sostituire subi
311. n box sometimes called a marquee around adjacent controls by clicking and dragging To ungroup controls click on any control outside the group B Decide whether you are going to use 2 band or 5 band processing 2 band processing retains any fixed equalization originally applied to the program except for a mild amount of dynamic adjustment to bass below 200 Hz 5 band processing performs an automatic re equalization function Both flavors of processing can be extremely smooth and unob trusive Because the 5 band compressor limiter offers user adjustable in terband coupling that determines the discreteness of the multiband compression it is usually the best choice e f you are going to use 2 band processing recall the 2B SOFT KNEE preset e f you are going to use 5 band processing recall the 5B SOFT KNEE preset e f you want to do look ahead peak limiting without any other dynamics processing recall the LOOK AHEAD LIMITER preset OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 67 See Protection and AGC Presets on page 3 17 for a description of these presets C If you have started with one of the SOFT KNEE presets the AGC will already be Orr If you need a very large amount of compression for an application like processing material intended for in flight entertainment systems you can ei ther edit the preset to turn the AGC on or start with a preset other than SOFT KNEE You can turn the AGC off globally for all presets which is
312. n page 2 22 of this manual describes this procedure for a 6300 at the transmitter the procedures for the 2300 5300 8300 8382 8400 8500 9300 and 9400 Optimods are virtually identical and are described in their manuals e Digital output 2 emits a peak limited multiband processed signal to drive a netcast encoder like Orban s Opticodec PC or a digital radio transmitter e The analog output emits a low delay multiband processed signal with no peak limiting to drive talent headphones at the studio The total input to output delay through this path is approximately 5 ms While you could also use one of the digital outputs to emit this signal this would add about 1 ms of delay because of the additional delay of the external D A converter required before the headphone amplifier 1 12 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 The peak limiters can be switched to operate either flat or on 50us or 75us pre emphasis curve to protect a pre emphasized path like a typical analog microwave STL When operated in pre emphasized mode the peak limiters should only be used for light protection limiting with a low duty cycle Otherwise you may hear pumping on material with a lot of high frequency energy like sibilance Because the look ahead peak limiting technology used in the 6300 per forms optimally with flat transmission channels like almost all digital channels the 6300 cannot provide loudness processing for pre emphasized radio ch
313. n the 2B RELEASE SHAPE control is set to LINEAR Compression induced audio density remains constant when the gain reduction is above the 2B BREAKPOINT setting When the gain reduction is below the 2B BREAKPOINT setting density decreases proportionally to the amount of gain reduc tion For example if the 2B BREAKPOINT is set to 10 DB the release rate in dB second will be constant when the gain reduction is above 10 dB Between 10 dB and 0 dB gain reduction the release rate will slow down more and more The calibration of the BREAKPOINT controls is only accurate when KNEE 0 dB and or Ratio infinity 1 i e when the compression ratio is essentially infinite When the ratio is less than infinite the effective breakpoint of the compressor will be lower than 2B BREAKPOINT setting The main use of the 2B BREAKPOINT control is to prevent the compressor from objec tionably increasing audio density when using low compression ratios and a signifi cant amount of gain reduction for example 10 dB The 2B BREAKPOINT control is best adjusted by ear If you find that density increases too much as gain reduction increases lower the 2B BREAKPOINT control s setting If you would like to have more density at high amounts of gain reduction increase the 2B BREAKPOINT control s set ting 10 dB is a good starting point for setting this control 2B Crossover sets the structure of the 2 band crossover to Allpass or Linear See AGC CROSSOVER on page
314. nd or User Bits Try turning both of these off in the 6300 See step 21 on page 2 18 and step 22 on page 2 19 General Dissatisfaction with Subjective Sound Quality The 6300 is a complex processor that can be adjusted for many different tastes For most users the factory presets as augmented by the gamut offered by the LEss MORE control for each preset are sufficient to find a satisfactory sound However some users will not be satisfied until they have accessed other Modify Processing controls and have adjusted the subjective setup controls in detail to their satisfac tion Such users must fully understand the material in Section 3 of this manual to achieve the best results from this exercise Section 1 of this manual provides a thorough discussion of system engineering con siderations particularly with regard to minimizing overshoot and noise Security Passcode Lost When Unit is Locked Out Please see f You Have Forgotten Your Passcode on page 2 34 Connection Issues between the 6300 and a PC Modem or Net work e Quick Setup On the Station ID screen Quick Setup 9 Use Escape in place of Cancel The Cancel button will not work e Software Updates Close any running Windows programs before attempting to update e Interrupted Software Updates you canceled an update before it com pleted wait at least one minute before attempting your next update e Software Updates via Modem If you are updating via the modem do
315. nd output are transformer coupled and have very good resis tance to If you have RFI problems and are using analog connections on either the input or output using digital connections will almost certainly eliminate the RFI Poor Peak Modulation Control The 6300 ordinarily controls peak modulation to an accuracy of 1 when operated with 48 kHz output sample rate As explained in Section 1 output sample rate con version will slightly compromise this control because the peak control occurs with reference to individual sample values at 48 kHz The converted samples no longer have the same peak values as the 48 kHz samples some values can be slightly higher However the overshoot of the converted signal almost never exceeds 0 5dB and is therefore not a significant problem Using the analog output will cause similar amounts of overshoot because the sam ples in the transmitter are not synchronous with the peak controlled samples in the 6300 Further analog connections can cause analog domain overshoot if the connec tion is not phase linear and has a 3dB low frequency cutoff of greater than 0 15Hz Audible Distortion Make sure that the problem can be observed on more than one monitoring system and at several locations 5 2 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 6300 Verify that the source material at the 6300 s audio inputs is clean Heavy processing can exaggerate even slightly distorted material pushing it over the edge into unac cepta
316. nfigure the 8200ST s internal jumpers A Remove all screws holding the 8200ST s cover in place then lift it off ORBAN MODEL 6300 2 1 0 INSTALLATION TOP OF MAIN BOARD 999929 23 6 ria gt Output Pre Emphasis Jumpers Clipper Jumpers PRE EMPHASIZED FLAT CLIPPER ON CLIPPER OFF LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT JA JE JF JE JF JA Line up Level Jumpers PEAK AVG LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT JB JC JB JC Figure 2 3 8200ST Jumper Settings Factory Configuration OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 23 1 1 Refer to Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 B Place jumper JA in the CLIPPER ON position C If you have defeated the STL transmitter s preemphasis place jumpers JE and JF in the PRE EMPHASIZED position D If you cannot defeat the STL transmitter s preemphasis place jumpers JE and JF in the FLAT position E Replace the top cover and then replace all screws snugly Be careful not to strip the threads by fastening the screws too tightly 2 Install the 8200ST in the rack Connect the 8200ST s audio input and out put Refer to the 8200ST Operating Manual if you require in
317. ng in any system e The 63005 software be upgraded by running Orban supplied download able upgrade software on a PC The upgrade can occur remotely through the 6300 s Ethernet port or serial port connected to an external modem or locally by connecting a Windows computer to the 6300 s serial port through the sup plied null modem cable Presets in OPTIMOD 6300 There are two distinct kinds of presets in OPTIMOD 6300 factory presets and user presets Factory Presets The Factory Presets are our factory recommended settings for various program formats or types There are multiple Factory Presets for both radio oriented and video oriented programming Each Factory Preset on the Preset list is really a library of more than 20 separate presets selected by navigating to MODIFY PROCESSING gt LEss MoRE and using the LEss MORE control to adjust OPTIMOD 6300 for less or more processing The factory presets are listed and described starting on page 3 15 The description indicates the processing structure and the type of processing Factory Presets are stored in OPTIMOD 6300 s non volatile memory and cannot be erased You can change the settings of a Factory Preset but you must then store those settings as a User Preset which you are free to name as you wish The Factory Preset remains unchanged 1 6 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 User Presets User Presets permit you to change a Factory Preset to suit your requirements an
318. ng this output with an external loss of carrier or loss of audio alarm system to mute the talent headphones or monitor speakers e Mute Digital Out 1 When voltage is applied digital output 1 mutes e Mute Digital Out 2 When voltage is applied digital output 2 mutes No Function remote input is disabled 3 End remote control interface programming When you are finished programming the remote control interface press the Es cape button to return to higher menu levels Networking and Remote Control Skip this step if you do not wish to connect to your 6300 remotely either for downloading software upgrades or for PC Remote Control The 6300 has a built in Ethernet connector that can be used with 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps networks using the TCP IP protocol You can also connect a PC to the 6300 through the 6300 s RS 232 serial port either by modem or directly through a null modem cable 1 Prepare the 6300 for an Ethernet network connection Skip this step if you will not be using an Ethernet connection e See your network administrator to get the data required in the following pro cedure e Note that if you wish to do this from the 6300 PC Remote software then you must first be able to connect to the 6300 Therefore you will usually perform this procedure from the 6300 s front panel to prepare it for connection A Navigate to SETUP NETWORK amp REMOTE NEXT B Press the SET IP ADDRESS soft button The IP A
319. ng when band gains are un equal Allpass also helps make speech waveforms more symmetrical The delay line derived phase linear crossover has the same desirable smoothness in its fre 3 16 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 quency response as allpass while adding 4 ms of delay to the processing Most 2 band presets use the delay line derived phase linear crossover configuration The 2 band structure contains a defeatable CBS Loudness Controller algorithm which is mainly useful in sound for picture oriented applications The CBS Loudness Controller controls the loudness of most commercials well enough to eliminate viewer annoyance in sound for picture applications It works by constantly monitor ing the subjective loudness of the 6300 s output When subjective loudness would otherwise exceed a preset threshold the Loudness Controller enhances the normal gain control produced by the processing with further gain reduction preventing loudness from exceeding the threshold The user can adjust this threshold from the FULL CONTROL screen of any 2 band preset The edited preset can then be saved as a user preset The Loudness Controller may reduce the dramatic effect of certain sounds in enter tainment programming like gunshots explosions or screeching tires Operators may therefore want to turn the Loudness Controller on during commercial breaks and off during normal programming sound for picture oriented 2 band presets have the Loudness
320. nnecting the 6300 to the serial port on your computer If your computer has a DB25 connector you must obtain an adapter e If connecting by modem a 3Com U S Robotics 56kbps fax modem EXT and normal not null modem cable for the 6300 side of the connection Note that Orban Customer Service does not support any other type of modem for connect ing to the 6300 e If connecting by network a standard Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors to connect to a network hub or router or a crossover Ethernet cable to connect di rectly to your PC s Ethernet jack e PCrunning Windows 2000 SP3 or higher or XP 6300 PC Remote will not run on older Windows versions Recommended Components COMPUTE coia NE ERN Pentium II or higher Available Disk Space 25MB ea 256MB DIS SVGA or higher Microsoft Windows 2000 SP3 or higher or XP Home or Pro COM Port 16550 or compatible UART WARNING When connecting your 6300 use shielded cable to protect the pins in the RS 232 connector from electrostatic discharge The following subsections provide steps for connecting to your Optimod 6300 soft ware using the Windows 2000 XP Direct Cable Connect or via modem connection Running the Orban Installer Program Insert the installer
321. not change the connection type parameter on the 6300 while the modem is con nected or attempting to connect e Security Passcode An ALL SCREENS administrator security passcode is re quired for upgrading regardless of whether you are using a Direct Modem or Ethernet connection 5 6 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 6300 e Passcode Format The passcode is case sensitive When entering it into Win dows Dial up Connection dialog box it must be typed exactly as it was origi nally entered into the Security screen Troubleshooting Connections e f you get an error message such as the specified port is not connected or There is no answer You may have the wrong interface type set on your 6300 Navigate to SETUP gt NETWORK amp REMOTE gt PC CONNEC and check the interface setting If you are connecting via Direct Serial Connection or modem review the Proper ties you have set on that connection Double check to ensure that you have set Windows parameters as described in Appendix Setting Up Serial Communica tions on page 2 47 e f your Direct Connect does not work A Check to make sure that the cables are connected properly B Check that you are using a null modem cable C Ensure that the null modem cable is connected to the 6300 s serial connector e f your Modem Connect does not work A Ensure that the modem cables and phone lines are connected properly B Check that you have entered the correct phone numbe
322. nspect If you note obvious physical damage contact the carrier immediately to make a damage claim Packed with the 6300 are lea Operating Manual 2ea Line Cords domestic European 4ea Rack mounting screws 10 32 x Y 2 with washers 10 lea PC Remote Software CD Save all packing materials If you should ever have to ship the 6300 e g for ser vicing it is best to ship it in the original carton with its packing materials be cause both the carton and packing material have been carefully designed to pro tect the unit Complete the Registration Card and return it to Orban please The Registration Card enables us to inform you of new applications per formance improvements software updates and service aids that may be developed and it helps us respond promptly to claims under warranty without our having to request a copy of your bill of sale or other proof of purchase Please fill in the Registration Card and send it to us today The Registration Card is located after the cover page Customer names and information are confidential and are not sold to anyone 2 2 INSTALLATION 2 Install the appropriate power cord TYPE 18 3 SVT COR TYP 3 x 82 mm CONDUCTOR WIRE COLOR E NORMAL ALT L LINE BROWN BLACK N NEUTRAL BLUE WHITE E EARTH GND GREEN YELLOW GREEN PLUG FOR 115 VAC USA TYPE HOSVV 0 75 L CONDUCTOR WIRE COLOR LINE BROWN NEUTRAL BLUE
323. ntly sets the gain of the lowest frequency band ac cording to the setting of the DJ Bass boost control in the Equalization screen Thus without introducing obvious coloration the gating smoothly preserves the av erage overall frequency response tilt of the multiband compressor broadly main taining the automatic equalization curve it generates for a given piece of pro gram material If the MB THR Gate Threshold control is turned Orr the DJ Bass control is disabled AGC B CPL AGC Bass Coupling control clamps the amount of dynamic bass boost in units of dB that the AGC can provide In V1 0 the unit of measure was percent The AGC processes audio in a master band for all audio above approximately 200 Hz and a bass band for audio below approximately 200 Hz Starting with V1 1 software the AGC Master and Bass compressor sidechains operate without internal coupling The gain reduction in the Bass audio path is either the output of the Bass compres sor sidechain or the output of the Master band sidechain The AGC Bass COUPLING control sets the switching threshold For example if the AGC BAss COUPLING control is set to 4 dB and the master gain reduction is 10 dB the bass gain reduction cannot decrease below 6 dB even if the gain reduction signal from the Bass compressor sidechain is lower However the audio path bass gain reduction can be larger than the master gain reduction without limit In the previous examp
324. ny but the specified recep tacles This warranty is void unless service or repairs are performed by an authorized service center No responsibility is assumed for any special incidental or consequen tial damages However the limitation of any right or remedy shall not be effective where such is prohibited or restricted by law Simply take or ship your Orban products prepaid to our service department Be sure to include a copy of your sales slip as proof of purchase date We will not repair transit damage under the no charge terms of this warranty Orban will pay return shipping See Technical Support on page 5 12 No other warranty written or oral is authorized for Orban Products This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights that vary from state to state Some states do not allow the exclusion of limitations of inciden tal or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the above exclusions and limitations may not apply to you INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY Orban warrants Orban products against evident defects in material and workman ship for a period of two years from the date of original purchase for use This war ranty does not cover damage resulting from misuse or abuse or lack of reasonable care or inadequate repairs performed by unauthorized service centers Performance of repairs or replacements under this warranty is subject to submission of this War ranty Registrati
325. o activate the AUTO ANSWER setting other dipswitches should be set to the up position Connecting Using Windows 2000 Modem Connection This connection is used both for upgrading your 6300 and for connecting the 6300 PC Remote application to your 6300 1 Add and configure modem for Windows 2000 If your modem is already installed skip to Launch a Windows 2000 Modem connec tion on page 2 62 A Install Windows 2000 modem 2 58 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer a If you are using an external modem connect the modem to a serial port on your PC and make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line b On your PC click Start Settings Control Panel Phone and Modem Options C Click the Modems tab d Verify that your modem appears in the list available under The following Modems are installed e Verify that your modem is Attached to the correct port If your modem is unavailable or not attached to the correct port you must Add it See your Windows documentation f If your modem is available in the list available under The following Modems are installed and it is attached to the correct port then click Properties for that modem g Make sure the port speed is set at 115200 h Click OK B Create a New Windows 2000 Dial Up Connection a Click Start Settings Network and Dial up Connections Make New Connection b
326. o the 6300 can create competitively loud mas ters Radio Style Presets The presets Table 3 2 on page 3 20 have been named similarly to their radio coun terparts in Orban s OPTIMOD FM 8400 and 8500 The basic audio texture of corre sponding 6300 and 8500 presets heard through the 8500 s digital radio output is similar although the 6300 will tend to have 1 2 dB more bass In addition all 6300 presets have the stereo enhancer turned off to reduce potential codec stereo encod ing artifacts If you wish to reduce the bass set the Band 1 and or Band 2 compression thresholds lower to taste Then save your work as a User Preset The texture of the corresponding 6300 and Optimod FM 8500 presets is quite similar although the 6300 presets will usually have a less restricted high frequency sound because the 6300 performs no high frequency limiting other than that created by gain reduction in Band 5 in the 5 band presets Unlike the presets in Orban s FM processors no 6300 preset uses phase rotation Therefore if you use the 6300 to process the main digital chan nel in HD Radio some care must be applied in cross fading to avoid mo mentary audible comb filtering because of the different phase responses 3 20 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 of the analog and digital channels In practice this means that the cross fade should be quite fast perhaps 50 milliseconds RADIO STYLE PRESETS Preset Names CLASSICAL 2 BAND CLASSICAL 2B SFTK
327. o use without discomfort although they may need some time to become accustomed to it bypassing the look ahead limiter will reduce bone conduction comb filtering A Press the NEXT button B Skip this step if you will not be using the analog output Turn the knob to choose one of the following processing chains for the analog output e AGC stereo enhancement equalization and AGC without peak limiting e AGC LIM stereo enhancement equalization AGC and look ahead peak limiting e MULTIBAND stereo enhancement equalization AGC and 2 Band or 5 Band compression without peak limiting e MB LIM stereo enhancement equalization AGC 2 Band or 5 Band com pression and look ahead peak limiting If you set Ext AGC to YEs in System Setup this defeats the AGC In this case choosing AGC causes the input signal to be passed to the analog output with no dynamics processing just stereo enhancement and equalization AGC LIM results in stereo enhancement equalization and look ahead limiting MULTIBAND results in stereo enhancement equalization and 2 Band or 5 Band compression without AGC MB LIM results in stereo enhancement equalization and 2 Band or 5 Band compression with look ahead limiting but without AGC CAUTION If the outputs are configured for no peak limiting they are usually unsuited for driving a transmitter An exception is an STL having 16 bits of dynamic range or more In this case it is often pra
328. o words from the output sample rate converter SRC and transmits them as AES3 format digital audio signals on the digital output connector 1 Stereo Digital to Analog D A Converter Located on input output DSP board The D A IC211 is a stereo 24 bit delta sigma converter It receives the serial left and right audio data samples from the DSP at 48 kHz sample rate and converts them into audio signals requiring further relatively undemanding analog filter ing IC211 is surface mounted and is not field replaceable 2 Analog Output Stages Located on input output DSP board The left and right analog signals emerging from IC211 are each filtered ampli fied and applied to a floating balanced integrated line driver which has 500 output impedance The line driver outputs are applied to the RF filtered left and right analog output connectors These analog signals can represent either the transmitter or monitor output of audio processing Component Level Description IC201 and associated components filter the left channel signal emerging from IC211 The purpose of these stages is to reduce the out of band noise energy resulting from the delta sigma D A s noise shaping filter and to translate the differential output of the D A converter into single ended form These com ponents apply a 3 order low pass filter to the differential signal from the D A This filter does not induce significant overshoot of the processed audio which would
329. ods It can therefore accurately substitute for the AGCs in these devices and can help maintain an all digital signal path throughout the facility Because the 6300 s AGC is more advanced than the AGCs in Orban s 2200 8200 and 9200 Optimods the 6300 can upgrade the per formance of these older products when substituted for their AGCs Moreover because the 6300 supports presets that be recalled by remote control it can be automatically synchronized to the presets active at a transmitter side Optimod when presets are dayparted The 6300 s multiband processing is based on the technology used in Op timod FM 8500 s digital radio processing path and will sound similar To help you match the sound of an 8400 or 8500 the 6300 provides presets with the same names as those in Optimod 8400 and 8500 If you are us ing a factory preset at a transmitter side 8400 or 8500 you can recall a preset with the same name in the 6300 to ensure that the sound stays the same as it would if you were using an 8400 or 8500 with its internal AGC To achieve this match you must adjust the transmitter side Optimod s input reference level so that the Optimod performs the correct amount of multiband gain reduction i e the same amount of GR that it would have performed if its internal AGC were active This match will occur automatically if you use the 6300 s tone generator to emit a 400 Hz tone and then use the tone to calibrate the transmitter side Optimod Step E o
330. ogramming As you turn the control knob the functions listed below will appear in the highlighted field e Input Analog Indicates that the 6300 is processing audio from its analog input e Input Digital Indicates that the 6300 is processing audio from its AES3 digital input e Analog Input Silent Indicates that the level at either or both analog in put channels is below the threshold set in step 16 on page 2 28 e AES Input Silent Indicates that the level at either or both digital input channels is below the threshold set in step 16 on page 2 28 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL e AES Input Error Indicates that the 6300 s AES input receiver chip has de tected that the input data is unusable When the chip detects such an error it automatically switches the in put to ANALOG e No Function Tally output is disabled C Program tally output 2 if you wish following the procedure in step B above with the TALLY OUT2 button Automation Using the 6300 s Internal Clock 1 If you have not already done so set the system clock You can also set the clock automatically via PC Remote or the Internet See Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Time Server starting on page 2 38 A Navigate to SETUP NEXT TIME DATE AND ID SET TIME a Set hours and minutes b Enter seconds slightly ahead of the correct time Wait until the entered time agrees with the correct time Then press the ENTER TIME button to set the clock
331. on Card completed and signed by the dealer on the day of purchase and the sales slip Shipment of the defective item is for repair under this warranty will be at the customer s own risk and expense This warranty is valid for the original purchaser only OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 25 EXTENDED WARRANTY Any time during the initial two year Warranty period but not thereafter you may purchase a three year extension to the Warranty yielding a total Warranty period of five years by remitting to Orban ten percent of the gross purchase price of your Orban product This offer applies only to new Orban products purchased from an authorized Orban Dealer To accept the extended five year warranty please sign and date below and fax this copy along with a copy of your original invoice showing date of purchase to Gareth Paredes at 510 351 0500 ACCEPT THE EXTENDED FIVE YEAR WARRANTY DATE MODEL NUMBER 6300 SERIAL NUMBER OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 25 1 Section 2 Installation Installing the 6300 Allow about 2 hours for installation Installation consists of 1 unpacking and inspecting the 6300 2 mounting the 6300 in a rack 3 connecting inputs outputs and power 4 optional connecting of remote control leads and 5 optional connecting of computer interface control leads When you have finished installing the 6300 proceed to Quick Setup on page 2 12 1 Unpack and i
332. on to leave the Security menu 2 34 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 To Unlock the Front Panel A On the 6300 front panel operate any button or the knob The PASSCODE screen will appear B Enter a passcode using the four soft buttons The 6300 functionality that you can access depends on the security level of the passcode that you entered After you have finished working the panel will automatically re lock af ter the time delay you set in SETUP SECURITY AUTOLOCK You can set a new delay at any time if you have an ALL ACCESS passcode Dial up Networking and the Passcode When you make a Windows Dial up Networking connection Windows will ask you for your passcode To allow the connection to occur enter any passcode that you set at the 6300 s front panel Once your PC is connected to the 6300 you will be able to access the 6300 functionality corresponding to the security level of your passcode If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode You can reset factory defaults and wipe out security passcodes in case you forgot your ALL ACCESS passcode A Remove power from the 6300 B While pressing both the ESCAPE and SETUP buttons restore power The Restore Defaults screen appears C To gain access to the 6300 press the ERASE ALL PASSCODES soft button D Reprogram passcodes as necessary see To Create a Passcode on page 2 32 The RESTORE DEFAULTS button in the Restore Defaults screen restores all System Setup and Input outpu
333. onds displaying the largest range of information Choose No to make the display static showing the time the active preset the ac tive input and whether the stereo or dual mono mode is active The following material provides detailed instructions on how to set up the 6300 If QUICK SETUP does not fully address your setup needs or if you wish to customize your system beyond those provided with QUICK SETUP then you may need the addi tional information in the sections below However for most users this material is only for reference because QUICK SETUP has enabled them to set up the 6300 cor rectly Analog and Digital I O Setup For the following adjustments use the appropriately labeled soft button to choose the parameter to be adjusted To change a parameter like an output level it is usually necessary to hold down the soft button while turning the knob 1 Set the MAX LPF frequency as appropriate to your application 10 0 kHz to 20 0 kHz 1 kHz steps The 6300 s lowpass filter is located before any dynamics processing and affects all outputs equally It is a phase linear FIR filter The 6300 s audio bandwidth can be set in three places 1 in Setup 2 by remote control and 3 in the EQ page of the Modify screen The latter allows the active preset to determine the bandwidth so you can change the bandwidth by recalling a User Preset OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 242 1 6300 s bandwidth is alway
334. onnected together e Ina low RF field cable shields should be connected at one end only preferably the destination input end e n a high RF field audio cable shields should be connected to a solid earth ground at both ends to achieve best shielding against RFI Power Ground e Ground the 6300 chassis through the third wire in the power cord Proper grounding techniques never leave equipment chassis unconnected to power earth ground A proper power ground is essential for safe operation Lifting a chassis from power ground creates a potential safety hazard OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 9 Circuit Ground e To maintain the same potential in all equipment the circuit audio grounds must be connected together The 6300 s circuit and chassis ground are internally connected there is no ground lift switch This should never cause a problem with noise or ground loop hum if the 6300 s is connected to other equipment via bal anced connections e In high RF fields the system is usually grounded through the equipment rack in which the 6300 is mounted The rack should be connected to a solid earth ground by a wide copper strap wire is completely ineffective at VHF because of the wire s self inductance Studio Level Controller Installation optional Skip this section if you are not using a studio level controller ahead of the 6300 Continue with Quick Setup on page 2 12 Note that this section has nothing
335. onnecting to the Optimod through a direct serial connection dial up networking through modems or its Ethernet port The security levels are 1 All Screens i e administrator level 2 All Screens except Security 2 32 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 3 All screens except Modify and Security 4 Presets Modify Save Memory and Automation 5 Presets and Automation 6 Presets There is no default passcode The Optimod s front panel cannot be locked out unless the Optimod has been assigned at least one All Access passcode Your Optimod secures User Presets by encrypting them using the Advanced Encryp tion Standard algorithm with the session passcode as its key when PC Remote fetches them Hence a packet sniffer cannot intercept User Presets in plaintext form PC Remote then writes the fetched User Presets in encrypted form on your hard drive where they remain for the duration of your PC Remote session If PC Remote exits normally it will erase these temporary User Preset files from your computer s hard disk If it does not exit normally these files will remain in encrypted form However the next time that PC Remote starts up it will automatically clean up any orphaned files To Create a Passcode A Navigate to SETUP SECURITY ADD PASSCODES If the front panel is already password protected you can only access this screen by entering a passcode with Access privileges B Use the four soft buttons labele
336. ons 1 21 network timeserver 2 38 networking 2 36 News format 3 23 NEXT button 3 1 NICAM 1 14 noise specification 6 1 troubleshooting 5 2 null modem cable communicating through 2 47 null modem cable 2 43 0 OPTIMOD 6300 1 1 output analog output level trim adjustment 4 8 analog connecting 2 6 analog specifications 6 2 digital setting dither 2 26 digital setting sample rate 2 26 digital setting sync 2 26 digital setting word length 26 digital specifications 6 3 headphone monitoring setup 2 14 24 26 output level setup 2 24 25 quick setup 2 17 output mix controls 3 54 overshoot excessive 5 1 P parametric equalizer 3 8 parent preset 3 45 parts obtaining 6 13 parts list base board 6 13 display board 6 18 19 board 6 15 parts list 6 13 passcode and dial up networking 2 34 creating 2 32 deleting 2 33 editing 2 32 programming 2 31 recovering from lost 2 34 PC Orban installer program 2 43 PC board locator diagram 6 21 PC control security 1 23 PC hardware requirements 2 43 PC Remote aliases 3 63 moving alias folders 3 64 multiple coexisting versions 3 63 upgrading versions 3 63 PC Remote Software 3 57 performance measuring 4 6 phase rotator 3 7 Phase Rotator 3 31 phase linear two band purist processing 3 9 port 2 37 P
337. onsists of a slow 2 band gated AGC Automatic Gain Control for gain riding followed by a gated 2 band compressor and a look ahead limiter By choosing the crossover mode correctly the 2 band Structure can be made phase linear throughout to maximize sonic transparency The 2 band structure has an open easy to listen to sound that is similar to the source material if the source material is of good quality However if the spectral balance between the bass and high frequency energy of the program material is in correct the 2 band structure when its B2 B1 COUPLE control is operated toward 0 can gently correct it without introducing obvious coloration In radio oriented applications the 2 band structure is mainly useful for classical or fine arts programming that demands high fidelity to the original program source The PROTECTION preset is a 2 band preset that provides the highest fidelity other 2 band presets provide more processing The 2 band structure preserves the frequency balance between midrange and high frequency elements in the programming while permitting gentle automatic re equalization of the balance between these elements in the master band which is above 200 Hz and elements in the bass band below 200 Hz The AGC and 2 band crossovers can be configured to be either phase linear i e constant delay or allpass Allpass provides minimum time delay along with a frequency response that is free from peaking or dippi
338. ontrolled samples in the processing If you are using external sync this special rela tionship no longer holds e Selecting a 32 kHz output sample rate will automatically set the highest available audio bandwidth to 15 kHz DO will also affect the available range of test tone frequencies When DO is set to 32 kHz the highest tone frequency setting is 15 kHz When DO is set to 44 1 or above the tone frequency range extends to 20 kHz E Set the DO1 Sync Choose e INTERNAL the output sample rate is synchronized to the 6300 s internal crys tal controlled clock e INPUT the output sample rate is synchronized to the sample rate appearing at the 6300 s AES3 input or e EXTERNAL the output sample rate is synchronized to the sample rate ap pearing at the 6300 s BNC sync input when an AES11 signal or a wordclock drives it See step A above F Press NEXT Then set the desired output DO1 WoRD word length 14 16 18 20 or 24 in bits The largest valid word length in the 6300 is 24 bits The 6300 can also truncate its output word length to 20 18 16 or 14 bits The 6300 can add dither see the next step Adjust 001 DITH dither to IN or Our as desired In or Out When set to In the 6300 adds high pass dither before any truncation of the output word The amount of dither automatically tracks the set ting of the WoRD LEN control This first order noise shaped dither cons
339. op Cover Place the cover on the unit and reinstall the Phillips screws Be careful not to pinch any cables 4 6 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 6300 Field Audit of Performance Required Equipment e Ultra low distortion sine wave oscillator THD analyzer audio voltmeter With verified residual distortion below 0 0196 Audio Precision System One or similar high performance system The NAB Broadcast and Audio System Test CD is an excellent source of test signals when used with a high quality CD player e Digital voltmeter Accurate to 0 1 e Oscilloscope DC coupled triggered sweep with 5M Hz or greater vertical bandwidth Two 6200 5 resistors e Optional Audio Precision System 1 without digital option or System 2 for digi tal tests It is assumed that the technician is thoroughly familiar with the operation of this equipment This procedure is useful for detecting and diagnosing problems with the 6300 s per formance It includes checks of frequency response noise and distortion perform ance and output level capability This performance audit assesses the performance of the analog to digital and digi tal to analog converters and verifies that the digital signal processing section DSP is passing signal correctly If it is doing so there is a high probability that the DSP is performing the dynamic signal processing correctly There is therefore no need to measure such things as attack and release times
340. or CEE7 7 plug Continental Europe as appropriate to your 6300 s Model Number An RS 232 PC Remote Computer Interface labeled SERIAL PORT is provided to connect the 6300 to IBM PC compatible computers directly or via modem for re mote control metering and software downloads A Remote Interface Connector connector allows you to connect the 6300 to your existing transmitter remote control or other simple contact closure control de vices The 6300 remote control supports user programmable selection of up to eight optically isolated inputs for any one of the following parameters recalling any fac tory or user presets selecting tone or bypass modes selecting stereo or dual mono mode selecting analog digital or digital J 17 input and clock synchronization See Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2 35 The 6300 remote control ac cepts a DB 25 connector The Ethernet Port accepts a 10Mb second or 100Mb second Ethernet connection terminated with an RJ45 connector Digital AES3 Input and AES3 dual Outputs are provided to support two channel AES3 standard digital audio signals through XLR type connectors In dual mono applications digital outputs 1 and 2 can be dedicated to audio channel 1 left and channel 2 right respectively Analog Inputs and Outputs are provided to support left and right audio signals through XLR type connectors Wordclock AES11id Sync Input is provided on a female BNC connector T
341. ore likely to encourage longer times spent listening than are the loud presets For Album Oriented Rock AOR we recommend the ROCK MEDIUM or ROCK OPEN versions although you might prefer the more conservative ROCK LIGHT or ROCK SMOOTH versions ROCK MEDIUM LOWBASS is an open sounding preset with a lot of bass punch Its 5 band Release control is set to Slow2 so that the sound is relaxed and not at all busy At the same time the preset is competitively loud It is an excellent choice for adult contemporary and soft rock formats where long time spent listening is desired SMOOTH JAZZ This preset is designed for commercial broadcasters playing smooth jazz Kenny G etc It is a loud preset that is designed to prevent stridency with saxes and other horns This preset is based on a custom 8400 preset that has been used successfully by a major market smooth jazz station with very good ratings However if the loudness density tradeoff is not to your taste use LESS MORE to turn it down producing lower loudness with less density OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 25 WMA MUSIC This preset is based on GREGG SLOW but has been edited to mini mize artifacts in the Windows Media Audio V9 codec when operated at bitrates be low 64 kbps See Processing for Low Bit Rate Codecs on page 3 4 WMA NEWS TALK This preset is based on NEWS TALK but has been edited to minimize artifacts in the Windows Media Audio V9 codec when operated at bitrates
342. orts 2 44 58 power cord 2 2 5 power supply circuit description 6 10 Orban part 6 11 testing 4 8 power supply board reattaching 4 4 Precode 3 4 pre emphasis quick setup 2 23 preset restoring archived 3 61 presets 3 17 backup 3 60 country 3 21 customizing 3 10 dance 3 22 factory 1 5 factory programming 3 16 five band 3 14 folk 3 22 gold 3 22 oldies 3 22 protection 3 17 radio 3 19 saving user 3 6 13 smooth jazz 3 24 techno 3 22 two band 3 15 user presets 1 6 video 3 25 Presets Gregg 3 22 Impact 3 22 Instrumental 3 22 Jazz 3 23 Loud 3 23 News Talk 3 23 Rock 3 24 Sports 3 23 Urban 3 25 PREVIOUS button 3 1 processing AGC 3 7 block diagram 6 41 distortion in 3 3 equalization 3 8 introduction to 3 3 multiband compression 3 8 music speech 3 5 radio style 3 5 signal flow 3 6 Stereo enhancement 3 7 structures 1 3 structures 3 14 two band purist 30 9 video oriented 3 6 processing structures two band 3 25 Proof of Performance 1 5 Proof of Performance 3 56 Q quick setup 2 12 R rack mounting unit 2 2 ratio AGC 3 36 compression 3 45 control 3 8 rear panel 2 5 RECALL button 3 1 registration card 2 1 remote PC Remote software 3 57 remote control bypass 1 23 conne
343. ot accessible all audio processing must be done at the studio and you must tolerate any damage that occurs later If an uncompressed digital link is available this is an ideal situation because such a link will pass OPTIMOD 6300 s output with little or no degradation However such a link is not always available If only a 32 kHz sample rate link is available the sample rate conversion necessary to downsample the audio will cause overshoots when OPTIMOD 6300 is operated at 20 kHz bandwidth because the sample rate converter removes spectral energy In this case you can minimize over shoot by operating OPTIMOD 6300 at 15 kHz bandwidth because the bandwidth limiting occurs before OPTIMOD 6300 s peak limiter which then accurately controls the peak level of the 15 kHz band limited signal Unless the path is a digital path using no lossy compression this situation will yield lower performance than if OPTIMOD 6300 is connected directly to the transmitter because artifacts that cannot be controlled by OPTIMOD 6300 will be introduced by the link to the transmitter These artifacts can decrease average modulation by 2 4dB and can also add noise and audible non linear distortion With lossy digital compression this deterioration will be directly related to the bit rate For an analog path the deterioration will depend on the amount of linear and non linear distor tion in the path In addition there will be an unavoidable amount of overshoot caused b
344. ouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada IMPORTANT Perform the installation under static control conditions Simply walking across a rug can gen erate a static charge of 20 000 volts This is the spark or shock you may have felt when touching a doorknob or some other conductive surface A much smaller static discharge is likely to destroy one or more of the CMOS semiconductors employed in OPTIMOD 6300 Static damage will not be covered under warranty There are many common sources of static Most involve some type of friction between two dissimilar materials Some examples are combing your hair sliding across a seat cover or rolling a cart across the floor Since the threshold of human perception for a static discharge is 3000 volts you will not even notice many damaging discharges Basic damage prevention consists of minimizing generation discharging any accumulated static charge on your body or workstation and preventing that discharge from being sent to or through an electronic component You should use a static grounding strap grounded through a protective resistor and a static safe workbench with a conductive surface This will prevent any buildup or damaging static U S patents 4 208 548 4 460 871 and U K patent 2 001 495 protect OPTIMOD 6300 Other patents pending Orban and Optimod are registered trademarks All trademarks are property of their respective companies This
345. ound boomier on high quality receivers and home theater systems The steep slope 18 dB octave shelving boost creates a Equalizer Controls Group Basic Advanced Name Range Full Modify Name Bass Shelf BASS FREQ Bass Frequency 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 270 290 310 330 350 380 410 440 470 500Hz 0 12 dB 6 12 18 dB Oct 20 500 Hz 10 0 10 0 dB 0 8 4 octaves 250 6000 Hz Low MID GAIN Mid Gain 10 0 10 0 dB MID WIDTH Mid Width 0 8 4 octaves High HIGH FREQ High Frequency 1 0 15 0 kHz HIGH GAIN High Gain 10 0 10 0 dB HIGH WIDTH High Width 0 8 4 octaves Brilliance BRILLIANCE BRILLIANCE 0 0 6 0 dB HF Enhancer HF ENH High Frequency 0 15 Enhancer DJ Bass DJ BASS DJ Bass Boost Off 1 10 dB Highpass Filter HIGHPASS Highpass Filter Off 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 170 200 Hz Lowpass Filter 10 20 kHz 1 kHz steps Phase Rotate PH ROTATE Phase Rotator In Out Table 3 4 5 band Equalization Controls 3 28 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 solid punchy bass from the better consumer receivers and home theater systems with decent bass response The 6 dB octave shelving boost is like a conventional tone control and creates the most mid bass boost yielding a warmer sound Be cause it affects t
346. our Optimod step B on page 2 40 This is to test the ability of your Optimod to synchronize to the selected timeserver and to ensure that your Optimod s clock is set accurately NOTE Manually setting your Optimod s clock via Set Time Set Date Daylight Time and the remote contact closure Reset to Hour and Reset to Midnight will not work when the automatic synchronization function is active To inactivate this function thereby permitting manual setting to work set the SYNC PERIOD to OFF Installing 6300 PC Remote Control Software This section briefly summarizes the procedure for installing 6300 PC Remote soft ware on existing 6300s If required you will find more detailed instructions in the pdf file automatically installed on your computer by Orban s installer program Setup6300 x x x x exe Where x x x x represents the software version you are installing For example for version 1 0 software this would be 1 0 0 0 The PC Remote software is supplied on a CD shipped with your 6300 You can also download it from tp orban com 6300 Instructions for using the PC Remote software are found starting on page 3 57 Installing the Necessary Windows Services The 6300 PC Remote application uses Windows built in communications and net working services to deal with the low level details necessary to communicate with the 63005 serial port These services are also used to upgrade your 6300 s firmware when updates are availabl
347. ove the peak level will not be well controlled because no peak limiting has been applied to this signal If you are using program material make sure that the program material is loud enough to produce peaks of frequent recurrence that cause the 6300 look ahead limiters to produce gain reduction thereby defining the maximum peak level that the 6300 will produce 10 Set digital configuration and output level Skip this step if you will not be using the digital outputs See the notes in step 9 D on page 2 25 A Skip this step if you do not plan to sync the 63005 digital output s to an ex ternal AES11 or wordclock signal Navigate to Setup gt IO Calib gt Digital Calib If the Ext Sync control is not visi ble press Next until the control appears Set the control for AES or Wordclock as required B Navigate to SETUP gt IO CALIB gt DIGITAL CALIB gt DO1 C Set the DO1 PRE E control to PRE E for a 50 or 75ys pre emphasized output J 17 for a 1 17 pre emphasized output PRE J17 for 50 75 preemphasis cascaded with J 17 preemphasis or FLAT See the notes in step 9 B on page 2 24 J 17 preemphasis is rarely used anymore Its most common application is NICAM links 2 26 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 D Set the DO1 RATE to 32 44 1 48 88 2 or 96 kHz e f you are using INTERNAL sync step E below 48 kHz or 96 kHz are pre ferred because their samples are synchronous with the peak c
348. ow Slow2 Med Med2 MFast MFast2 Fast B1 Compression Threshold B2 Compression Threshold B3 Compression Threshold B4 Compression Threshold 16 00 0 0 Off B5 Compression Threshold 16 00 0 0 Off B1 Speech Compression Thresh 16 00 0 0 Off B2 Speech Compression Thresh 16 00 0 0 Off B3 Speech Compression Thresh 16 00 0 0 Off B4 Speech Compression Thresh 16 00 0 0 Off B5 Speech Compression Thresh 16 00 0 0 Off B1 Attack 4 0 50 0 ms Off B2 Attack 4 0 50 0 ms Off B3 Attack 4 0 50 0 ms Off B4 Attack 4 0 50 0 ms Off B5 Attack 4 0 50 0 ms Off B1 Speech Attack 4 0 50 0 ms Off 16 00 0 0 Off 16 00 0 0 Off 16 00 0 0 Off B2 Speech Attack 4 0 50 0 ms Off B3 Speech Attack 4 0 50 0 ms Off B4 Speech Attack 4 0 50 0 ms Off B5 Speech Attack B1 Limiter Attack B2 Limiter Attack B3 Limiter Attack B4 Limiter Attack B5 Limiter Attack B1 Delta Release B2 Delta Release B3 Delta Release B4 Delta Release B5 Delta Release 4 0 50 0 ms Off 100 100 100 100 100 6 1 1 00 1 B1 Compression Ratio B2 Compression Ratio 1 1 00 1 B3 Compression Ratio 1 1 00 1 B4 Compression Ratio 1 1 00 1 B5 Compression Ratio 1 1 00 1 1 0 50 dB 2
349. ower circuit boards b Push down the top board until it rests on the spacers c Align the screws with the threaded standoffs on the front panel OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4 5 d Evenly tighten all eight screws to reattach the board assembly to the panel D Place the two side brackets over the captive screws located on each side of the front panel Be sure that the large side of each bracket is oriented toward the rack screw cutouts in the panel E Place the metal shield over the captive screws on each side of the front panel Align the shield so that its cutouts are aligned with the cables attached to the circuit board assembly Using a 3 16 nut driver screw four hex nuts onto the captive screws F Attach the front panel assembly to the unit a Verify that all cables are dressed through cutouts in the shield b Slide the front panel assembly into the front of the chassis so that the three threaded holes in the side brackets line up with the holes in the sides of the chassis Attach the front panel assembly by screwing the six screws removed in step 2 B a on page 4 2 into the holes in the sides of the chassis G Reattach the four cables that connect the display board to the base board Each cable has a different type or size of connector so it is obvious which ca ble mates with which jack on the base board Carefully align the cables and connectors to avoid bending the pins 9 Replacing the T
350. pending on how much automatic width control you want the 6300 to perform Bass Delta Threshold works the same as MASTER DELTA THRESHOLD but applies to the bass band You will usually set it the same as MASTER DELTA THRESHOLD AGC Crossover allows you to choose ALLPASS or LINEARNODELAY modes ALLPASS is a phase rotating crossover that introduces one pole of phase rotation at 200 Hz The overall frequency response remains smooth as the two bands take dif ferent amounts of gain reduction the response is a smooth shelf without extra peaks or dips around the crossover frequency The two bands are down 3 dB at the crossover frequency However this mode adds group delay distortion and is there fore subtly less transparent sounding than the LINEARNODELAY mode 3 38 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 LINEARNODELAY Linear Phase no delay is a phase linear crossover whose upper band is derived by subtracting its lower band from the crossover s input When the upper and lower bands have the same gain their sum is perfectly flat with no phase rotation However when the upper and lower bands have different gains peaks and dips appear in the frequency response close to the crossover frequency It is useful if you need a crossover with low delay and no phase distortion when flat Its downside is the possibility of coloration when the gains of the two bands are widely disparate Distortion Control output input 1 5 Figure 3 1
351. presentation of the signal with J 17 preemphasis Older technology converters including some older NICAM encoders may exhibit quantization distortion unless they have been correctly dithered Additionally they can exhibit rapid changes in group delay around cut off because their analog filters are ordinarily not group delay equalized The installing engineer should be aware of all of these potential problems when designing a transmission system You can minimize any problems by always driving a digital STL with OPTIMOD 6300 s AES3 digital output which will provide the most accurate interface to the STL The digital input and output accommodate sample rates of 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 88 2 and 96 kHz Microwave STLs In general an analog microwave STL provides high audio quality as long as there is a line of sight transmission path from studio to transmitter of less than 10 miles 16 km If not RF signal to noise ratio multipath distortion and diffraction effects can cause serious quality problems However the noise and non linear distortion charac teristics of such links are likely to be notably poorer than 16 bit digital even if propagation conditions are ideal As discussed above asynchronous resampling will cause overshoots if any analog path even a perfectly transparent one passes OPTIMOD 6300 s processed output to the transmitter Lack of transparency in the analog path will cause even more over shoot Unless carefully designed
352. processing channels have the same subjective adjustments as determined by the active preset but are oth erwise independent making this mode appropriate for dual language transmissions Op erating mode can be set via GPI Ethernet and serial connections internal clock based automation and Status Bits Installation Analog Audio Input Configuration Stereo Dual Mono Impedance gt 10 load impedance electronically balanced Nominal Input Level Software adjustable from 4 0 to 13 0 dBu VU Maximum Input Level 27 dBu Connectors Two XLR type female EMI suppressed Pin 1 chassis ground Pins 2 and 3 electronically balanced floating and symmetrical A D Conversion 24 bit 128x oversampled delta sigma converter with linear phase anti aliasing filter Filtering RFI filtered with high pass filter at 0 15 Hz 3 dB Analog Audio Output Configuration Stereo Flat or pre emphasized at 50us 75us software selectable Source Impedance 500 electronically balanced and floating Load Impedance 6000 or greater balanced or unbalanced Termination not required or recommended Output Level 100 peak modulation Adjustable from 6 dBu to 24 dBu peak into 6000 or greater load software adjustable Signal to Noise gt 100 dB unweighted Bypass mode 20 Hz 20 kHz bandwidth refer enced to 100 modulation Distortion lt 0 01 THD Bypass mode de emphasized 20 2 20 kHz bandwidth
353. puts have identical amounts of phase rotation Of course if the 6300 is used to process a secondary channel in HD Radio there is no need to worry about smoothness of crossfades This is an ex cellent application for this product CLASSICAL As their names imply the CLASSICAL 5 BAND and CLASSICAL 2 BAND presets are optimized for classical music gracefully handling recordings with very wide dynamic range and sudden shifts in dynamics The 5 band version uses heavy inter band coupling to prevent large amounts of automatic re equalization which could otherwise cause unnatural stridency and brightness in strings and horns and which could pump up very low frequency rumble in live recording venues The 5 band preset defeats the AGC using only the 5 band compressor for gain re duction It also defeats phase rotation to ensure the most transparent 5 band sound available CLASSICAL 5B AGC uses the AGC set for 2 1 compression ratio Because of the AGC it affects more of the total dynamic range of the recording than does the CLASSICAL 5 BAND preset However the AGC provides extremely smooth and un obtrusive compression because of the gentle ratio and window gating This preset uses the 5 band compressor very lightly with a fast release time as a peak limiter The AGC does almost all of the compression There is also a corresponding 2 band preset called CLASSICAL 2B AGC Even more transparent purist classical processing is available from this p
354. r Apple QuickTime Broadcaster or RealNetworks Real Helix Producer You then ap ply the encoded output of the encoder to a netcast server application which may operate on the same machine as the encoder or on a different machine on your network In the latter case you will route the encoded audio to the netcast server application through your network See Processing for Low Bit Rate Codecs on page 3 4 Loudness You can expect a significant increase in loudness from OPTIMOD 6300 processing by comparison to most unprocessed audio 1 222 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 An exception is recently mastered CDs which may have already been ag gressively processed for loudness when they were mastered In radio broadcasting it is generally believed that loudness relative to other stations attracts an audience that perceives the station as being more powerful than its competition We expect that the same subliminal psychology will also hold true in netcasting Choosing your Encoder The state of the art in encoder technology is rapidly changing At this writing the best audio encoder technology available is Coding Technologies AAC aacPlus v2 Orban is the first provider of this technology for streaming audio applications with Opticodec PC Opticodec PC can provide entertainment quality stereo streams at 32 kbps At 48 kbps many listeners prefer the sound to that of FM Be aware that different encoders are optimized for different bit
355. r and Ground Schematic 5 of 5 6 27 1 O DSP Board Analog Input output Parts Locator 6 28 AES3 Input output Drawing DSP Chips Local regulators Contains L and R Analog Inputs Schematic 1 of 9 6 29 L and R Analog Outputs Schematic 2 of 9 6 30 Digital Input and Sync Input Schematic 3 of 9 6 31 Digital Outputs Schematic 4 of 9 6 32 DSP Extended Serial Audio Inter Schematic 5 of 9 6 33 face ESAI and Host Interface DSP Serial Peripheral Interface Schematic 6 of 9 6 34 Power and Ground General Purpose bus 8 bit I O Schematic 7 of 9 6 35 Serial Audio Interface and Clock Schematic 8 of 9 6 36 Generation Power Distribution Schematic 9 of 9 6 37 Display Board Front Panel LCD LEDs Buttons Parts Locator 6 38 and Rotary Encoder Drawing Contains Front of board Schematic 1 of 2 6 39 Rear of board 6 40 DSP Block Shows signal processing 6 41 Diagram OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 2 1 INPUT OUTPUT PA UNDER SHIELD SECTION ARE EXPOSED TO ACLINE CONTROL BOARD INPUT OUTPUT DSP BOARD DSP SECTION DISPLAY ASSEMBLY ORBAN MODEL 6300 6 22 TECHNICAL DATA
356. r for connection C Check that you have entered the passcode correctly on the 6300 and the passcode has also been entered correctly on your PC D Ensure that you enabled the correct PC modem port settings E Ensure that the external modem attached to your 6300 is set to AUTO ANSWER F Make sure that the only Allowed Network Protocol is TCP IP NetBUI and SPX Compatible must not be checked e f you cannot connect to your computer through a crossover Ethernet cable You must set your Windows networking to provide a static IP address for your computer because your Optimod does not contain a DHCP server You Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection to the 6300 If you are connected to the 6300 via modem or direct connect you cannot access any other TCP IP connection The PPP connection becomes the default protocol and the default gateway defaults to the 6300 unit s IP address This means that all existing network connections point to the 6300 unit To correct this OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5 7 A In Start Settings Network and Dialup Connections open the direct or mo dem connection you are using to connect to 6300 B Select Properties C Click the tab that reads Networking D Highlight Internet protocol TCP IP E Select Properties F Select Advanced G Uncheck the Use default gateway on remote network box H Select OK If this Use defaul
357. r to 20 kHz full bandwidth for downstream equipment with sample rates of 44 1 or 48 kHz Set the filter to 15 kHz for 32 kHz sample rate For other sample rates set the filter so that it is as close as possible to 4596 of the sample rate without exceeding 459 This setting is unique to the preset in which it resides Regardless of its setting the 6300 will not permit the system bandwidth to exceed the bandwidth set by the LOWPASS FILTER parameter located I O Setup Phase Rotator determines if the phase rotator will be in circuit The purpose of the phase rotator is to make voice waveforms more symmetrical Because it can slightly reduce the clarity and definition of program material we recommend leaving it OUT unless program material is mainly speech where it may result in cleaner sound be cause it can substantially reduce the amount of gain reduction that the 6300 s look ahead limiter produces on speech waveforms Stereo Enhancer Controls You can operate the stereo enhancer in one of two modes or styles The first is called L R EXPAND and emulates the Orban 222 analog stereo enhancer while the second mode called DELAY emulates a popular enhancer from another manufac turer that adds a delayed version of the L R signal to the original L R to create ste reo enhancement See Stereo Enhancement on page 3 7 for more information Both modes have gating that operates under two conditions e The two stereo channels are
358. r to save any edited unsaved preset when the main screen is visible To save a preset A Press the ESC button repeatedly until you see the main screen which shows the current time and the preset presently active If there is an unsaved preset active the rightmost button will be labeled SAVE PRESET B Press the SAvE PRESET button The Save Preset screen appears C Choose a name for your preset Some non alphanumeric characters such as and are reserved and cannot be used in preset names D Use the knob to set each character in the preset name Use the NEXT and PREV buttons to control the cursor position E Press the SAVE CHANGES button e f the name that you have selected duplicates the name of a factory pre set the 6300 will suggest an alternate name You cannot give a user preset the same name as a factory preset e Ifthe name you have selected duplicates the name of an existing user pre set the 6300 warns you that you are about to overwrite that preset An swer Yes if you wish to overwrite the preset and No otherwise If you an swer No the 6300 will give you an opportunity to choose a new name for the preset you are saving 3 14 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 You can save user presets from the 6300 PC Remote application See Using the 6300 PC Remote Control Software on page 3 57 Please note that when you save presets from the PC Remote application you save them in the 6300 s memory as if you had sav
359. re is gated It gates whenever the input level to the structure is below the user adjustable threshold of gating When music preset is the air the LEss MORE control sets the amount of overall processing making optimum tradeoffs between loudness brightness and distor tion In sound for picture there are no loudness wars for music presets there is probably never a need to advance the LEss MORE control beyond 5 The stereo enhancer AGC equalizer and look ahead limiter are common to both 2 band and 5 band processing and therefore stay the same when the 6300 switches between 2 band and 5 band operation However different controls appear in the screens containing dynamics processing controls as appropriate for 2 band or 5 band multiband compression The meters also change functionality to display the 2 band or 5 band gain reduction Both the 2 band and 5 band multiband compressors always operate in the back ground Switching between 2 band and 5 band therefore occurs with a seamless cross fade Unlike some older Orban processors no DSP code gets reloaded and no audio mute occurs although switching can sound obtrusive if the loudness normally produced by the 2 band and 5 band presets are very different It is usually possible to eliminate audibly obtrusive switching artifacts by tweaking one or both of the presets to make them sound closer to each other and saving the results as user pre sets 2 band The 2 band structure c
360. re the outputs so that one or both outputs carry both channels Level control of the AES3 input is accomplished via software control through System Setup see step 6 on page 2 23 or through PC Remote Both analog and digital outputs are active continuously The 6300 s output sample rate can be locked to the 6300 s internal crystal clock the sample rate present at its AES3 input the sample rate present at its AES11 sync in put or wordclock The 6300 can apply J 17 deemphasis to signals applied to its digital input and J 17 preemphasis to the processed signal emitted from its digital output J 17 is a 6 dB octave shelving preemphasis deemphasis standard with break points at 400 Hz and 4 kHz It is used mainly in older studio transmitter links that use NICAM tech nology The 6300 s provisions for J 17 make it fully compatible with systems using this standard Analog Left Right Input Output The left and right analog inputs are on XLR type female connectors on the rear panel Input impedance is greater than 10kO balanced and floating Inputs can ac commodate up to 27dBu OdBu 0 775Vrms The left and right analog outputs are on XLR type male connectors on the rear panel Output impedance is 500 balanced and floating The outputs can drive 6000 or higher impedances balanced or unbalanced The peak output level is adjustable from 6dBu to 24dBu Level control of the analog inputs and outputs is accomplished via software control t
361. readily switch be tween several 6300s 6300 PC Remote has a built in address book that allows it to select and connect to e any 6300 on the same network as the PC e any 6300 that can be accessed through a modem connected to the PC via dial up networking and e any 6300 that is connected directly to one of the PC s serial ports 3 58 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Before your PC can communicate with a given 6300 you must first set up a connec tion which is information that allows PC Remote to locate and communicate with the 6300 To set up a new connection A Launch 6300PC exe B Create a new 6300 connection by choosing NEw 6300 from the CONNECT file menu or by right clicking on the ALL CONNECTIONS icon in the Connections List and selecting NEW 6300 The Connection Properties dialog box opens C Enter an Alias name for your 6300 like KABC D Leave the password field blank to prompt the user to enter a password when initiating a connection Refer to Security and Passcode Programming on page 2 32 Otherwise enter a password to allow PC Remote to connect to your 6300 without requiring a password when the connection is initiated For successful connection a password must have already been entered into your 6300 unit E If you are communicating with your 6300 through a network select the Ethernet radio button and enter the appropriate IP address subnet mask port and gateway data These data must agree w
362. red port lt Back Cancel OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 49 i In the drop down box select the serial port you will be using to make the connection j Click Next k Select either For all users or Only for myself The correct setting depends on how your network and security are configured Your wizard may not display this field if your computer is set up for a single user only Click Next m Enter a name for your Connection such as Connection to 6300 n Click Finish Network Connection Wizard Select a Device This is the device that will be used to make the connection Select a device Communications Port 1 lt Back Cancel Network Connection Wizard Connection Availability You may make the new connection available to all users or just yourself You may make this connection available to all users or keep it only for your own use connection stored in your profile will not be available unless you are logged on Create this connection Only for myself lt Back Cancel Network Connection Wizard Finished The wizard is ready to create your connection Type a name you want for this connection Connection Click Finish to save it in the Network Connections folder To edit this connection later select it click the File menu and then click Properties lt Back Cancel 2 5
363. regg Labs FM proces sors designed by Orban s Vice President of New Product Development Greg Ogonowski Dynamically these presets produce a slight increase in bass energy be low 100 Hz and a decrease of bass energy centered at 160 Hz This bass sound works particularly well with speakers having good bass response In terms of loudness midrange texture and HF texture these presets are similar to the LOUD HOT BASS presets IMPACT IMPACT is intended for CHR and similar formats where attracting a large audience maximizing cume is more important than ensuring long time spent listening This is a loud bright major market preset that has a great deal of pres ence energy to cut through on lower quality speakers Its sound changes substantially as the LEss MORE control is turned down fast peak limiting decreases while bass punch and transparency improve Therefore exploring various Less More settings is worthwhile with IMPACT because for many circum stances this preset will be over the top if it is not turned down with Less More INSTRUMENTAL An alias for the JAZZ preset OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 23 JAZZ JAZZ is specifically tailored toward broadcasters that play mostly instrumental music particularly classic jazz Coltrane Mingus Monk etc It is a quiet preset with a very clean mellow high end to prevent stridency on saxes and other horns It pre serves much of the qualities of the original recordings doing
364. requency band to be identical to its lower neighbor and independently sets the gain of the lowest frequency band according to the setting of the DJ BASS boost control in the Equalization screen Thus with out introducing obvious coloration the gating smoothly preserves the average overall frequency response tilt of the multiband compressor broadly maintaining the automatic equalization curve it generates for a given piece of program mate rial If the MB GATE control is turned Orr the DJ Bass control in the Equaliza tion screen is disabled DwnExp Thr Downward Expander Threshold determines the level below which the single ended noise reduction system s downward expander begins to decrease system gain and below which the high frequencies begin to become low pass fil tered to reduce perceived noise There are two controls the MB DOWN EXPANDER control sets the expansion threshold in Bands 1 4 while the B5 DOWN EXPANDER DELTA THRESH control first introduced as part of V1 1 software allows you to fine tune the Band 5 downward expander s threshold by adding or subtracting an offset from the setting of the MB DOWN EXPAND control Activate the single ended dynamic noise reduction by setting these controls to a setting other than Orr The single ended noise reduction system combines a broadband downward ex pander with a program dependent low pass filter These functions are achieved by causing extra gain reduction in the multiband co
365. requency deviation In AM modulation it is negative carrier pinch off In analog telephone post PTT trans mission it is the level above which serious crosstalk into other channels occurs or the level at which the amplifiers in the channel overload In digital channels it is the largest possible digital word For metering the transmission engineer uses an oscilloscope absolute peak sensing meter calibrated peak sensing LED indicator or a modulation meter A modulation meter usually has two components a semi peak reading meter like a PPM and a peak indicating light which is calibrated to turn on whenever the instantaneous peak modulation exceeds the overmodulation threshold Line Up Facilities Metering of Levels The meters on the 6300 show left right input levels and left right output modula tion Left and right input level is shown on a VU type scale 0 to 40dB while the metering indicates absolute instantaneous peak much faster than a standard PPM or VU meter The input meter is scaled so that 0 dB corresponds to the absolute maximum peak level that the 6300 can accept 26 dBu If you are using the AES3 digital input the maximum digital word at the input corresponds to the 0 dB point on the 6300 s input meter Built in Calibrated Line up Tones To facilitate matching the output level of the 6300 to the transmission system that it is driving the 6300 contains an adjustable test tone oscillator that produces sine
366. reset which is phase linear and which preserves the spectral balance of the original material as much as possible However if you need a bit more automatic re equalization than the CLASSICAL 2 BAND preset provides use the CLASSICAL 5 BAND preset CLASSICAL 2B SFTKN Classical using 2 Band Soft Knee Compression defeats the AGC and exploits the 6300 s soft knee 2 band compression Quiet material is gently compressed with a very low compression ratio The compression ratio increases as the source material gets louder see Figure 3 2 on page 3 46 Very quiet material is typically amplified by 10 dB This level dependent compression ratio provides very smooth subtle compression Because the CLASSICAL presets preserve a significant amount of the dynamic range present in the source material including speech it is wise to use a separate micro phone processor to ensure appropriate voice music balance COUNTRY The COUNTRY MEDIUM preset uses the ROCK SMOOTH source preset It has a gentle bass lift and a mellow easy to listen to high end along with enough presence energy to help vocals to stand out The COUNTRY LIGHT preset uses the ROCK LIGHT source preset Modern country broadcasters might also find ROCK MEDIUM or ROCK OPEN useful if they want a brighter more up front sound 3 22 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 CRISP CRISP provides a bright upper midrange sound by emphasizing frequencies around 6 kHz It is a loud preset that is appropriate
367. rol of Peak Modulation e The 6300 precisely controls peak levels to prevent overmodulation The maximum level of the digital samples is controlled to better than 296 e While primarily oriented toward flat media the 6300 can also provide preemphasis limiting for the two standard preemphasis curves of 50us and 75ys This allows it to protect pre emphasized microwave links satellite uplinks and similar channels where protection limiting or light processing is required Because its processing is configured to be most effective with flat me dia the 6300 cannot provide extreme loudness for pre emphasized ra dio channels Use one of Orban s Optimod FM processors for this applica tion For analog television with FM aural carrier s use Optimod TV 8382 Flexible Configuration e The 6300 includes analog and dual AES3 digital inputs and outputs The digi tal input and digital outputs have sample rate converters and can operate at 32 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 3 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 88 2 and 96 kHz sample rates The preemphasis status and output levels are separately adjustable for the analog and digital outputs Note that the 6300 cannot provide simultaneous independent audio processing for flat and preemphasized channels Even though one output may be pre emphasized while other is flat the only difference between the outputs is that the flat output has de emphasis applied to it after the processing while the preemphasize
368. roubleshooting 5 3 E EAS modulation low 5 4 test tones 1 22 easy setup 2 12 equalizer bass shelf 3 27 control list 3 26 65 parametric 3 28 equalizer 3 8 escape button 3 2 Ethernet 2 36 44 58 external AGC mode 2 13 external sync setting source 2 25 F factory presets radio 3 19 selecting 2 18 tv 3 25 factory presets 1 5 factory service 5 12 Final Limit control 3 39 Firewall 2 44 58 Firmware updating 8500 2 68 five band attack time controls 3 55 band coupling controls 3 53 delta release control 3 55 downward expander thresold control 3 52 full modify control list 3 49 limiter attack control 3 55 multiband drive control 3 49 multiband gate threshold control 3 52 mutiband release control 3 50 output mix controls 3 54 five band 3 47 frequency response specification 6 1 testing 4 9 front panel 3 1 Full Modify 3 11 fuse 6 10 G gain reduction meters 3 2 gate threshold control 3 52 gate 3 34 gate LED 3 2 Gateway 2 44 58 gateway address 2 37 getting inside the unit 4 2 GPI specifications 6 3 GPI interface testing 4 11 ground chassis 2 9 grounding circuit 2 9 loss of 4 1 power 2 8 grounding 2 8 grouping 6300s 3 62 Hard Clip Shape 3 39 headphones low delay monitoring 2 14 24 26 headphones 1 21 headroom in codecs 1
369. rrect left right channel balance This is not a balance control like those found in consumer audio prod ucts This control changes gain of the right channel only Use this control if the right analog input to the 6300 is not at exactly the same level as the left input Be certain that the imbalance is not caused by one pro gram source but instead is introduced through distribution between the console output and 6300 input This adjustment is best accomplished by playing program material that is known to be monophonic or by setting the mixing console into mono mode if available 6 Adjust the Digital Input Reference Level and Right Balance controls Skip this step if you will not be using the digital input A Navigate to Navigate to SETUP IO CALIB INPUT and set the input to Digital B Repeat steps 2 through 5 starting on page 2 21 but use the DI REF VU OR PPM and R CH BAL controls for the digital section 7 Set AGC preemphasis A Navigate to SETUP NEXT NEXT AGC PRE E B Select the desired AGC preemphasis FLAT 50uS 75 5 by turning the knob This control is only relevant if you are using the AGC LIM feed at one or more 6300 outputs The control determines whether the look ahead lim iter after the AGC operates on a flat or preemphasized signal 50uS and 75 5 preemphasis are only useful if the 6300 is protecting a transmission link that uses preemphasis like certain satellite uplinks Use FLAT preemphasi
370. rstands the trade offs in volved in optimizing one parameter such as loudness at the expense of others such as distortion or excessive density Never lose sight of the fact that while the listener can easily control loudness he or she cannot make a distorted signal clean again If such excessive processing is per 3 6 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 mitted to audibly degrade the sound of the original program material the signal is irrevocably contaminated and the original quality can never be recovered Sound for Picture Applications Controlling Dynamic Range The most crucial commandment in sound for picture is this dialog must always be intelligible Sound for picture is usually heard under less than ideal conditions and its dynamic range must be controlled accordingly Apartment dwellers must set their volume controls to avoid disturbing neighbors or even other members of the family At the quiet side intelligibility of dialog is often impacted by environmental noise such as children playing or a dishwasher going in the kitchen When one considers that the hearing acuity of a significant portion of the audience is somewhat im paired compared to that of a healthy 20 year old one concludes that the dynamic range of dialog must not exceed 15 if it is to be intelligible to 99 of viewers un der common domestic viewing conditions Feature film dynamic range is inappropri ate for home viewing except in dedicated home theaters and th
371. s for Eureka 147 DRM HD Radio digital television net casts and any other channel that uses a lossy codec When in doubt use FLAT preemphasis When operated pre emphasized the 6300 s AGC look ahead limiter should only provide light protection limiting If you use too much gain reduction in the look ahead limiter you will hear pumping on material with a lot of high frequency energy 8 Set Multiband preemphasis A Navigate to SETUP NEXT NExT MB PRE E B Select the desired multiband preemphasis 5045 75uS by turning the knob This control is only relevant if you are using the MB LIM feed at one or more 6300 outputs The control determines whether the look ahead lim iter after the 2 band or 5 band compressor operates on a flat or preem phasized signal 50 5 and 755 preemphasis are only useful if the 6300 is protecting a transmission link that uses preemphasis like certain satellite uplinks Use FLAT preemphasis for Eureka 147 DRM HD Radio digital television net 2 24 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 casts and any other channel that uses a lossy codec When in doubt use FLAT preemphasis When operated pre emphasized the 6300 s MB look ahead limiter should only for light protection limiting If you use too much gain reduc tion in the look ahead limiter you will hear pumping on material with a lot of high frequency energy The 6300 cannot process for high loudness on pre emphasized radio channels Use an
372. s of Optimod 6300 PC Remote 3 63 USING THE 6300 FOR PRODUCTION AND MASTERING 3 65 Section 4 Maintenance PEE HESS ECA EREMO EC 4 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 4 SUBASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND nnn nens nnne nnn nnns 4 2 FIELD AUDIT OF 4 6 Table 4 1 Typical Power Supply Voltages and AC Ripple 4 8 Section 5 Troubleshooting EMEN 5 1 PROBLEMS AND POTENTIAL 50 0145 5 1 REL HUME OF BUZZOS 5 1 Poor Peak Modulation Control 5 1 Auidible Distortion 5 1 Audible eI ERR EE HT LE 5 2 Gain pumping when high frequency energy is present 5 3 seo eie eese E 5 3
373. s the NEXT button B Skip this step if you will not be using digital output 2 Turn the knob to choose one of the following e AGC stereo enhancement equalization and AGC without peak limiting e AGC LIM stereo enhancement equalization AGC and look ahead peak limiting MULTIBAND stereo enhancement equalization AGC and 2 Band or 5 Band compression without peak limiting e MB LIM stereo enhancement equalization AGC 2 Band or 5 Band com pression and look ahead peak limiting 13 Set the digital output 1 sample rate A Press the NEXT button B Skip this step if you will not be using digital output 1 Turn the knob to set the Digital OuTPUT 1 SAMPLE RATE to 32 44 1 48 88 2 or 96 kHz The internal sample rate converter sets the rate at the 6300 s digital out put This adjustment allows you to set the output sample rate to ensure compatibility with equipment requiring a fixed sample rate In all cases the 6300 s internal processing sample rate is 48 kHz 14 Set the digital output 2 sample rate A Press the NEXT button OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 25 17 B Skip this step if you will not be using digital output 2 Turn the knob to set the Digital OuTPUT 2 SAMPLE RATE to 32 44 1 48 88 2 or 96 kHz 15 Prepare to set output levels A Press the NEXT button You can use either program material or tone to set the output level and thus the modulation e To use tone press the YES b
374. s the lowest of these three settings frequency in Setup is a technical parameter that determines the highest bandwidth available The installing engineer should set it to be congru ent with the sample rate of the digital system that the 6300 is driving For example if the 6300 is driving a system with a 32 kHz sample rate set the MAX LPF to 15 0 KHz That way a setting of 20 kHz elsewhere will not cause excessive bandwidth and aliasing because the 6300 will automati cally override it with the MAX LPF setting A Navigate to SETUP MAX LPF B Set the maximum bandwidth as desired 2 Temporarily set the external AGC mode to No Navigate to SETUP NEXT NEXT ExT AGC and set ExT AGC to No If you are using a external AGC like the Orban 8200ST you should restore this setting to YEs after the setup procedure is complete 3 Adjust Input selector A Navigate to SETUP IO CALIB INPUT B Set the INPUT to ANALOG The 6300 will automatically switch to analog input if signal lock is un available at the AES3 input 4 Adjust Analog Input Reference Level 9dBu to 13dBu VU or 2 to 20 PPM in 0 5 dB steps The reference level VU and PPM Peak settings track each other with an offset of 8dB This compensates for the typical indications with program material of a VU meter versus the higher indications on a PPM This step sets the center of the 6300 s gain reduction range to the level to which your s
375. s to listen Transient Enhance is mainly useful in mastering This control allows you to insert an audio delay in the sidechain of the 5 band compressor By delaying the gain con trol signal this allows attack transients to pass through the multiband compressor which can increase punch There is a tradeoff between this control and the activity of the look ahead limiter which will have to eliminate attack transients exceeding the look ahead limiter s threshold For any material there will be an optimum set ting for the TRANSIENT ENHANCE control that provides the most punch without trig gering look ahead limiter artifacts Loudness Threshold See page 3 43 Test Modes The Test Modes screen allows you to switch between OPERATE BYPASS and TONE When you switch to BYPASS or TONE the 6300 saves the preset you had active and will restore it when you switch back to OPERATE Even if you had been editing a pre set and did not yet save these changes as a User preset you will not lose the edits you made Table 3 12 Test Modes shows the facilities available which should be largely self explanatory The test modes function identically in stereo and dual mono modes For example in dual mono mode setting TONE CHAN to LEFT applies signal to channel 1 but not to channel 2 OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 57 Setup Test Parameter Labels Units Defautt Range CCW to CW 0 MODE Operate Operate Bypass
376. sor are the same on both channels Dual mono or stereo mode is a global system parameter You can change modes manually via the 6300 s GPI inputs 6300 PC Remote software or via the 6300 s built in time of day automation Further the 6300 can be programmed to recognize the stereo and dual mono flags in the AES input bitstream and to switch modes accordingly It will also set these flags appropriately in its output AES bitstream Digital AES3 Left Right Input Outputs The digital input and outputs conform to the professional AES3 standard They all have sample rate converters to allow operation at 32 44 1 48 88 2 and 96 kHz sample frequency OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 27 To ensure best control of peak modulation operate the output at 48 kHz or higher The left right digital input is on one XLR type female connector on the rear panel the left right digital outputs are on two XLR type male connector on the rear panel You select whether OPTIMOD 6300 uses the digital or analog input either locally or by remote interface If OPTIMOD 6300 is set to accept a digital input and the feed fails OPTIMOD 6300 will automatically switch back to the analog input In dual mono mode the two programs must be combined into one AES3 stream to be accepted by the 6300 However you can configure the 6300 so that one digital output is dedicated to channel 1 and one output to channel 2 in dual mono mode You can also configu
377. ss VDD vss 100 37 41 14 41 14 VCC vss VDD vss VDD 9 1 54 vss vop 22 54 vss 27 Wels 43 18 _ 8 12 3 12 vssa VDDQ 12 Ivssa 42 lane 46 lyssa 43 46 43 48 vssa vssa NC 540 nc 40 3 3 C187 C188 0 1UF 0 1UF b ooe _ 6132 C133 _ 6134 C125 C126 C127 1 0UF 0 01UF 0 01UF 1 0UF 0 010 0 01UF U7B 74ALVC164245 3 3V U8B 74ALVC164245 3 3V U9B 74ALVC164245 3 3V 4 4 GND GND GND 10 42 10 42 42 GND vec GND vec GND vec 15 vec 31 1 15 aND vec 31 GND 9 1 GND m GND av GND END vec 18 E GND vec 18 END vec 18 39 vec 38 GND vec 1 GND 7 1 GND GND GND 3 3 5 4 C153 C157 0158 161 162 151 6155 156 6159 160 1 0UF 1 00 0 010 1 00 0 01UF 1 0UF 1 0UF 0 01UF 1 00 0 0107 25 U14 LT1963 2 5 z 2 615 C42 10UF 2643 TP100 DGND 3 3 C16 21008 015 171963 3 3 CONTROL BOARD POWER AND GROUND DISTRIBUTION TECHNICAL DATA 6 27 JUMPER DIAGRAM PLACE JUMPER RECEPTACLE AS SHOWN 6 28 TECHNICAL DATA eee eee eee
378. ssed audio Many such links have been designed to be easily con figured at the factory for composite operation where an entire FM stereo baseband is passed The requirements for maintaining stereo separation in composite opera tion are similar to the requirements for high waveform fidelity with low overshoot Therefore most links have the potential for excellent waveform fidelity if they are configured for composite operation even if a composite FM stereo signal is not ac tually being applied to the link Further it is common for a microwave STL to bounce because of a large infrasonic peak in its frequency response caused by an under damped automatic frequency control AFC phase locked loop This bounce can increase the STL s peak carrier de viation by as much as 2dB reducing average modulation Many commercial STLs have this problem Analog landline PTT post office line Analog landline quality is extremely variable ranging from excellent to poor For tunately they are largely obsolete having been replaced by digital links Whether landlines should be used or not depends upon the quality of the lines locally avail able and upon the availability of other alternatives Due to line equalizer character istics and phase shifts even the best landlines tend to veil audio quality slightly They will certainly be the weakest link in a DAB broadcast chain Slight frequency response irregularities and non constant group delay character
379. st per ceptual encoder algorithms are designed to have unity gain from input to output So if peak levels at the input frequently come up to OdBfs peak levels at the output will frequently exceed OdBfs and will be clipped unless the decoder algorithm is ad justed to have less than unity gain Canny engineers familiarize themselves with the performance of real world receiv ers and reduce the peak modulation of the transmissions if it turns out that most re ceivers are clipping due to perceptual encoding overshoots Our experience to date suggests that allowing 3dB headroom will prevent audible overshoot induced clip ping in low bite rate systems e g 32 kbps streams while 2dB is adequate for 128kbps and above While some clipping may still occur it will have a very low duty cycle and will almost certainly be inaudible OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1 27 1 Monitoring on Loudspeakers and Headphones In live operations highly processed audio often causes a problem with the DJ or presenter s headphones The delay through OPTIMOD 6300 can be as much as 25ms or more if the installer purposely adds frame makeup delay This delay al though not usually audible as a distinct echo can cause bone conduction comb fil tering of the DJ presenter s voice in his her ears This is almost always very uncom fortable to them OPTIMOD 6300 s processing can emit the output of either the multiband compressor or AGC before their associated
380. status bits from the digital input signal the RS 232 and the remote control interface status The microprocessor updates the LED control status indicators accordingly OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6 7 Component Level Description 51 511 are the front panel pushbutton switches CR11 CR15 are the front panel LED control status indicators The control microprocessor communicates with these components through the General Purpose bus which is buffered via IC3 3 LED Meter Circuits Located on display board The meter LEDs are arranged in an 8x16 matrix in rows and columns Each row of LEDs in the matrix has a 1 8 duty cycle ON time The rows are multi plexed at a fast rate so that the meters appear continuously illuminated Via the General Purpose bus the DSP sends meter data values to the control microproc essor which sends the appropriate LED control words eight bits at a time to the data latches that drive the LEDs directly Component Level Description The meter LED matrix consists of ten 10 segment LED bar graph assemblies CR1 CR9 CR16 and one discrete LED CR10 Row selector latches 1 4 IC5 IC6 and IC9 are controlled by the host microprocessor and alternately sink cur rent through the LEDs selected by column selector latches IC1 and IC2 which are also controlled by the SC520 IC1 and IC2 drive the selected row of LEDs through current limiting resistor packs RP1 and RP2 Input Circuits This circuitry
381. t lt gt C919 C920 CR902 _ 1010 C1011 Z 10gF C960 C961 C962 C963 C964 C965 C967 C968 C969 C970 C971 C972 C973 C974 C975 C976 C977 C978 C979 C916 10pF 1 0 20V 20V 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1uF 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 m lt 7 DIODE_VOL 6 8 E 5V CR900 3 3V 1N4148W CR901 mE M 901 NO STUFF 1N5818 1N4148W LTI767EMS8E 1 8 1 1904 3 3 TP DUAL 1 8V 1900 2 Vin 8 Vsw 3 gt 5 22UH R900 C985 C986 a FIT44 4 C991 C992 49 9K 1 0 1 0 CR903 196 16V 16V 51 09 6 T 4N5818 1 0uF 1 0uF 57 lt 7 SHDN 2 Q FB 16V 16V Z 470pF 16V 2 m gt lt co87 gt 0900 oes 1 8V 1 1500PF MMBT3904 R905 1 R902 C989 C990 210K 2 10K 100PF 1500PF 196 1 C917 918 1 1 1 R904 10uF 10uF C900 C901 C902 C903 C904 C905 C906 C907 C908 C909 C910 C911 C912 C913 C914 C915 lt 7 gt 49 9 20 20 0 01 0 04 oo1uF 0 01 0 01 O 01yF 0 01 0 01 O O1yF 0 01pF Por 1 y 196 7 l O DSP BOARD POWER DISTRIBUTION 6 38 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 6
382. t Help N 00 Create New Windows XP Direct Connection a Launch 6300 PC Remote b Choose Connect New 6300 Disconnect OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 53 Give your 6300 a name e g KABC Connection Properties B by entering this name in the 6300 eneral Settings Alias field 8300 Alias 8300 d If you wish to have 6300 PC Remote Password Leave password blank to be prompted upon connect remember the passwor d for this Local Folder Files Orban Optimod 830048300 Optimod enter the password in the 1 Comment Password field e Select Serial Connection Ethernet Connection f Click the Add button Padites 7 7 0 7 Port Number 6201 Settings Add 9 Choose Connect directly to another x computer Type of Connection de Select the type of the connection h Click Next C Dial up to private network Connect using my phone line modem or ISDN C Connect to a private network through the Internet Create a Virtual Private Network VPN connection or tunnel through the intemet Connect using my serial parallel port C Connect to the network via broadband Connect through my broadband connection i In the drop down box select the serial 20211791 port you will be using to make the Select a Device conne cti on This is
383. t gateway on remote network box is not selected the gateway will not point to the 6300 unit when you establish a direct or modem connection OS Specific Troubleshooting Advice Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect If you are having trouble establishing a connection check your New Connection s properties to make sure they are set up correctly A Click Start Programs Accessories Communications Network and Dialup Connections to bring up the Network Connections screen B In the Network Connections window right click Optimod 6300 Direct and choose Properties C The Properties window opens for Optimod 6300 Direct D Click the Networking tab E Set Type of dial up server am calling to PPP Windows 95 98 2000 Internet F Select the Settings button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked Then click OK G In Components checked are used by this connection uncheck all except for Internet Protocol TCP IP H Select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click the Properties button The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens Choose Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically J Click the Advanced button on the Internet Protocol TCP IP Window 5 8 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 6300 K In the Advanced TCP IP Settings select the General Tab make sure that L no check boxes are check
384. t many find fatiguing To avoid excessive density with fast 5 band release time we recommend using no more than 5dB gain reduction in band 3 compensating for any lost loudness by speeding up the AGC RELEASE instead MB REL Multiband Release control can be switched to any of seven settings To understand how to adjust this control for sound for picture programming please see the discussion above under MB DRIVE The SPEECH MB RELEASE control overrides the MB RELEASE control when OPTIMOD PC automatically detects speech page 3 5 You may wish to set the SPEECH MB RELEASE control faster for speech to maximize smoothness and uniformity and slower on music to prevent excessive build up of density Compression Threshold Speech Compression Threshold controls set the com pression threshold for music and speech in each band following OPTIMOD PC s automatic speech music discriminator in units of dB We recommend making small changes around the factory settings to preserve the internal headroom built into the processing chain These controls will affect the spectral balance of the processing above threshold but are also risky because they can significantly affect the amount of distortion produced by the look ahead limiter OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 5 1 MB Attack Release Threshold Full Name Advanced Name Range MB REL Multiband Release Slow Slow2 Med Med2 MFast MFast2 Fast Speech Multiband Release Sl
385. t parameters to their factory default set tings It also erases all passcodes You should never need to use this but ton in an existing installation although it is a convenient way to make the 6300 factory fresh if it is being installed in a different facility The RESTORE DEFAULTS button takes you to a screen that allows you to keep or erase any user presets that exist in your unit OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 35 Remote Control Interface Programming Skip this step if you do not wish to program the GPI contact closure remote con trol interface 1 Navigate to SETUP NEXT NETWORK amp REMOTE REMOTE INTERFACE 2 Program one or more remote control interfaces A Navigate to the desired Remote Interface button 1 through 4 by repeatedly pressing the NEXT button B Hold down the button while turning the knob to select the desired function for the interface Use either button below the appropriate graphics both work the same A momentary pulse of voltage will switch most functions except as noted e Preset Name switches the named preset on the air The control interface can recall any factory or user preset e Input Analog selects the analog inputs e Input Digital selects the digital input and but does not apply deempha sis to it e Input Digital J 17 selects the digital input and applies J 17 deemphasis to it e Bypass switches the Bypass Test Mode on the air e Tone switches
386. t the Configure button d Set the MAXIMUM SPEED BPS to 115200 e Select OK and try your connection again If you see Error 619 The specified port is not connected Make sure the INTERFACE TYPE on the 6300 is correct a On the 6300 go to SETUP NETWORK amp REMOTE Pc CONNEC b Set PC CONNECT to DIRECT Try your connection again Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect If you are having trouble establishing a connection check your New Connection s properties to make sure they are set up correctly OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5 9 A Click Start Programs Accessories Communications Network and Dialup Connections to bring up the Network Connections screen B In the Network Connections window right click Optimod 6300 Modem and choose Properties C The Properties window opens for Optimod 6300 Modem D Click the Properties button E Select the General tab and make sure that Connect Using displays the correct modem and port F Click the Configure button G Set the Maximum Speed bps to 115200 H Check the Enable hardware flow control make sure all other hardware fea tures are unchecked Then click OK Click the Networking tab on the Properties window J Set Type of dial up server am calling to PPP Windows 95 98 2000 Internet K Select the Settings button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked Then cl
387. t ways e Rename the Alias preferred Start the Optimod 6300 PC Remote executable you wish to use and rename your old Aliases with a slightly different name A new Alias folder with the new name will be created in the same location as the Optimod 6300 PC Remote executable e Delete and Recreate the Alias Start the Optimod 6300 PC Remote executable you wish to use Delete the old 6300 Aliases and create new ones to replace OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 65 them New Alias folders will be created in the same location as the Optimod 6300 PC Remote executable Important The deletion process will automatically erase its associated folder including the Backup directory If you have anything in the Backup directory that you wish to keep you should therefore move that directory elsewhere or transfer the desired files to another active backup directory Ordinarily the erasure process will move the Backup directory to your computer s Recycle Bin so you can recover a Backup directory that you have accidentally deleted in this way To share an archived User Preset between 6300s A Navigate to the directory containing the desired User Preset from within the RESTORE FROM PC dialog box B Click the RESTORE button This User Preset will be downloaded to the 6300 to which 6300 PC Re mote is currently connected If the User Preset is encrypted PC Remote will request its password Using the 6300 for Production and Mastering
388. te a new backup folder the next time you do a backup leaving your renamed backup folder untouched Later you will be able to restore from any folder the Restore dialog box allows you to choose the folder contain ing the files to be restored If you attempt to back up a preset with the same name as a preset exist ing in the Backup folder but with a different date 6300 PC Remote will warn you and will allow you to overwrite the preset in the Backup folder or to cancel the operation If you wish to keep the existing archived pre set you can first use a file manager to move the existing user preset in the Backup folder to another folder and then repeat the backup opera tion To restore archived presets system files and automation files In addition to restoring archived presets system files and automation files to their original Optimod you can also copy these archived files from one Optimod to another The Optimod whose connection is active will receive the file If the preset system file or automation file was encrypted when it was originally saved PC Remote will request the password under which it was encrypted User Presets are compatible with all 6300 software versions Orban adds new controls to a software version the new software will assign a reasonable default value to any control missing in an old User Preset If you archive such a User Preset after restoring it the newly written ar chive file will now includ
389. the Master band and the B2 meter indicates the gain reduc tion in the Bass band When the processing is in dual mono mode the gain reduction meters can be toggled between channel 1 or channel 2 via SETUP METER MODE or when you are in the Main screen by pressing the PREV button for chan nel 1 and the Next button for channel 2 Meanwhile the PC Remote ap plication displays both channels gain reductions simultaneously e Multimeters The rightmost pair of meters indicate the gain reduction of the AGC or Multiband channel look ahead limiters in units of dB see page 6 41 for a block diagram of the processing or the action of the High Frequency Enhancer and Stereo Enhancer processing in arbitrary units The user can select the de sired mode via SETUP MULTIMETER OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 3 Introduction to Processing Some Audio Processing Concepts Reducing the peak to average ratio of the audio increases loudness If peaks are re duced the average level can be increased within the permitted modulation limits The effectiveness with which this can be accomplished without introducing objec tionable side effects such as pumping or intermodulation distortion is the single best measure of audio processing effectiveness Compression reduces the difference in level between the soft and loud sounds to make more efficient use of permitted peak level limits resulting in a subjective in crease in the loudness of soft sounds
390. the Tone Test Mode preset on the air e Exit Test If a test preset is presently on the air EXIT TEST reverts to the previous processing preset e Stereo connects the 6300 s left and right inputs to the left and right in puts of the processing and stereo couples the processing e Dual Mono connects the 6300 s left and right inputs to the left and right inputs of the processing and removes all stereo coupling from the process ing so that the two channels of the processing operate as independent processors sharing only the active preset Both channels of the processing use the same preset e Pass User Bits When triggered causes the 6300 to pass AES user bits from its digital input to its digital output See step 22 on page 2 19 e Block User Bits When triggered prevents the 6300 from passing AES user bits from its digital input to its digital output 2 36 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 e Reset Clock To Hour resets the internal clock to the nearest hour For example 3 03 10 would be reset to 3 00 00 while 3 53 40 would be reset to 4 00 00 Use this function to periodically re sync the 6300 s internal clock to your station s master clock e Reset Clock to Midnight Resets the clock to 0 00 00 You can use this function to periodically re sync the 6300 s internal clock to your station s master clock e Mute Analog Output When voltage is applied the analog output mutes One could use this as an off the air alert by drivi
391. the look ahead limiter aware of the preemphasis If you emit the MB LIM signal peak levels will only be controlled if you set the multiband preemphasis to 50uS 75 5 in step 8 on page 2 23 If you are driving a pre emphasized channel and can bypass the channel s internal preemphasis filter use PRE However if you cannot defeat the channel s preemphasis filter or if you will use the analog output for monitoring set the output FLAT NOTE If the 6300 is set to emit either the AGC or MULTIBAND signals choosing PRE E in the current step will cause very poor peak level control OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 25 because there is no preemphasis aware peak limiting anywhere in the system and because the preemphasis filter before the output will cause peak level to increase markedly C You can use either program material or tone to set your output level and thus your modulation If you want to use tone turn on the 400Hz calibration tone To do this a Navigate to SETUP TEST b Set the MODE to TONE Set TONE FREQ to 400 Hz d Set TONE LvL to 10096 e Press the NEXT key f Set TONE CHAN to L R g When you have finished with the tone set the MODE to OPERATE D Using the AO 100 button set the desired analog output level corresponding to 100 modulation using units of dBu 0 dBu 0 776 V rms Refer to Setting Output Modulation Levels on page 1 20 If you have chosen AGC or MULTIBAND in step A ab
392. the normal AGC release it essentially freezes the AGC gain This prevents the AGC from building up density in material whose level is already well controlled If the level goes outside the window then the AGC switches to the release rate specified by AGC MASTER RELEASE so the AGC can still correct large gain variations quickly The normal setting for the AGC WINDOW SIZE is 3dB AGC Window Release see AGC WiNDOW SIZE above AGC Ratio determines the compression ratio of the AGC The compression ratio is the ratio between the change in input level and the resulting change in output level both measured in units of dB The 6300 compressor can be operated at a compression ratio as low as 2 1 This can add a sense of dynamic range and is mostly useful for subtle fine arts formats like classical and jazz AGC Bass Threshold determines the compression threshold of the bass band in the AGC It can be used to set the target spectral balance of the AGC As the B CPL control is moved towards 10096 the AGC BASS THRESHOLD con trol affects the sound less and less The interaction between the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control and the AGC B CPL con trol is a bit complex so we recommend leaving the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control at its factory setting unless you have a good reason for readjusting it AGC Idle Gain The idle gain is the target gain of the AGC when the silence gate is active Whenever the silence gate turns on the gain of the A
393. tiband processing will automatically re equalize and condition program material to control loudness variations Low IM Look Ahead Limiter The 6300 s peak limiter prevents overshoots by ex amining a few milliseconds of the unprocessed sound before it is limited This way the limiter can anticipate peaks that are coming up It is important to minimize audible peak limiter induced distortion when one is driving a low bitrate codec because one does not want to waste precious bits encoding the distortion Look ahead limiting can achieve this goal hard clipping cannot One can model any peak limiter as a multiplier that multiplies its input signal by a gain control signal This is a form of amplitude modulation Amplitude modulation produces sidebands around the carrier signal In a peak limiter each Fourier component of the input signal is a sepa rate carrier and the peak limiting process produces modulation side bands around each Fourier component Considered this way a hard clipper has a wideband gain control signal and thus introduces sidebands that are far removed in frequency from their associated Fourier carriers Hence the carriers have little ability to mask the resulting sidebands psychoacoustically Conversely a look ahead limiter s gain control signal has a much lower bandwidth and pro duces modulation sidebands that are less likely to be audible Simple wideband look ahead limiting can still produce audible inter mod
394. tion in Hertz The range is 1 15 kHz HIGH GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut over 10 dB range HIGH WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization in octaves The range is 0 8 4 0 octaves If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric equalizer one octave is a good starting point Excessive high frequency boost can exaggerate hiss and distortion in program mate rial that is less than perfectly clean We suggest no more than 4 dB boost as a practi cal maximum unless source material is primarily from high quality digital sources In several of our presets we use this equalizer to boost the upper presence band 4 4 kHz slightly leaving broadband HF boost to the BRILLIANCE and or HF ENHANCE con trols Brilliance controls the drive to Band 5 in the 5 Band structure only This control is nonfunctional in the 2 Band structure The Band 5 compressor limiter dynamically controls this boost protecting the final limiter from excessive HF drive We recom mend a maximum of 4 dB of BRILLIANCE boost and most people will prefer substan tially less DJ Bass DJ Bass Boost control determines the amount of bass boost produced on some male voices In its default Orr position it causes the gain reduction of the lowest frequency band to move quickly to the same gain reduction as its nearest neighbor when gated This fights any tendency of the lowest frequency band to de velop significantly more gain than its neighbor when pro
395. tion ID setting 2 18 Status bits AES3 2 18 stereo control by status bits 2 18 stereo enhancement 3 7 Stereo enhancer Controls 3 31 Stereo Enhancer Amount 3 32 Depth 3 32 Diffusion 3 32 In Out 3 32 Ratio Limit 3 32 Style 3 32 STL compatibility with 32 kHz sample rate 2 7 overshoot uncomressed digital 2 7 systems 1 12 STL systems 1 10 12 14 streaming media 1 21 studio AGC preset 3 17 studio transmitter link 1 12 subassembly removal and replacement 4 2 subframe delay 1 17 subnet mask 2 37 sync setting source 2 25 sync delay 2 20 Sync input 1 16 system setup quick setup 2 12 System Setup screen 2 12 T Talk format 3 23 TCP IP setting parameters 2 36 technical support 5 12 telephone support 5 12 test modes 3 56 test tone frequencies 2 26 Threshold Bass Delta 3 37 Master Delta 3 37 Multiband Compression 3 50 time daylight saving 2 13 summer 2 13 time amp date 2 12 timeserver 2 38 top cover reattaching 4 5 removing 4 2 Transmitter interfacing to 1 16 troubleshooting installation 5 1 tv presets 3 25 two band bass attack control 3 45 bass coupling control 3 43 bass threshold control 3 45 crossover control 3 47 drive control 3 41 full modify controls 3 41 gate control 3 43 master attack control 3 45 master compression thres
396. tioning block The highpass filter is useful for production applica tions where it is necessary to remove low frequency rumble from a recording The phase rotator makes speech more symmetrical reducing its peak to average ratio by as much as 6 dB without adding nonlinear distortion Hence phase rotation can be very useful for loudness processing of speech Stereo Enhancement The 6300 provides two different stereo enhancement algo rithms The first called L R DELAY is based on Orban s patented analog 222 Stereo Enhancer which increases the energy in the stereo difference signal L R whenever a transient is detected in the stereo sum signal L R By operating only on tran sients the 222 increases width brightness and punch without unnaturally increas ing reverb which is usually predominantly in the L R channel Gating circuitry detects mono material with slight channel or phase imbalances and suppresses enhancement so this built in imbalance is not exaggerated It also allows you to set a width limit to prevent over enhancement of material with sig nificant stereo content and will always limit the ratio of L R L R to unity or less The second stereo enhancement algorithm is based on the well known Max tech nique This passes the L R signal through a delay line and adds this decorrelated sig nal to the unenhanced L R signal Gating circuitry similar to that used in the 222 style algorithm prevents over enhancement and undes
397. to i cavi danneggiati Non esporre l apparecchio e il cavo ad esagerate sollecitazioni meccaniche Per evitare il contatto con le tensioni elettriche pericolose l apparecchio non deve venir aperto In caso di anomalie di funzionamento l apparecchio deve venir riparato solo da centri di servizio autorizzati Nell apparecchio non si trovano parti che possano essere riparate dall utente Per evitare scosse elettriche o incendi l apparecchio va protetto dall umidit Evitare che umidit o liquidi entrino nell apparecchio In caso di anomalie di funzionamento rispettivamente dopo la penetrazione di liquidi o oggetti nell apparecchio staccare immediatamente l apparecchio dalla rete e contattare un centro di servizio qualificato orban PLEASE READ BEFORE PROCEEDING Manual The Operating Manual contains instructions to verify the proper operation of this unit and initialization of certain options You will find these operations are most conveniently performed on the bench before you install the unit in the rack Please review the Manual especially the installation section before unpacking the unit Trial Period Precautions If your unit has been provided on a trial basis You should observe the following precautions to avoid reconditioning charges in case you later wish to return the unit to your dealer 1 Note the packing technique and save all packing materials It is not wise to ship in other than the factory carton Re plac
398. to this point will cause the sound quality to become obviously unacceptable You need not in fact cannot create a sound entirely from scratch User Presets are created by modifying Factory Presets or by further modifying Factory Presets that have been previously modified with a LEss MoRE adjustment It is wise to set the LESS MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possible to your desired sound before you make further modifications at the Advanced Modify level This is because the 55 control gets you close to an optimum trade off between loudness and artifacts so any changes you make are likely to be smaller and to require reset ting fewer controls In the 6300 LEss MoRE affects only the dynamics processing compression limiting and clipping Unlike some of Orban s older digital processors the 6300 s equaliza tion and stereo enhancement are decoupled from LEss MoRE You can therefore change EQ or stereo enhancement and not lose the ability to use LESS MORE When you create a user preset the 6300 will automatically save your EQ and stereo en hancement settings along with your LESS MORE setting When you recall the user preset you will still be able to edit your LESS MORE setting if you wish Full Modify Full Modify is the most detailed control level available from the 6300 s front panel It allows you to adjust the dynamics section at approximately the level of full con trol available in Orban s 6200 processor
399. ts of the power supply that are shielded by an insulating cover are hot to the AC line These parts are labeled with a warning sym bol like the one to the left of this paragraph The insulating cover should always be in place when the 6300 is connected to the AC line B Set the unit upright on a padded surface with the front panel facing you C Remove all screws holding the top cover in place and lift the top cover off Use a 1 Phillips screwdriver 2 Removing the Front Panel Assembly A Detach the cables that connect the display board assembly to the control board Avoid bending or breaking the pins Note the lead dress so you can re assemble the unit correctly B Detach the front panel from the unit a On each side of the chassis remove the three screws close to the front panel b Remove the front panel by sliding it out C Set the front panel face down on a soft cloth to prevent scratches D Using a 3 16 inch hex nut driver remove the four hex nuts holding the two side brackets and central shield to the front panel Remove the brackets and shield and set them aside E Using a 1 Philips screwdriver remove and reserve the eight screws and spac ers that fasten the display board assembly to the front panel F Lift the display board assembly off its supporting standoffs G Separate the two boards in the display board assembly by carefully unplug ging the top board from the bottom board Note that there are fo
400. ttons access the following controls PRE E Flat AGC PRE E er eee pee Flat uA ELEC Flat 2 Test the power supply The power supply is a module In case of any power supply failure the entire supply must be replaced by an exact replacement available from Orban Service Attempts to repair the supply on a component level and or to replace the supply with a non approved supply may compromise your Optimod s compliance with the EMI and safety regulations in your country The 3 3V and 2 5 supplies are locally regulated on the DSP and con trol boards see Section 6 Measure the power supply s regulated voltages at the DVM and observe the rip ple with an oscilloscope AC coupled Convenient sources of these voltages are the inductors adjacent to power supply connectors the I O DSP board Con nect your probe to the sides of the inductors away from the power supply con nectors The results in Table 4 1 are typical Power Supply Rail DC Voltage volts AC Ripple mV p p 15VDC 15 0 5 lt 20 15VDC 15 0 5 lt 20 5VDC 5 0 25 lt 20 Table 4 1 Typical Power Supply Voltages and AC Ripple Adjust Analog Output Level Trim A Verify 6300 software controls are set to their default settings Refer to step 1 on page 4 7 B Feed the 6300 output with the built in 400 Hz test tone a Navigate to SETUP TEST b Set the MODE to TONE C Connect the audio voltm
401. tudio operators peak their program material on the studio meters This as sures that the 6300 s processing presets will operate in their preferred range You may adjust this level with a standard reference line up level tone from your studio or with program material Note that in this step you are calibrating to the normal indication of the studio meters this is quite different from the actual peak level If you know the reference VU or PPM level that will be presented to the 6300 set the reference level to this level but please verify it with the steps shown directly below A Press the RECALL button B Turn the knob until 5B GENERAL PURP appears in the lower line of the dis play C Press the RECALL NEXT button 2 22 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 D Navigate to SETUP gt ANALOG CALIB gt REF VU or PPM depending on which metering system you use E Calibrate using tone F Skip to step if you are using Program material to calibrate the 6300 to your standard studio level a Verify is set to No Refer to step 2 on page 2 21 b Feed a tone at your reference level to the 6300 If you are not using a studio level controller feed a tone through your console at normal program levels typically OVU if your console uses VU meters If you are using a studio level controller that performs an AGC function such as an Orban 8200ST OPTIMOD Studio adjust it for normal opera tion
402. u to vary the knee of its in put output transfer curve from hard 0 to soft 10 Loudness Control The 2 band structure contains a defeatable CBS Loudness Con troller algorithm which controls the loudness of most commercials well enough to eliminate viewer annoyance It works by constantly monitoring the subjective loud OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL OPERATION 3 9 ness of the 6300 s output When subjective loudness would otherwise exceed a pre set threshold the Loudness Controller enhances the normal gain control produced by the processing with further gain reduction preventing loudness from exceeding the threshold The user can adjust this threshold from the Full modify screen of any 2 band preset The edited preset can then be saved as a user preset The Loudness Controller may reduce the dramatic effect of certain sounds in enter tainment programming like gunshots explosions or screeching tires Operators may therefore want to turn the Loudness Controller on during commercial breaks and off during normal programming Most Sound for picture 2 band presets have the Loudness Controller on The easiest way to turn the Loudness Controller off is to re call the 2B GEN PUR NO LC preset If you have created a custom preset you can save two variations one with the loudness controller on and one with it off and recall these by remote control via the 6300 s GPI inputs The 5 band structure does not have extra loudness control because its mul
403. ulation distortion between heavy bass and midrange material The look ahead limiter in your Optimod uses sophisticated techniques to re duce such IM distortion without compromising loudness capability 2 band Purist Processing The 6300 s 2 band algorithm can be set to be phase linear We believe that this is the ideal processing for classical music and jazz programming because it does not dy namically re equalize high frequencies the subtle HF limiter only acts to reduce high frequency energy when it would otherwise cause overload because of the TV pre 3 10 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 emphasis curve The 6300 s 2 band phase linear structure therefore keeps the musi cal spectrum coherent and natural Input output Delay The input output time delay is typically 25 ms about three quarters of an NTSC frame To make intelligent decisions about how to process the 6300 needs to look ahead at the next part of the program waveform As digital transmission processing advances further and further from its analog roots this is the inevitable price of progress To avoid lip sync problems in sound for picture applications the 6300 allows you to pad the delay to one full frame of 24 25 or 29 97 fps video which makes matching audio and video delays convenient See step 23 on page 2 20 If talent monitors off air through headphones they are in the same location as the 6300 you can configure the 6300 s analog output to supply a special low
404. unction from anywhere in the Optimod menu tree by navigating to SETUP NEXT TIME DATE AND ID NEXT TIME SYNC NEXT You can specify the timeserver either from your Optimod s front panel or from its PC Remote software From the front panel you can only enter the time server s IP address for example 192 43 244 18 If you specify the timeserver from PC Remote you can specify either its named address for example time nist gov or its IP address 4 Specify the time sync parameters from your Optimod s front panel Skip this step if you wish to specify the timeserver and time sync parameters from your Windows XP computer A Press the TIME SERVER button The timeserver IP Address Screen appears a Use the NExT PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the IP address Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value Repeat until you have selected all the numbers in the desired IP address b Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting B Press the Sync Now soft button to test your settings Your Optimod s display should indicate that it is connecting to the IP address that you specified When the connection is successful the Optimod s clock will automatically synchro nize to the timeserver e f the connection is not successful within five seconds the display will indi cate that the connection failed This means either that the timeserver is too busy or that your setup cannot connect to t
405. up server I am calling field k Make sure that Internet Protocol TCP IP is checked You may leave File and Printer Sharing for Mi crosoft Networks and Client for Microsoft Networks checked if you like Click OK m When the Connection properties window appears click OK General Options Securty Networking Advanced acci e File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Client for Microsoft Networks Install Uninstall Properties Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default 2 Launch an existing Windows XP Direct connection Once you have set up a connection specifying Direct Connect in the 6300 PC Remote application see To set up a new connection on page 3 58 choosing this connection from 6300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows Direct Connec tion to your 6300 You can connect by selecting the desired connection from the drop down list in the CONNECT menu You can also connect by double clicking the connection in the Connection List window A dialog bubble will appear on the bottom right hand corner of the screen verifying your connection if the connection is successful 8300 PC File Edit View Tools Connect Help New 8300 Disconnect All Connections 8300 8300 8300 modem 8300 modem If you have trouble making a connection ref
406. ur plugs and jacks 3 Removing the Control board A If you have not done so yet remove the top cover step 1 above OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4 3 B Using a 3 16 inch hex nut driver remove the four hex nuts holding the DB 25 and DB 9 connectors to the rear panel of the chassis If you have not done so yet remove the cables that connect the display as sembly to the control board step 2 on page 4 2 D Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the control board to the 05 board E Using a 1 Philips screwdriver remove the four corner screws holding the con trol board to the chassis standoffs F The control board is now free and can be removed from the chassis 4 Removing the Input Output DSP Board A If you have not done so yet remove the top cover step 1 above B Unlock all XLR connectors using a jeweler s screwdriver engage the locking mechanism in the center of the triangle formed by the three contact pins and turn counterclockwise until the XLR connector is no longer attached C Using a deep hex nut driver preferred a small crescent wrench or a pair of slip joint pliers in an emergency remove the nut and lockwasher fastening the BNC connector to the chassis D Remove the ribbon cable that connects the I O DSP board to the control board E Remove the short two conductor cable that connects the I O DSP board to the control board F Disconnect the cable conne
407. ut Noise Reduction is identical to TV 5B GEN PuR W NR except that the single ended dynamic noise reduc tion system is off TV 5B NEWS TV 5 band News rides gain more quickly than the general purpose presets Its AGC release time is faster so it will bring up low level material more quickly It is designed for live news programs where input levels may be quite un predictable It also automatically re equalizes substandard audio which is quite common in live news broadcasts TV 5B SPORTS TV 5 band Sports is similar to TV 5B NEWS except the AGC release time is slower to resist pumping up crowd noise TV 5B OPTICAL FILM TV 5 band Optical Film is designed to make the best of the low quality audio provided with optical film sound tracks particularly 16mm The gate threshold is quite high to avoid pumping up hiss thumps and other optical ar tifacts The threshold of the single ended dynamic noise reduction system is also high so that this system can reduce artifacts as far as possible Release times are slow because we assumed that material encoded on optical film has already been carefully level controlled to accommodate the very limited dynamic range of the medium so little gain riding is therefore required from the 6300 Equalizer Controls The table summarizes the equalization controls available for the 5 band structure Note that advanced controls are accessible only from 6300 PC Remote software Except for BRILLIANCE
408. utton Be careful the 6300 will emit a loud tone that could be disturbing to listeners e To use program material press the No button 16 Set the analog output level A Press the NEXT button B Skip this step if you are not using the analog output Turn the knob to set the desired analog output level corresponding to 10096 modulation in units of dBu 0 dBu 0 776 Vrms Refer to Setting Output Modulation Levels on page 1 20 If you have set the output source to AGC or MULTIBAND in step 10 on page 2 14 the peak level will not be well controlled because no peak limiting has been applied 17 Set the digital output 1 level A Press the NEXT button B Skip this step if you are not using digital output 1 Turn the knob to set the desired digital output 1 level corresponding to 10096 modulation in units of dB below full scale 18 Set the digital output 2 level A Press the NEXT button B Skip this step if you are not using digital output 2 Turn the knob to set the desired digital output level 2 corresponding to 10096 modulation in units of dB below full scale C Press the NEXT button If you activated the modulation setup tone in step 15 on page 2 17 the tone will turn off automatically D Press the NEXT button De 1 8 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 6300 19 Choose a processing preset A Turn the knob until your desired preset is visible in the lower line of the dis play B Press the RECALL N
409. ves pro vided by the Orban 622B analog parametric equalizer Therefore unlike less sophis ticated digital equalizers that use the bilinear transformation to generate EQ curves the shapes of the 6300 s curves are not distorted at high frequencies Midrange Parametric Equalizer is a parametric equalizer whose boost and cut curves closely emulate those of an analog parametric equalizer with conventional bell shaped curves MID FREQ determines the center frequency of the equalization in Hertz Range is 250 6000Hz MID GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut in dB over a 10 dB range MID WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization in octaves The range is 0 8 4 0 octaves If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric equalizer 1 octave is a good starting point With 5 band presets the audible effect of the midrange equalizer is closely associ ated with the amount of gain reduction in the midrange bands With small amounts of gain reduction it boosts power in the presence region This can increase the loudness of such material substantially As you increase the gain reduction in the midrange bands by turning the MULTIBAND DRIVE Multiband Drive control up the GAIN control will have progressively less audible effect The compressor for the midrange bands will tend to reduce the effect of the frequency boost in an at tempt to keep the gain constant to prevent excessive stridency in program material that
410. vigate to SETUP gt NEXT gt TIME DATE AND ID gt NEXT gt TIME SYNC A Use the PROTOCOL control to choose either TiME PROT or SNTP e Select TIME PROT if the Optimod is behind a firewall that does not pass UDP packets TiME PROT selects the Time Protocol as described in the standard RFC868 This method uses TCP on port 37 e Select SNTP if your network timeserver supports the Simple Network Time Protocol as described in standard RFC1769 This method uses UDP on port 123 Ask your network administrator which protocols are available SNTP is slightly more accurate B Using SYNC PERIOD choose how often your Optimod will automatically update its internal clock to the timeserver you selected The choices are OFF 8 HOURS and 24 HOURS If the connection to the timeserver fails due to network overload or other problems your Optimod will try once per hour to synchronize un til it is successful C Set the OFFSET to the difference in hours between your time zone and Uni versal Time UTC UTC is also known as GMT or Greenwich Mean Time e The value can range between 12 and 12 hours If this value is set to 0 your Optimod s time will be the same as UTC e You can empirically adjust this value until the correct time for your location is displayed after you synchronize your Optimod to a timeserver Name IP Address Location time a nist gov 129 6 15 28 NIST Gaithersburg Maryland t
411. waves at 6300 s analog or digital left and right outputs When the 6300 s left right analog output is switched to FLAT a deemphasis filter is inserted between output of the 6300 s audio processing and its line output Thus as the frequency of the test tone is changed the level at the 6300 s line output will fol low the selected deemphasis curve In most cases the preemphasis filter in the driven equipment will undo the effect of the 6300 s internal deemphasis so the 6300 s out put level should be adjusted such that the tone produces 10096 modulation of the transmission link as measured after the link s preemphasis filter At 100Hz switching the deemphasis out or in will have negligible effect on the level appearing at the 6300 s left and right audio outputs 1 20 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 You can adjust the frequency and modulation level of the built in line up tone via the front panel or PC Remote software You can use the front panel the PC Remote software or the opto isolated remote control interface ports to activate the Test Tone Built in Calibrated Bypass Test Mode A BYPASS Test Mode is available to transparently pass line up tones generated ear lier in the system It will also pass program material with no gain reduction or pro tection against overmodulation It can transparently pass any line up tone applied to its input up to about 13096 output modulation at which point clipping may oc cur Setting Output Modu
412. with the other coupling controls these controls can adjust the mul tiband processing to be anything from fully independent operation to quasi wideband processing 2 gt 1 CPL control determines the extent to which the gain of band 1 below 100Hz or 200Hz depending on crossover setting is determined by and follows the gain of band 2 centered at 400Hz Set towards 100 fully coupled it reduces the amount of dynamic bass boost preventing unnatural bass boost Set towards 096 independ ent it permits frequencies below 100Hz the slam region to have maximum im pact in modern rock urban dance rap and other music where bass punch is crucial Accordingly it can be useful in music video oriented formats Bx Out Band x Output Mix controls determine the relative balance of the bands in the multiband compressor Because these controls mix after the band compres sors they do not affect the compressors gain reductions and can be used as a graphic equalizer to fine tune the spectral balance of the program material over a 3 dB range Their range has been purposely limited because the only gain control element after these controls is the back end look ahead limiter which can produce audible distor tion if overdriven The thresholds of the individual compressors have been tuned to prevent audible distortion with almost any program material Large changes in the frequency balance of the compressor outputs will change this tuning leav
413. xample Program Files Orban Optimod 6300v2 Each version of 6300 PC Remote will display a 6300 Aliases even those pointing to 6300s with incompatible version numbers If you attempt to connect to an older ver sion of 6300 from a newer version of 6300 PC Remote 6300 PC Remote will offer to upgrade the software in the target 6300 so that it corresponds to the version of 6300 PC Remote that is active If you attempt to connect to newer version of 6300 from an older version of 6300 PC Remote it will refuse to connect and will emit an error message regarding incompatible versions If you decide to install the new software to a different location on your PC new Ali ases created using the new software will not be located in the same place as the old Aliases To Move Alias Folders Even though each version of 6300 PC Remote can see all aliases you may wish to move the corresponding folders so they are under the folder corresponding to the highest version of 6300 PC Remote that is currently installed on your computer al though this is not required If your Alias folders reside in different locations you can move all the Alias folders to the same location by using the PC Remote software Do not use an external file manager like Windows Explorer to do this The old Alias folders need to be re created under the Optimod 6300 PC Remote software you wish to use so that the registry entries can be correctly updated You can do this two differen
414. y asynchronous re sampling see page 1 13 One strategy is to apply to OPTIMOD 6300 s output signal the same lossy compres sion that the DAB transmitter would apply If a digital link is available with sufficient bit rate to pass this compressed signal it can then be passed directly to the DAB transmitter without further processing if synchronization issues can be resolved Consult with the manufacturer of your DAB transmitter to see if this can be done Where only an analog or lossy digital link is available feed the audio output of OPTIMOD 6300 directly into the link If present the transmitter s protection limiter should be adjusted so that audio is normally just below the threshold of limiting The transmitter protection limiter should respond only to signals caused by faults or by spurious peaks introduced by imperfections in the link 1 1 0 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 6300 Where maximum quality is desired it is wise to request that all equipment in the signal path after the studio be carefully measured aligned and qualified to meet the appropriate standards for bandwidth distortion group delay and gain stability Such equipment should be measured at reasonable intervals OPTIMOD 6300 at the transmitter gain control before the STL The audio received at OPTIMOD 6300 s input should have the highest possible qual ity To achieve the full audible benefit of OPTIMOD 6300 processing use a studio transmitter link STL that is as fl
415. your 6300 Orban Customer Service supports only the 3Com U S Robot ics 56kbps fax modem EXT on the 6300 side of your connection although other 56kbps modems will often work OK You can use either an internal or an external modem with your PC A Connect the telephone line from the wall phone jack to the wall connection icon on the back of the modem modem in B Connect the modem to the 6300 s serial port with a standard not null mo dem cable C Set the modem to AUTO ANSWER and turn it on For 3Com U S Robotics 56kbps fax modem EXT set dipswitches 3 5 and 8 in the down position to activate the AUTO ANSWER setting All other dipswitches should be set to the up position 4 Prepare the 6300 for direct serial connection through the serial port Skip this step if you will not be using a modem connection A Navigate to SETUP NETWORK amp REMOTE B Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see DIRECT on the display You are now ready to connect your computer to your 6300 through a null modem cable connected to your computer s serial port Refer to Installing 6300 PC Remote Control Software on page 2 42 Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Time Server Skip this section if you do not wish to automatically synchronize your Optimod s internal clock to a network timeserver which may be part of your local network or located on the Internet OPTIMOD 6300 DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2 39 1 Na
416. your program ming if you believe this other preset has a more appropriate sound Also if you want to fine tune the frequency balance of the programming feel free to use Basic Modify and make small changes to the Bass Mid EQ and HF EQ controls The 6300 lets you make changes in EQ and stereo enhancement without losing the ability to use Less More settings Of course LEss MORE is still available for the unedited preset if you want to go back to it There is no way you can erase or otherwise damage the Factory Presets So feel free to experiment If a preset has 2B or 2BAND in its name it will activate the 2 band structure The Protection presets are 2 band as well Other presets use the 5 band structure Protection and AGC Presets LOOK AHEAD LIMITER The LOOK AHEAD LIMITER preset is a 2 band preset that turns off the stereo enhancer AGC equalizer and 2 band compressor so that you can use the processing as a fast look ahead protection limiter This preset s LEss MORE control is set to 1 0 With this setting the threshold of the look ahead limiter is 18 dB above reference level For most program material LESS MORE 1 0 will produce no look ahead limiter gain reduction This assumes that the 6300 s AI and DI controls have been ad justed to produce 10 dB of AGC Master Band gain reduction when the RocK GENERAL preset is active and the 6300 s inputs are driven by a 400 Hz tone at your facility s reference level

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual de instruções lavadora de alta pressão      Descargar manual  ANTIK JUICE IPTV DEMO KIT 3.0 MANUAL_version2  Mode d`emploi - commune de Saint Pardoux 79    Externer Aquariumfilter - WilTec Wildanger Technik GmbH    Installation Bulletin: IRDH575  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file